teach yourself opas32 - keysightsafco technologies, inc. 1 before you begin welcome to teach...

Teach YourselfOPAS32

Self-Training Guide

SAFCO Technologies, Inc.6060 Northwest Highway

Chicago, IL 60631

CONFIDENTIAL SAFCO PROPERTY

This document contains information confidential to SAFCO Technologies, Inc.. Reproduction or translation ofany part of this work without permission of the copyright owner is unlawful. Requests for permission or furtherinformation should be addressed to SAFCO Technologies, Inc., 6060 Northwest Highway, Chicago, IL 60631.This document could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made tothe information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the document. SAFCO maymake improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or program(s) described in this document at anytime. SAFCO Technologies, Inc. provides this document "as is" without warranty of any kind, either expressedor implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particularpurpose. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions;therefore, this statement may not apply.

Copyright

� 2000 by SAFCO Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form without the writtenpermission of SAFCO Technologies, Inc. Information is subject to change without notice.

Trademark AcknowledgmentsSAFCO is a registered trademark of SAFCO Technologies, Inc.

OPAS32, TQNM, and VoicePrint are trademarks of SAFCO Technologies, Inc.

OPAS32 is covered under U.S. Patent No. 5,490,204.

WIZARD is a registered trademark of SAFCO Technologies, Inc.

Windows, Microsoft Excel, and Microsoft Word are trademarks and Microsoft is a registered trademark ofMicrosoft Corporation.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

SAFCO Technologies, Inc. i

Table of Contents

Before You Begin................................................................................................................1What is OPAS32?........................................................................................................................ 1

Benefits at a Glance .....................................................................................................................................2Who Should Read This Book ..................................................................................................... 3What’s Inside .............................................................................................................................. 3Getting the Most From Your Training ....................................................................................... 4

Self-Testing ..................................................................................................................................................4Terms and Definitions ..................................................................................................................................5

Learning About Software Updates ............................................................................................ 6Typographical Conventions....................................................................................................... 6Requirements.............................................................................................................................. 7

PC Requirements .........................................................................................................................................7Software Requirements................................................................................................................................7

Setting Up for Training............................................................................................................... 8Installing the Teach Yourself OPAS32 Training Program ............................................................................8Logging Into the Training Program...............................................................................................................9Creating a New Training Folder ...................................................................................................................9Setting Up a Lesson ...................................................................................................................................10Re-running a Lesson ..................................................................................................................................12Using the Training Program with the Manual .............................................................................................12

Using the SAFCO Web Site (www.safco.com)........................................................................ 13Obtaining a Customer Login ID ..................................................................................................................13Accessing OPAS32 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) .........................................................................13Notes ..........................................................................................................................................................14

Lesson 1 ▪ A Quick Tour of OPAS32 ...............................................................................15Setting Up for This Lesson ...................................................................................................... 16Starting OPAS32 ....................................................................................................................... 17Using Different Data Sources .................................................................................................. 18Displaying Data with Different Views...................................................................................... 19

Table View..................................................................................................................................................19Map View....................................................................................................................................................20Graph View.................................................................................................................................................21

Using the Wireless Explorer .................................................................................................... 22Displaying or Hiding the Wireless Explorer ................................................................................................23Opening Files in the Wireless Explorer ......................................................................................................23Dragging and Dropping Data to Maps or Graphs.......................................................................................24Using Popup Menus in Wireless Explorer..................................................................................................24Docking the Wireless Explorer ...................................................................................................................27

Using Wizards........................................................................................................................... 27How Wizards Work ....................................................................................................................................27Wizards Available in OPAS32 ....................................................................................................................28

Querying Data with Boolean Selection ................................................................................... 29

Table of Contents

ii Teach Yourself OPAS32

Obtaining and Communicating Results .................................................................................. 30Printing .......................................................................................................................................................30Copying to the Windows Clipboard ............................................................................................................30Producing Histograms................................................................................................................................31Data Reduction...........................................................................................................................................31

Automating Common Tasks with Scripts ............................................................................... 32Notes ..........................................................................................................................................................34

Lesson 2 ▪ Using Table Data............................................................................................35Setting Up for This Lesson ...................................................................................................... 37Opening a Table View............................................................................................................... 37

Opening an .OIF File ..................................................................................................................................38Converting Files to .OIF Format .................................................................................................................39

The Parts of the Table Window................................................................................................ 42Using the Keyboard to Move Around the Table...................................................................... 45Customizing the Table View Display....................................................................................... 45

Resizing Rows and Columns .....................................................................................................................45Hiding and Unhiding Columns....................................................................................................................46Moving Columns.........................................................................................................................................47Displaying Different Layers.........................................................................................................................47Displaying Different Parameters (Analog Data Only) .................................................................................48Deleting Rows ............................................................................................................................................48Using the Splitter Bars................................................................................................................................49Defining Color Schemes.............................................................................................................................50Changing the Look of a Table ....................................................................................................................51Changing the Order of the Window Display ...............................................................................................52

Using Popup Menus in the Table View.................................................................................... 55Manipulating the Data .............................................................................................................. 56

Reducing Data............................................................................................................................................56Performing Scanner-Specific Operations...................................................................................................58

Saving Table Data..................................................................................................................... 59What Gets Saved .......................................................................................................................................59Saving the Table Data................................................................................................................................59

Exporting Table Data ................................................................................................................ 60Setting Up for Export Layer ........................................................................................................................61Using the Exported File in Microsoft® Excel™ ..........................................................................................62Handling Invalid Values for Exports to MapInfo .........................................................................................62Performing the Export ................................................................................................................................63

Selecting Table Data With Boolean Selection ........................................................................ 63How Boolean Selection Works...................................................................................................................63About the Boolean Selection Tool ..............................................................................................................64Using the Tool ............................................................................................................................................65

Creating Exception Layers....................................................................................................... 68Exception Layers, Defined .........................................................................................................................68Differences Between Exception Reporting and Boolean Selection............................................................69Creating an Exception Layer ......................................................................................................................69Viewing Exception Report Details ..............................................................................................................71Creating an Exception Layer Symbol Scheme...........................................................................................73Viewing an Exception Layer .......................................................................................................................74Creating or Changing Exception Reports...................................................................................................75

Table of Contents

SAFCO Technologies, Inc. iii

Creating New Layers with Analysis Wizards .......................................................................... 85Using the Analysis Wizards........................................................................................................................86Expanding CDMA or GSM Data for Easy Analysis ....................................................................................87Converting iDEN Files ................................................................................................................................87

Producing Table Output ........................................................................................................... 88Copying Data for Use in Other Software ....................................................................................................88Modifying the Format of Printed Tables .....................................................................................................89Previewing the Printout...............................................................................................................................93Printing the Table .......................................................................................................................................94

Other Table View Options ........................................................................................................ 95API Commands Used with Tables .............................................................................................................95The AXF Format File..................................................................................................................................95

Lesson 3 ▪ Using Graph Data...........................................................................................97Setting Up for This Lesson ...................................................................................................... 98Displaying a Graph ................................................................................................................... 98The Parts of the Graph Window ............................................................................................ 101Customizing the Graph View Display.................................................................................... 102

Changing the Axis and Legend Fonts ......................................................................................................103Stacking or Overlaying Graphs ................................................................................................................104Adding or Deleting Column Data..............................................................................................................105Adding Columns from the Table View......................................................................................................106Zooming In or Out ....................................................................................................................................107Highlighting Segments of the Displayed Graphs......................................................................................108Viewing Information About Specific Points...............................................................................................109Changing the Y Axis Range .....................................................................................................................110Customizing the X Axis with Scaler..........................................................................................................111Changing the Axis Ticks Property ............................................................................................................112Drawing Grid Lines...................................................................................................................................113Drawing Threshold Lines..........................................................................................................................114Changing Series Properties .....................................................................................................................116

Using the Info Tool to View Graph Data................................................................................ 116Creating a Distribution Chart (Histogram) ............................................................................ 119

Using the Histogram Wizard ....................................................................................................................119How the Histogram is Produced...............................................................................................................120

Producing Graph Output........................................................................................................ 120Copying Data for Use in Other Software ..................................................................................................121Printing .....................................................................................................................................................121

Other Graph View Options..................................................................................................... 124API Commands Used with Graphs ..........................................................................................................124

Lesson 4 ▪ Using Map Data ............................................................................................125Setting Up for This Lesson .................................................................................................... 127Displaying a Map .................................................................................................................... 127About Data Tracks and Map Sheets ...................................................................................... 128

Data Track, Defined .................................................................................................................................128Map Sheets, Defined................................................................................................................................128Displaying Multiple Map Sheets ...............................................................................................................128

The Parts of the Map Window................................................................................................ 129Importing and Displaying Cell Site Databases ..................................................................... 131

Table of Contents

iv Teach Yourself OPAS32

Using the Map Tools............................................................................................................... 135Using the Layer Tools ..............................................................................................................................137

Adding and Modifying Data Tracks ....................................................................................... 140Modifying the Legend Display ............................................................................................... 149Drawing a Terrain Profile (New Feature)............................................................................... 150Setting Map View Defaults ..................................................................................................... 154

Accessing Map-Related Default Options..................................................................................................154Changing a Map's Appearance (The Map, Map2, and Map3 Tabs) ........................................................154Identifying Street Maps to Display (The Street Map Index Tab)...............................................................157Customizing the ETAK Street Map Display (The Street Maps Tab).........................................................159Specifying Units of Measure (The Units Tab) ..........................................................................................160

Displaying Street Maps .......................................................................................................... 161Types of Maps Supported ........................................................................................................................161Adding Street Maps to the Map Display ...................................................................................................161Controlling the Map Re-Draw ...................................................................................................................162

Creating or Changing Symbol Schemes............................................................................... 163Understanding Symbol Schemes .............................................................................................................163Using the Symbol Wizard .........................................................................................................................164Creating a New Symbol Scheme .............................................................................................................165Using Icons With Color Schemes ............................................................................................................174Sizing Icons in a Range Symbol Scheme ................................................................................................174Applying Symbol Schemes to a Data Track .............................................................................................175Displaying Symbols from Previously Unmappable Columns....................................................................179Creating Your Own Symbols ....................................................................................................................180Using Icons With Color Schemes ............................................................................................................181

Mapping an Exception Layer ................................................................................................. 181Using the Info Tool to Play a Map Route............................................................................... 183Inserting Bitmaps ................................................................................................................... 186Viewing Data from Multiple Test Run Files........................................................................... 189

Typical Uses for AFRS.............................................................................................................................189Setting up for AFRS .................................................................................................................................190Retrieving Data with AFRS.......................................................................................................................192

Using Map Popup Menus ....................................................................................................... 195Producing Map Output ........................................................................................................... 197

Copying Data for Use in Other Software ..................................................................................................198Printing .....................................................................................................................................................198

Other Map View Options ........................................................................................................ 202API Commands Used with Maps .............................................................................................................202

Lesson 5 ▪ Analyzing Data..............................................................................................203How to Use This Lesson ........................................................................................................ 203Analyzing Analog Data ........................................................................................................... 204

Setting Up for this Analysis.......................................................................................................................204Identifying Potential Areas of Concern in the Route.................................................................................205Identifying Problems with TQNM (Total Quality Network Measurement) .................................................206Using Exception Reporting to Find Interference.......................................................................................209Identifying the Strongest Single Channel (SSC).......................................................................................213Reviewing SINAD or EMOS Measurements ............................................................................................216Determining Where a Channel of a Cell Site Propagates ........................................................................220

Table of Contents

SAFCO Technologies, Inc. v

Analyzing CDMA Data............................................................................................................. 222Setting Up for this Analysis.......................................................................................................................222Why Use the CDMA Analysis Wizard? ....................................................................................................223Creating a New CDMA Layer ...................................................................................................................223Expanding the New Layer ........................................................................................................................230Saving the New Settings ..........................................................................................................................234Opening the File .......................................................................................................................................234Creating the First Map View .....................................................................................................................234Using Boolean Selection to Identify the Number of Handoffs ..................................................................237Using a Cellsite Database to Analyze Handoffs .......................................................................................239Identifying the Strongest and Handoff Pilots (PNs) in Table Data............................................................242Optimizing the Network ............................................................................................................................245

Analyzing GSM Data ............................................................................................................... 246Setting Up for this Analysis.......................................................................................................................246Why Use the GSM Analysis Wizard?.......................................................................................................247Creating a New GSM Layer......................................................................................................................247Expanding the New Layer ........................................................................................................................254Saving the New Settings ..........................................................................................................................258Testing for Poor Signal Quality.................................................................................................................259Creating a New Layer from the Query......................................................................................................260Finding the Cause of Poor Signal Quality Areas ......................................................................................265Performing a Handover Analysis..............................................................................................................273Looking at TQNM VoicePrint Data ...........................................................................................................278Summary..................................................................................................................................................280

Lesson 6 ▪ Automating Common Tasks with Scripts ..................................................281Setting Up for This Lesson .................................................................................................... 282The Advantages of Writing Scripts........................................................................................ 283What You Need to Know for VisualBasic (VB) Programming ............................................. 283

Requirements for Writing Basic Scripts ...................................................................................................283Requirements for Writing Advanced Scripts ............................................................................................284

Using VBA to Write Scripts .................................................................................................... 285Creating VBA Scripts for OPAS32 Applications .......................................................................................285Running VBA Scripts for OPAS32 Applications .......................................................................................286

About VisualBasic .................................................................................................................. 291Object Classes .........................................................................................................................................293Object Properties......................................................................................................................................294Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................295

Seven Steps to Creating and Using Scripts.......................................................................... 297Using the Online Help System to Streamline Programming................................................ 298

Accessing API Command Scripts Help ....................................................................................................298Using the Command Help Topic ..............................................................................................................299Using Help Examples Within your Script..................................................................................................300

Table of Contents

vi Teach Yourself OPAS32

Appendix A ▪ Quick Quiz Answers ................................................................................309Lesson 1 ▪ A Quick Tour of OPAS32 ..................................................................................... 309Lesson 2 ▪ Using the Table View ........................................................................................... 310Lesson 3 ▪ Using the Graph View .......................................................................................... 315Lesson 4 ▪ Using the Map View ............................................................................................. 319Lesson 5 ▪ Analyzing Data...................................................................................................... 322Lesson 6 ▪ Automating Common Tasks with Scripts........................................................... 322

Notes ........................................................................................................................................................328

Index ................................................................................................................................329

SAFCO Technologies, Inc. 1

Before You Begin

Welcome to Teach Yourself OPAS32Please read this section before you begin your training to obtain a briefintroduction to your OPAS32 software features and benefits, to learn howto get the most value from your training, and to make sure that you haveyour PC and software properly set up to perform the exercises in thistraining guide.

Important: Please be sure to review the “Setting Up for Training” sectionbeginning on page 8 to ensure you have all the files you need prior tobeginning your training.

What is OPAS32?The Office Propagation Analysis System for 32-bit operating systems (OPAS™32) analyzescellular interface data that was collected using one of SAFCO’s wireless data collectionsystems as well as from other collection systems, such as Qualcomm DM, Rhode &Schwartz, and Lucent Call Trace. The data being analyzed is combined in the collectionsystem and comes from two sources:

● Air Interface data: data fields that relate to the user’s specific radio technology

● Navigation data: a position (or geodetic reference) and time stamp for each data reading

The combined data lets you evaluate the characteristics of the cellular system, to determineproblem areas, and plan improvements based on time of day and the physical location of thedata readings.

OPAS32 provides visual representations of this collected data through a variety of toolsincluding tables, maps, graphs and statistical windows, allowing you to:

● Examine the characteristics of the radio environment based on the data collected foryour network.

● Identify the problems in your current cellular network.

● Use the current analysis of your system to determine the optimum networkconfigurations needed to meet future demands.

● Create presentations and reports internal to the software or externally by exportinganalyses to Microsoft® Windows® Excel™ and other applications.

Before You Begin

2 Teach Yourself OPAS32

The wireless information available for analysis depends on the technology and the datacollection system used. Data may include:

● Signal Strength Information -- data to help evaluate network coverage

● Call Processing -- data to help evaluate the handling of calls on the network

● Quality -- data to determine the state of a network from a subscriber’s viewpoint.

OPAS32 processes and analyzes complex attributes of the air interface, such as signalingprimitives, RF field strength, bit error rate and audio quality, as measured from RFcommunication networks. OPAS32 can process numerous measurements to create dynamicmap overlays, performance charts, statistical graphs and tables to support confident decisionmaking.

Specifically designed for wireless data, OPAS32 software processes collected information 5to 20 times faster than off-the-shelf mapping packages. Based on Windows NT, Windows95, and Windows 98™, OPAS32 processes data collected from all SAFCO platforms,including PROMAS, SMRTSAM Plus, and WALKABOUT PCS.

Benefits at a GlanceOPAS32 offers a wide variety of benefits for wireless data analysis:

● It evaluates wireless technologies through simultaneous analysis of analog and complexdigital data sets.

● It benchmarks and compares mobile, portable and indoor quality of service forsubscribers on competing networks, using industry-standard quality indicators.

● It identifies call processing problems by applying Boolean queries that link tables,graphs and maps to easily isolate signaling anomalies.

● It creates scaled maps that profile coverage, handoff states and power levels of cities andsuburbs, urban regions or entire countries. You can map multiple routes and apply avariety of symbol and color schemes to emphasize important data for immediate visualrecognition.

● It uses a common interface for all major wireless technologies to improve efficiency,reduce training, and accelerate decision making.

● It automatically processes numerous measurements into marketing, engineering andmanagement information.

● It is intuitive and easy to use.

● It lets you automate complex and/or mundane analysis by a Visual Basic script. Apowerful set of scripting commands (APIs) are supported by OPAS32 (similar to macrosin Excel or Word).

Before You Begin


OPAS32 works seamlessly with Microsoft® Windows NT™, Windows 95™, and Windows98™, making it easy to generate comprehensive management reports in Excel™, Word™,or other applications. Predefined data formats or comma-delimited ASCII text can also beexported, providing a true open architecture.

SAFCO pioneered the Universal ASCII Exchange Format (AXF), which is a non-proprietary, tab-delimited ASCII format that is used by tool vendors industry-wide to exportand import data to and from other applications. OPAS32 supports this format, allowingempirical data to be compared with prediction data simultaneously.

Who Should Read This BookThe Teach Yourself OPAS32 Training Guide is a self-paced tutorial that providescomprehensive instruction on all of the basic functions and features of OPAS32 whileintroducing the advanced functions of the software. It is recommended reading forindividuals involved in analyzing wireless Air Interface and Base Station data and for RFengineers and technicians responsible for monitoring and optimizing wireless radionetworks.

This guide will provide valuable training for anyone who is new to OPAS32 software.Readers should already be familiar with wireless data, and should have a workingknowledge of Microsoft Windows95, 98™ or NT.

What’s InsideThis manual is organized into six lessons that walk you through the operation of OPAS32, asfollows:

Lesson 1 ▪ A Quick Tour of OPAS32This lesson teaches you how to start OPAS32 and provides you with a brief overview ofOPAS32’s features.

Lesson 2 ▪ Using Table DataThis lesson describes how to open a file in the Table View, identifies the parts of the Tablewindow and how they work, describes how to customize the Table View, and teaches you touse the Table View features.

Lesson 3 ▪ Using Graph DataThis lesson teaches you how to display a graph of table data using the Graph Wizard,identifies the parts of the Graph window and how they work, describes how to customize theGraph View, and teaches you to use the Graph View features.

Before You Begin


Lesson 4 ▪ Using Map DataThis lesson teaches you how to display a map of table data, identifies the parts of the Mapwindow and how they work, describes how to customize the Map View, and teaches you touse the Map View features.

Lesson 5 ▪ Analyzing DataThis lesson puts what you have learned to work. It currently presents case studies forAnalog, CDMA, and GSM technologies, and it explains how OPAS32 can be used toidentify and resolve problems in your test run data.

Lesson 6 ▪ Automating Common Tasks with ScriptsThis lesson teaches you how to write simple Visual Basic scripts to automate repetitioustasks. In particular, it shows you how to use the online help script examples to build a scriptwith only a rudimentary understanding of Visual Basic and object-oriented programming.

Appendix A ▪ Quick Quiz AnswersAppendix A provides solutions to the Quick Quizzes presented throughout this guide.

Getting the Most From Your TrainingMany people will find that they can obtain the level of information they need simply byreading this training guide. Generous use of window illustrations makes it possible to followalong without actually performing the exercises.

To get the best training, however, we encourage you to perform the tasks and Quick Quizzesat your PC. Special training files have been provided with your OPAS32 software so youcan perform virtually every step described in this guide. Then, compare your screen with theillustrations to ensure that you have performed each step correctly.

Self-Testing

To further reinforce your training, use the Quick Quiz sections. These training exercisesallow you to reinforce your understanding of the material.

Important: Your training will be directed by the Teach Yourself OPAS32 trainingprogram, which sets up training files that you will use as you progress through this tutorial.Refer to Setting Up for Training beginning on page 8 for instructions on installing and usingthe Teach Yourself OPAS32 training program.

Before You Begin


Terms and DefinitionsThis guide defines terminology that is specific to OPAS32 as part of the explanatory text;however, there are hundreds of terms specific to radio frequency technology and to thespecific technologies used in the industry that are not defined within this guide. In the eventthat such a term is not familiar to you, use the SAFCO Glossary feature of the OPAS32online help system to find the definition.

? To find a term in the SAFCO Glossary:1. From the Help menu, select the Index option.

2. Click on the Contents tab.

3. Select the Glossary book.

4. Double-click on Glossary of SAFCO Terms to display the Glossary Help window(shown in the following illustration).

5. Click on the first letter of the term you want defined, and scroll, if necessary, to theterm.

6. Click on the term to display a popup definition.

Note that when you use Online Help, some terms display in a different color, with a dottedunderline, like the terms in the above illustration. You can display popup definitions forthese terms by clicking on them as described in step 6.

Before You Begin


Learning About Software UpdatesFrom time to time, you may obtain new releases of OPAS32 that continue to be supportedby your current copy of Teach Yourself OPAS32. To help familiarize you with the newfeatures, the Online Help System provides links to the appropriate Help topics. This sectionexplains how to use this Online Help feature.

? To find information about a new OPAS32 feature:1. From the Help menu, select the Index option.

2. Click on the Contents tab.

3. Select the What’s New topic.

4. The “New Features” section identifies all features that are new since the last majorrelease of OPAS32. As you read through the list, underlined links allow you to jump tothe Help topic that applies to the new feature.

Typographical ConventionsThe following text conventions are used throughout this guide:

Sample Description

Type myfile Information that you must type is displayed in atypewriter-like font.

Type This file is filename

When you must enter some literal information andsome variable information, the variable informationis shown in italics. In the sample to the left, youwould type “This file is “ and then type theappropriate file name.

�� Save the file. Activities that you perform at your computer areshown in a large, bold font, preceded by acomputer icon.

Before You Begin


Sample DescriptionNote: This option is available in the TableView only.

Important notes, cautions, and warnings arebordered by lines on the top and the bottom.

For more information… References to other chapters or other books arepreceded with a book symbol.

(New Feature) Indicates that this feature has been added for thismajor release of the OPAS32 software.

?When more detailed information about a feature isavailable in the OPAS32 online help system, thisicon alerts you, and the accompanying text tellsyou exactly how to find the help information.

Identifies questions and exercises that will help youreinforce what you have learned in current sectionof a lesson.

RequirementsBefore you begin your training, make sure you have met the following minimumrequirements:

PC Requirements● Pentium processor 133 MHz (300 MHz preferred)

● 32MB RAM (64 MB recommended)

● At least 6.4 GB free disk space (for OPAS32 files)

Note: the disk space requirement considers both OPAS32 data files and street map files.We recommend loading street map files on the hard drive rather than running them fromthe CD-ROM drive in order to achieve better performance.

● Any printer capable of supporting graphics

Software Requirements● Microsoft® Windows™ NT, version 3.51 or higher, Microsoft® Windows™ 95, or

Microsoft® Windows™ 98

● OPAS32 release 2.2x installed

● OPAS32 training files installed

● Microsoft® Excel™, version 5.0 or higher

● Microsoft® Visual Basic™ version 5.0 or higher or Microsoft® Visual Basic™ forApplications (available in Microsoft® Office™ 97 applications)

Before You Begin


Setting Up for Training

Teach Yourself OPAS32 IconYour OPAS32 software is supplied with a special training program and all the files you willneed to train yourself using the Teach Yourself OPAS32 Self-Training Guide. This sectionexplains how the to install the training program and how it works.

Installing the Teach Yourself OPAS32 Training Program(New Feature) As of OPAS32 Release 2.30, the Teach Yourself OPAS32 training programis automatically installed as part of your OPAS32 software installation. There is no need totake any special action to install the training on your computer.

In the event that you do not want to install the Teach Yourself OPAS32 training program,follow the instructions below:

� To stop the automatic installation of Teach Yourself OPAS32:1. Run the OPAS32 installation as instructed on the CD insert.

2. When the Setup Type dialog box is displayed, click the Custom installationbutton to display the Select Components dialog box.

3. Click on the check box next to the Teach Yourself OPAS32 component toremove the check mark, and click the Next> button to continue the installationwithout installing the Teach Yourself OPAS32 training program.

� To install Teach Yourself OPAS32 at a later time:1. Re-run the OPAS32 installation.

2. When the Setup Type dialog box is displayed, click the Custom installationbutton to display the Select Components dialog box.

3. Place a check mark in the check box next to the Teach Yourself OPAS32component, and remove the check marks from all other components. Then, clickthe Next> button to continue the installation of only the Teach Yourself OPAS32training program.

Before You Begin


Logging Into the Training ProgramWhen you click on the Teach Yourself OPAS32 icon, the Teach Yourself OPAS32 –Training Registration and Setup dialog box is displayed.

Figure 1. Even if several different people are using the same computer to learnOPAS32, their training sessions are kept separate based on a unique Training ID.

The first time you use this dialog box, you need to enter a unique training ID that you will beusing for every session. You can use any ID that you want, as long as you will remember itfrom one training session to the next.

Creating a New Training FolderWhen you enter a new ID and click the button, the Create New Training Folder? dialog boxis displayed.

Figure 2. This dialog is telling you that the ID you entered is new to thetraining system and gives you the opportunity to return to the previousdialog box if you entered the wrong ID.

Before You Begin


If this is the first time you entered a Training ID, clicking the Yes button sets up a trainingfolder for you, as indicated in the dialog box text. On the other hand, if you performed yourinitial registration previously, and yet you see this dialog box, it indicates that you may havemis-typed your ID in the previous dialog box. In this case, click the No button, and re-enteryour Training ID when prompted.

Setting Up a LessonIf you entered an existing ID on the first dialog box or clicked the Yes button on the secondone, the Setup for Lessons dialog box is displayed. This dialog box lets you set up for thelesson you are about to perform, copying necessary files to your training folder, startingOPAS32 for you automatically, and performing whatever setup is required for the lesson.

Figure 3. You must run lessons 1 through 4 in order. Unavailablelesson buttons are greyed out to prevent you from running lessons outof order.

Once you have run a lesson, its button will show a blue check mark to remind you that youhave already performed setup for it

To exit the training system at any time, click the Cancel button.

Before You Begin


? To obtain information about the training program online:1. From the Help menu, select the TYO help option to view the Help table of contents..

Figure 4. The online help system provides the same information that you are reading in thissection of the book.

2. Double-click on any listed topic to display the same information that is available in thissection of the manual.

Before You Begin


Re-running a LessonIn the event that you want to repeat a previously-completed lesson, you can click a blue-checked button to display the following warning message.

Figure 5. This message warns you that you may lose training workyou already completed if you re-run the setup for a lesson.

Whenever you click one of the Lesson buttons, the Training program loads new files to yourtraining folder. In doing so, it automatically overwrites any files with the same name in thefolder. In the event that you made changes and saved them in either the lesson you want tore-run or any future lessons that you already completed, those changes will be lost, and youmay have to re-run all the lessons from that point forward in order to restore the filesproperly.

Another option would be to log into the Training program as a new user, specifying a newTraining ID. This creates a new training folder and leaves your original training folderundisturbed.

Using the Training Program with the ManualAs you read through the manual, you will see a “Setting Up for This Lesson” section at thebeginning of each lesson. This section reminds you to perform setup, provides a shortdescription of what you need to do, and reminds you that a detailed description is providedin the Before You Begin section of this Self-Training Guide.

Before You Begin


Using the SAFCO Web Site (www.safco.com)Visit our web site for up-to-the-minute information about SAFCO's line of products.SAFCO's customers can obtain secure access to take advantage of support services likesoftware upgrade downloads, an extensive knowledge base, technical bulletins, and onlinedocumentation. This section explains how to obtain a User Name and password and how toaccess the Frequently Asked Questions, which provide handy tips on getting the most fromour products.

Obtaining a Customer Login ID� To obtain an ID and password:

1. Start your Internet browser, and enter the SAFCO URL, www.safco.com todisplay our Home Page.

2. From the Home Page, click on the Secure Client Services heading in theCustomer Support area. (You can also replace steps 1 and 2 by entering the URLthat gets you directly to the login for the secure area:www.safco.com/support/secure.html.)

3. Click on the Register heading to display a short form that you complete to set upyour support account.

4. Complete the form, and click the Submit button to send it to our CustomerSupport Group. SAFCO's Customer Support Group will e-mail your approvedUser Name and password to you.

Accessing OPAS32 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)� To log in to the secure area and display FAQs:

1. Start your Internet browser, and enter the SAFCO URL, www.safco.com todisplay our Home Page.

2. From the Home Page, click on the Secure Client Services heading in theCustomer Support area. (You can also replace steps 1 and 2 by entering the URLthat gets you directly to the login for the secure area:www.safco.com/support/secure.html.)

3. Click on the Login heading, and enter your User Name and password whenprompted.

4. From the Products area, click on OPAS32.

5. Click on the FAQs section.

Before You Begin


Notes


Lesson 1 ▪ A Quick Tour of OPAS32

What You Will Learn in this LessonThis lesson provides you with a brief overview of the following OPAS32 features:

Setting Up for This LessonFor most lessons in this Self-Training Guide, you will be asked to performsetup so you can follow along at your computer and so you can perform theQuick Quizzes throughout the lesson. This section tells you how to set up forthis lesson.

Starting OPAS32This section explains various methods for starting OPAS32.

Using Different Data SourcesYou can use a variety of different data sources and bring them into OPAS32as OIF files for analysis. This section provides an overview of how automaticdata conversion works.

Displaying Data with Different ViewsOPAS32 provides three views of your test run data to allow you to see theinformation from different viewpoints and manipulate it in different ways.Each view is summarized in this section.

Using the Wireless ExplorerThe Wireless Explorer provides a convenient way to keep your test run datain front of you as you work in the various OPAS32 views and quickly dragdata columns to maps or graphs. This section explains how to access theWireless Explorer and provides an overview of some of its options.

Using WizardsWizards are step-by-step walkthroughs that OPAS32 provides to simplifycertain complex tasks. This section shows a typical Wizard and explains thebenefits of using them for complex tasks.

Querying Data with Boolean SelectionBoolean selection allows you to query the data in a selected layer for specificevents or occurrences. This section provides an overview of the toolsavailable in OPAS32 to query data using this option.

Obtaining and Communicating ResultsIn OPAS32, every view produces results. This section overviews other waysto obtain results and the methods available for reporting.

Automating Common Tasks with ScriptsThis section explains how OPAS32 scripts help you to automate repetitivetasks and explains some of the Application Programming Interface (API)commands that make scripting a powerful tool.



Setting Up for This LessonFor most lessons in this Self-Training Guide, you will be asked to perform setup so you canfollow along at your computer and so you can perform the Quick Quizzes throughout thelesson. This section tells you how to set up for this lesson.

Teach Yourself OPAS32 IconBecause this lesson provides you with an overview of the OPAS32 features, no setupprocedures are actually required. Nonetheless, we recommend that you perform thefollowing setup steps to register a training ID in the system and record the fact that you havecompleted this lesson.

Important: The Teach Yourself OPAS32 training program is installed separately from yourOPAS32 software. If you have not installed the Teach Yourself OPAS32 training programyet, refer to Installing the Teach Yourself OPAS32 Training Program section in the "BeforeYou Begin" chapter of this training guide.

� To set up for Lesson 11. If you have not already registered a new training ID, you should do so now.

Double-click the Teach Yourself OPAS32 icon, and refer to the Setting up forTraining section in the "Before You Begin" lesson for detailed instructions onhow to register a new training ID.

2. Once the Lesson Setup dialog box is displayed, click the Lesson 1 button. Amessage displays telling you that you will not actually be running OPAS32 forthis lesson.

3. Click the OK button. The next time you register for training, the Lesson 1 buttonwill show a blue checkmark to indicate that you have already worked inLesson 1.

Remember: Once you have installed the Training program and registered an ID, you canview help about the Training Program at any time by Selecting TYO help from the Helpmenu in the Setup for Lessons dialog box.



Starting OPAS32This section explains various methods for starting OPAS32.

� To start OPAS32 from the Start Menu:1. Click on the Windows Start button.

2. Move the pointer over the Programs option.

3. When displayed, move the pointer over the SAFCO option (see Note below).

4. When displayed, select OPAS32 to start the program and display the OPAS32workspace.

Note: These instructions assume the standard defaults used by the OPAS32 installationprogram. If you have changed the name of the program folder in the Start menu, you wouldclick on that name in step 3 above.

� To start OPAS32 from Windows 95, 98, or NT Explorer:1. Open Explorer.

2. Open the C:\OPAS32 folder. Note that this is the default path, if you specified adifferent path during installation, open the folder accordingly.

3. Double-click on opas32.exe to start the program and display the OPAS32workspace.

� To start OPAS32 With Command Line Options:1. From the Windows Start menu, select the Run option.

2. In the Start dialog box, enter the OPAS32 command using the following syntax:OPAS32 [filename [+…]] [/T title] [/?]

Where:

filename is the full path and file name(s) of files you want to open atstartup

title is a one-word title you want to appear in the main title bar ofOPAS32

/? displays a dialog box that identifies the command line options

Examples:OPAS32 c:\opas32\demodata\amps2.oif c:\opas32\demodata\amps3.oif/T AnalogAnalysis

This example opens two files, amps2.oif and amps3.oif and displays the title,"Analog Analysis" in the OPAS32 title bar.OPAS32 /?

This example displays a dialog box identifying the command line options.



Regardless of which method you use to start OPAS32, the OPAS32 workspace is displayed.

Figure 1-1. As you work with OPAS32, the dark grey area (the OPAS32 workspace) willdisplay your tables, maps, and graphs.

Using Different Data SourcesYou can use a variety of different data sources and bring them into OPAS32 as OIF files foranalysis. This section provides an overview of how automatic data conversion works.

All file types are automatically converted when you open them in OPAS32. You can alsoconvert them using the File Converter utility that is part of the OPAS32 software.

Typically, your collected data will be in a .SD4 or .SD5 file. For .SD4 data, you must besure that the .CAL (callibration files that convert RSSI to dBM for the tested devices) and,optionally, the FQM (containing Sinads downlink information) are stored with the data fileto be converted.

Once all necessary files are in place, simply select Open from the File menu to perform theconversion and open the file in the Table View (shown in the next section).



Displaying Data with Different ViewsOPAS32 provides three views of your test run data to allow you to see the information fromdifferent viewpoints and manipulate it in different ways. Each view is summarized in thissection.

Table ViewThe Table View displays all data for a test run in a spreadsheet-like format. This view letsyou use many spreadsheet functions to work with the information so you can customize youranalysis.

Figure 1-2. Each table in the Table View contains data for a single device (phone orscanner). Initially, the tables are cascaded, as shown here, but you can tile them to seemultiple tables at once, or tile them with graphs and maps to see different perspectives ofthe same information.

Among the many features of this view, you can:

● Use many spreadsheet functions to manipulate the information in this view.

● Apply your own color schemes to help illustrate important points about the data.

● Use OPAS32’s Boolean selection feature to select certain data in the table to assist withyour analysis.

● Use OPAS32's Exception Reporting feature to create a new layer based on pre-definedselection criteria or on selection criteria that you define yourself. You can even importBoolean selection queries so you can have the option of selecting data in a table orcreating a new layer from the selected data without re-entering the query.

You will learn more about tables in Lesson 2, “Using the Table View.”



Map ViewThe Map View displays test run information in a map. This view offers many features thatlet you simulate the activities of the test run:

Map Pane

MapTools

DrawingTools

MapOverviewPane

OverlayManager Pane (Map Sheets Tab)

Layer ToolButtons

Data Tracks

(Legends &Colors Tab)

Figure 1-3. The Map view displays your data in the form of a map path. You can map more than one datatrack from more than one file at once, each with its own color and symbol scheme. This map shows a zoomview of a portable phone with an icon-based symbol scheme (left), and the same phone with a symbol schemethat maps actual column values. A color scheme is applied to the data track on the left. Both routes are fromthe same file. You can also underlay a variety of maps and bitmaps to help identify the route.

● You can display more than one device from the same or different test runs on a mapsimultaneously.

● Tool tips instantly identify the route maps as you pass the mouse arrow over them.

● You can use your own color and icon- or character-based symbol schemes to illustrateimportant points about each test run.

● You show or hide routes with a single button click.

● You can show one route directly on top of another and change the stack order to viewboth simultaneously. Or, use the horizontal and vertical offset features to show tworoutes next to each other.

● You can re-size each pane to provide the best possible view of the map data.



● You can use a variety of street maps (ETAK, MapInfo, Spot Image), in-building maps,and bitmaps and customize them to show information about the test run route.

● An Information tool lets you see the data for any point on the route and actually run ananimated version of the test run to simulate the test run and see data captured for everypoint.

● Other tools let you plot the distance between points, zoom into or out of a map segment,position the map, and a variety of other activities.

You will learn more about maps in Lesson 3, “Using the Map View.”

Graph ViewThe Graph View provides a graphical means for comparing data in various columns.

Figure 1-4. The Graph View lets you compare data in a stacked view, as shown here, or overlaid to seehow the individual lines relate to each other. The detailed legend pane identifies the data being graphed,or you can narrow the pane to reveal more graph data.

This view provides a variety of helpful features:

● The Graph Wizard lets you create a custom graph quickly and easily.

● You can stack individual graphs for multiple data columns as shown here, or overlay thedata on a single graph.



● You can customize the axes to report on the information you want.

● You can zoom into or out of selected portions of data, highlight portions of a graph, addor delete columns, and view precise data for any point on a graph.

You will learn more about graphs in Chapter 4, “Using the Graph View.”

Using the Wireless ExplorerThe Wireless Explorer provides a convenient way to keep your test run data in front of youas you work in the various OPAS32 views and quickly drag data columns to maps or graphs.This section explains how to access the Wireless Explorer and provides an overview of someof its options.

Figure 1-5. The Wireless Explorer, shown on the left side of this illustration, is a separate window that can remainin view no matter what you are doing within OPAS32.



Displaying or Hiding the Wireless ExplorerThe Wireless Explorer can be easily displayed or hidden from the View menu, so you canhave your data handy at the right times and remove it from the screen when you need thescreen space for other things.

Wireless Explorer Button� To display or hide the Wireless Explorer:

From the View menu, select the Wireless Explorer option. When this option ischecked, the Wireless Explorer is displayed. When the option is not checked, theWireless Explorer is hidden.

You can also turn the display on or off with the Wireless Explorer button.

Opening Files in the Wireless ExplorerYou can display test run files, files created by running the Merge Command, and CellsiteDatabase files. When the Wireless Explorer is displayed, opening any of these types of filesautomatically displays the data in the Wireless Explorer.

� To display test run files:From the File menu, click on the Open option, and select a file from the Open dialogbox. .OIF files display in the Table View and also display in the Wireless Explorer.Files that are converted from another format (such as .SD5) to .OIF are displayed bothin the Table View and in the Wireless Explorer once the conversion is complete.

� To display Merge files:From the File menu, click on the Merge option, and use the Merge Wizard to createthe merged file. Once the file is created, it is displayed in the Wireless Explorer as atest run called MERGED.OIF.

� To display cellsite database files:From the File menu, select the Select Cellsite Database option. When prompted,select the cellsite database you want to use. The cellsite database is listed as theCellsites layer for the device that was active when you opened the cellsite databasefile.

Whenever a set of data is completely closed, that data is removed from the WirelessExplorer.



Dragging and Dropping Data to Maps or GraphsYou can drag and drop test run data to any open map or graph.

� To drag and drop data:1. In the Wireless Explorer, left-click on a data column.

2. Holding the left mouse button down, drag to an open map or graph.

Using Popup Menus in Wireless ExplorerIn the Wireless Explorer, each level in the list, from the top TestRun Manager level, down tothe individual columns level, provides a right-click option to display a popup menu ofcommonly-used features for that level. The following table explains each popup menuoption and identifies which level(s) can be right-clicked to display them.

Menu Option Available from DescriptionCollapse • TestRun Manager level

• File level

• Device level

• Layer level

Collapses the current level. Thelevels beneath are hidden. Youcan also click the minus sign tothe left of the level .

Expand • TestRun Manager level

• Device level

• Layer level

Expands the current level so thatlevels beneath it are visible. Youcan also click the plus sign to theleft of the level.

Open • TestRun Manager level Opens a file. You can also useFile | Open.

Merge • TestRun Manager level Starts the Merge Test RunsWizard so you can combinemultiple files. You can also useFile | Merge

Close • File level Closes the selected file. You canalso use File | Close.

Close All • TestRun Manager level Closes all open files in OPAS32.You can also use Window | CloseAll Views.

Save • File level Saves the current .OIF file. Youcan also use File | Save.

Save As • File level Saves the current .OIF file undera file name that you specify. Youcan also use File | Save As.

Show All • TestRun Manager level Shows all columns in WirelessExplorer at the column level.



Menu Option Available from Description(New Feature)Force RecalculateExtents

• Test Run Manager level Forces OPAS32 to recalculatethe lat/long extents of theselected Test Run. Use thisoption when you have manuallydeleted records in the file,causing lat/long values tochange. The process iscomplete when the wait cursor(hour glass) returns to an arrow.For smaller files, this will appearto be instantaneous; for verylarge files, this process can takea while.

Show Mappable • TestRun Manager level Shows only those columns inWireless Explorer that can bemapped. The Table View doesnot change in any way.

Show Graphable • TestRun Manager level Shows only those columns inWireless Explorer that can begraphed. The Table View doesnot change in any way.

About Testruns • TestRun Manager level Shows the Test RunsConfiguration Informationwindow. You can also use Help |About Test Runs.

Hide • TestRun Manager level Removes the Wireless Explorerfrom the display. To re-displaythe Wireless Explorer, eitherselect View | Wireless Explorer,or click the Wireless Explorertoolbar button.

Delete Layer • Layer level Deletes the current layer for thecurrent OPAS32 session. If yousave the file after performing thisoption, the layer is permanentlydeleted.

Go to RelativeMap

• Column level Displays a map of the selectedcolumn.

Go to RelativeTable

• Column level Activates the table containing theselected column.

(New Feature) Goto Relative Graph

• Column level If the selected column alreadyexists in an open graph, thegraph is displayed. If not, thisoption creates a graph, usingTime as the X-axis. If no time isavailable, Sequence Number isused as the X-axis.



Menu Option Available from DescriptionColor Scheme • Column level Allows you to select or change

color schemes.

C/I • Signal Strength layer only Use this command to view C to Idata. The Carrier to Interfererdialog box lets you select thechannels to compare. Thisindicator appears only when theactive map or table windowcontains scanner data. You canalso click the C->I button in theTable or Map views.

SSC • Signal Strength layer only Use this command to display theStrongest Single Channel (SSC)data in the active map or tablewindow. The strongest channelsin a table are listed in the SSCName column, with the signalstrength listed in the SSC Valuecolumn. The strongest channelson a map are represented by thesymbol assigned to that channel.This symbol can be changed byselecting Symbols from thepopup menu that displays whenyou right-click while pointing inthe map pane. You can alsoclick the SSc button in the Tableor Map views.

Signal Strength • Signal Strength layer only Use this command to view thesignal strength layer for theactive map or table window. Thisindicator appears only whenscanner data is in the currentwindow. You can also click theS.S. button in the Table or Mapviews.



Docking the Wireless Explorer Top Bar of Wireless Explorer

The Wireless Explorer can be moved and attached to any edge of the OPAS32 window.

� To dock the Wireless Explorer:1. Left-click and hold the left mouse button on the top bar (or side bar, if the

Wireless Explorer is docked in a horizontal position) of the Wireless Explorer.

2. Drag the Wireless Explorer to a new location. As the Wireless Explorer reachesany edge of the OPAS32 window, it attaches itself to the edge.

Using WizardsWizards are step-by-step walkthroughs that OPAS32 provides to simplify certain complextasks. This section shows a typical Wizard and explains the benefits of using them forcomplex tasks.

How Wizards WorkWhen you use a Wizard, you walk through a series of dialog boxes, each representing onestep in the process the Wizard is going to perform. The dialog boxes ask you to select fromvarious options by answering plain English questions. As you answer the questions, thewizard continues the process, offering only the options that are valid based on the selectionsyou have already made.



The illustration below shows the first dialog box from the CDMA Analysis Wizard:

Figure 1-6. This dialog box from the CDMA Analysis Wizard shows the first step increating or modifying an analysis. To use it, you complete the requested information,and click on the Next> button to move to the next step of the Wizard.

As you can see, this first step requires you to decide whether you want to create a newanalysis or modify an existing analysis. If you choose to modify an existing analysis, youcan select from all the analyses that currently exist in your OPAS32 installation. Either way,clicking the Next> button accepts your choices, and advances to the next appropriate step.

Wizards Available in OPAS32OPAS32 offers Wizards for most tasks that would normally be complex to performmanually. Among the many Wizards offered are the following:

● Graph Wizard: Lets you choose format and x and y axis data to produce a graph.

● Symbol Wizard: Lets you quickly create icon- or character-based symbol schemes tovisually identify data in a map display.

● Merge Wizard: Lets you merge device data acquired during separate test-run (datacollection) files into a single file.

● CDMA Analysis Wizard: Creates a layer definition for CDMA data.

● GSM Analysis Wizard: Creates a layer definition for GSM data.

● (New Feature) iDEN Analysis Wizard: Creates a layer definition for iDEN data.



● AFRS Wizard: Allows you to place test run files into the advanced file retrieval system,then extract specific files from that group of files based on their geographic location,creation date and time, and channel information.

● GCS Wizard: Guides you through the selection of the map datums and map projectionswhen either modifying an existing definition or creating a new definition.

● MSI Export Wizard: Exports scanner data from .OIF format to MSI format for usewith outside planning tools.

You will learn about many of the OPAS32 Wizards in various lessons of this TrainingGuide.

Querying Data with Boolean SelectionBoolean selection allows you to query the data in a selected layer for specific events oroccurrences. This section provides an overview of the tools available in OPAS32 to querydata using this option.

The illustration below shows the Boolean Selection tool and a table showing the results ofthe query.

Figure 1-7. When you enter a query in the Boolean Selection Tool and click the Apply button, theresults of your query appear as highlights in the active Table. You can also use the BooleanSelection Tool to select data within maps.



The Boolean Selection Tool provides many helpful features:

● You can define and apply queries based on particular layers of data.

● You can base a query on any of the data fields available in the current layer.

● Arithmetic and logical operators allow you to request relationships involving the data.

● You can perform Boolean Selection queries on the fly, or save a query so you can re-useit any time you need it.

You will learn how to perform a Boolean Selection in Lesson 2, “Using Table Data.”

Obtaining and Communicating ResultsIn OPAS32, every view produces results. This section overviews other ways to obtainresults and the methods available for reporting.

You have already seen that tables, maps, and graphs show analysis results in differentformats that are excellent for use in a written analysis. You have also seen how Booleanselection allows you to zero in on the data you need to show and how OPAS32 Wizards canperform powerful analyses on the fly. OPAS32 provides other tools for obtaining andcommunicating results as well.

PrintingYou can print all or portions of tables, maps, and graphs in OPAS32 on any MicrosoftWindows-compatible printer (maps and graphs require printers that support graphics). ThePrint Preview option lets you see the printout on-screen before printing.

Copying to the Windows ClipboardYou can copy all or portions of table, map, and graph data to the Windows Clipboard. Thenpaste it into any software (spreadsheet, word processing, presentation graphics) for use in apresentation, report, or analysis.



Producing HistogramsThe Histogram option lets you create a histogram layer from which a distribution chart canbe created in Excel.

Figure 1-8. You can create a histogram in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet with just a fewkeystrokes.

Once the Histogram layer is created, an API script is automatically invoked to take thedistribution data (percentile or cumulative percentile) from the layer data, copy the data,open Excel and then create a bar chart of the distribution of data for the selected numericcolumn.

Data ReductionThe Reduce feature allows you to use a variety of calculation options to compress thenumber of data points being looked at in a table or map. By using this feature, you cansimplify the data to clarify your analysis for reporting purposes. Data reduction can alsocreate cleaner, easy-to-read maps by minimizing the number of data points. This can be ofparticular help when merging data for large metropolitan areas like New York.



Automating Common Tasks with ScriptsThis section explains how OPAS32 scripts help you to automate repetitive tasks andexplains some of the Application Programming Interface (API) commands that makescripting a powerful tool.

Scripting is an advanced feature of OPAS32 that allows power users to automate repetitiveanalysis steps by programming a VisualBasic script. Once written, the script willautomatically perform all analysis without requiring you to execute each step manually inOPAS32.

Some default scripts, along with their source code, are available in the \DemoScriptsubfolder of your OPAS32 installation folder.

OPAS32 contains a rich set of operations for analyzing cellular data. More often than not, acellular engineer manipulates all the collected data in a standard fashion and is interested inseeing a specific result from those operations (for example, a map of some kind). OPAS32provides a way for an engineer to automate the several steps that lead to the final result sothat analysis can be run in batch mode.

Although other programming languages can be used to write scripts, VisualBasic is thelanguage most typically used. It is easy to learn, it provides excellent support for OLEautomation, and the programs are portable to other applications like Microsoft Excel andMicrosoft Word. These applications even have VisualBasic editors bundled in the softwarethat can be used to write scripts for OPAS32.

Step 3: Read about how touse the command. Tospeed up programming,copy the Example codedirectly into your program,and change variableinformation as necessary tosuit your requirements.

Step 1: Click on thealphabetical button toget to the right APIcommand.

Step 2: Locate thecommand youneed.

Figure 1-9. The OPAS32 Scripting API Help system makes script writing quick and easy.



Copy the code you need, make a few quick changes to customize it for your application, andyou’re ready to run your script.

You will learn more about scripts in Lesson 6, “Automating Common Tasks withScripts.”

Instructions: Place a check mark (√) in the box next to the most appropriate answer foreach question. To check your answers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes”

1. .OIF files are the only file types you can use in OPAS32.❑ True.❑ False.

2. The Table View provides which of the following benefits?❑ Spreadsheet-like functionality.❑ Ability to apply color schemes to the data.❑ Ability to select certain data within a table.❑ All of the above.

3. A stacked Graph View combines all graphs into a single one for comparisonpurposes.❑ True.❑ False.

4. Select the one statement that best defines Wizards.❑ They offer no processing options. You must accept default values when you use

them.❑ They offer many processing options. Then, based on the options that you select,

they offer only the options that are valid for your selection.❑ They require you to have great technical knowledge in order to understand the

questions.

5. A script is a keyboard template that tells you what keys to use for everyfunction in OPAS32.❑ True.❑ False.

6. Bitmaps are the only type of file you can display in maps.❑ True.❑ False.



Notes


Lesson 2 ▪ Using Table Data

What You Will Learn in this Lesson

Setting Up for This LessonBefore you begin reading this lesson, you should set up so you can followalong at your computer and so you can perform the Quick Quizzesthroughout the lesson. This section tells you how to set up for this lesson.

Opening a Table ViewThe first thing you do after starting OPAS32 is to open a file in the TableView. This section shows you how to open a file and, if necessary, convert itto .OIF (Optimized Internal Format) format.

The Parts of the Table WindowThis section identifies the parts of the Table window and provides a briefexplanation of how the parts are used.

Using the Keyboard to Move Around the TableYou can use the mouse and scroll bars to move around the Table window;however, if you prefer using the keyboard for navigation, this section lists thekey combinations you’ll need.

Customizing the Table View DisplayThere are many ways you can change the physical look of a table, fromresizing the rows and columns to changing colors and fonts. You can alsodo many things to manipulate the display of data, including hiding columns ordeleting rows and changing the layer or parameter data that is displayed.This section describes how to customize the Table View display.

Using Popup Menus in the Table ViewOPAS32 provides numerous “right-click” pop-up windows to speed access tocommonly-used features. This section describes the pop-up windows thatare available from the Table View and explains how to access them.

Manipulating the DataThis section explains how to reduce the data in the Table View and how toperform operations specific to the Analog, CDMA, GSM, and IS-136technologies.

Saving Table DataOPAS32 offers the option of saving table data to the same file name or to adifferent one, which is a handy feature in the event that you leave yourcomputer for an extended period of time. This section explains what part ofyour work gets saved and how to save your data.



Exporting Table DataOPAS32's Export Layer feature allows you to save the data in a selectedlayer in your choice of comma- or tab-delimited format. The resulting file canbe used in a wide range of Microsoft® Windows™ programs such asspreadsheets and word processing tables. It can also be used in MapInfo.This section explains how to set up your own export preferences and how toexport table data.

Selecting Table Data With Boolean SelectionOPAS32's Boolean Selection feature allows you to select data in a tablebased on its value. This section introduces you to this powerful tool.

Creating Exception LayersWhere Boolean Selection works by highlighting records that meet a pre-defined set of selection criteria in an existing table or map, the ExceptionReporting command creates new layers based on a pre-defined set ofselection criteria. This section teaches you how to use Exception Reportingto create layers and how to define custom Exception Reports.

Creating New Layers with Analysis WizardsAfter you worked with OPAS32 for a while, you are likely to develop patternsthat you follow for performing analyses on certain technologies. Forexample, you may find that you prefer to see only a subset of all availablecolumns, you might want to see columns grouped differently than the defaultview display, or you may want to see certain columns calculated in a specificway. This section explains how to use OPAS32's Analysis Wizards to createcustom layers for these purposes.

Producing Table OutputYou can print tables directly from OPAS32 for use in presentations, or youcan output your data to other software, such as spreadsheet software or aword processing table. This section tells you how to format and producetable output.

Other Table View OptionsThis section provides an overview of other OPAS32 options that areavailable for the Table View and identifies where to go for more information.



Setting Up for This LessonBefore you begin reading this lesson, you should set up so you can follow along at yourcomputer and so you can perform the Quick Quizzes throughout the lesson. This section tellsyou how to set up for this lesson.

Teach Yourself OPAS32 Icon� To set up for this lesson:

Important: You must have a training ID registered, and you must have performed setupfor Lesson 1 before you set up for this lesson. Double-click on the Teach YourselfOPAS32 icon, and refer to the Setting up for Training section in the "Before You Begin"section at the front of this guide for detailed instructions on how to register a training IDand perform lesson setup.

1. Once the Lesson Setup dialog box is displayed, click the Lesson 2 button. Thiscopies all files you will need for this lesson to your training folder and startsOPAS32.

2. After you have performed the Quick Quizzes in this lesson, exit OPAS32 byselecting Exit from the File Menu. This returns you to the Setup for Lesson dialogbox so you can set up for another lesson, if necessary.

3. To exit the training system, click the Exit button in the Setup for Lesson dialog box.

Remember: Once you have installed the Training program and registered an ID, you can viewhelp about the Training Program at any time by Selecting TYO help from the Help menu in theSetup for Lessons dialog box.

Opening a Table ViewThe first thing you do after starting OPAS32 is to open a file in the Table View. This sectionshows you how to open a file and, if necessary, convert it to .OIF (Optimized Internal Format)format.



Opening an .OIF FileOPAS32 uses .OIF files to display data. If your test data is in a different format, OPAS32provides a conversion utility to create .OIF files from many different file formats, as discussed inthe next section. If the file you want to open is already in .OIF format, you can open it withoutconversion.

� To open an .OIF file:1. From the File menu, select Open to display the Open dialog box.

Figure 2-1. The Open dialog box.

2. Use standard Windows procedures to locate the file you want to open. (For thistraining course, all files are stored in a folder in theOPAS32\DEMODATA\TRAINING\your_id, where your_id is the ID you enteredwhen you registered in the training program.)

3. Click on the .OIF file you want to open, and then click the Open button. The TableView for this file displays on your screen as a series of individual tables, one for eachdevice in the test file.

Tip: If the tables do not appear in order, try selecting Cascade from the Window menu.

Note: The resulting table display is shown in “The Parts of the Table Window” on page 42.



Converting Files to .OIF FormatWhen OPAS32 performs a file conversion, it is actually starting a large portion of the dataanalysis. During a conversion, OPAS32 takes a raw data file that contains binary orhexadecimal data that would not be understandable to the average person, analyzes it, andpresents the data in plain English. Figure 2-2. illustrates this point with GSM data.

Figure 2-2. The hexadecimal version of the Layer3 data (left) does not mean much to theaverage person, but OPAS32’s plain English translation makes things very clear.



OPAS32 automatically converts the following file formats into .OIF format when you openthem:

● Universal ASCII format files: User-created ASCII files.

? OPAS32 Help provides information on the ASCII Exchange Format (AXF).

� To display AXF information:1. From the Help menu, select ASCII Exchange Format to

display a list of topics, including record formatspecifications, record definitions, and pre-defined recordformat information.

2. Select the topic of interest.

● .SD4 format files: Test run files from a variety of trackers and scanners.

● Qualcomm CDMA DM Data and Windows DM data: CDMA test run files. The conversiongoes through a two-step process, first converting to CDMA DM files, and then converting to.OIF files.

● .SD5 format files: These are SAFCO Type 5 data.

● .SRS files: Metafiles.

Note about .SD4 conversions: When converting .SD4 data, you must have more files inaddition to the .SD4 file containing the test data:

● .CAL files, or calibration files, handle the conversion from RSSI to dBM.

● .FQM files, or Fixed Quality Measurement files (optional) convert Sinads downlinkinformation, if applicable.

You should have one set of files for each device that was used during the test run.



� To convert a file to .OIF format:1. From the File menu, select Open to display the Open dialog box.

Figure 2-3. The Open dialog box. In this illustration, the file, TrainAmps1.sd4 wasselected. It will be automatically converted as part of the Open process.

2. Select the file you want to open, and click OK to open and convert the file. Therewill be a brief delay while the conversion takes place. During the conversion, aseries of messages displays in the status bar. When the conversion is complete, theresulting .OIF file is displayed in the Table View window.

Tip: If the tables do not appear in order, you can change the display order asdescribed in "Changing the Order of the Window Display" on page 52.

Note: The resulting table display is shown in “The Parts of the Table Window” in the nextsection.



The Parts of the Table WindowThis section identifies the parts of the Table window and provides a brief explanation of how theparts are used.

Title Bar

Layer SelectionDrop DownBox

ParameterSelection DropDown Box

Cell

Column HeadingButton

Table SelectButton

RowSelectionButton

Signal Strength, C to I, and Strongest SingleChannel Buttons (Scanner Data Only)

Splitter Bar

Figure 2-4. The parts of the Table Window.

The following table provides a brief overview of how to use many of the listed parts to selectportions of a table.

Item FunctionRow Selection Button • Click a Row Heading Button to select the row.

• Shift and click on two Row Heading Buttons toselect those rows and all rows between them.

• CTRL and click on multiple Row HeadingButtons to select the rows you clicked on.

Table Select Button Click this button to select the entire table.

Column Heading Button • Click a Column Heading Button to select thecolumn.

• Shift and click on two Column Heading Buttonsto select those columns and all columnsbetween them.

• CTRL and click on multiple Column HeadingButtons to select the columns you clicked on.

Layer Selection Drop Down Box To change layers, choose the layer to display fromthe Layer drop-down box in the window frame.



Item FunctionParameter Selection Drop Down Box To change parameters, select the parameter to

display from the Parameter drop-down box on thewindow frame.

Title Bar Displays a default title based on the file name,technology, and device. You can change this titleby selecting Title from the Edit menu.

Splitter Bar To keep the row labels in view as you scroll acrossa table, or to keep column label in view as youscroll down, you can split the screen with the leftside or top (labels frozen in place) and scrollthrough the data.

Signal Strength, C to I, andStrongest Single Channel Buttons(Scanner Data Only)

• Click the Signal Strength button to view thesignal strength layer for the active tablewindow.

• Click the C to I button to view Channel toInterferer data. A dialog box displays for theselection of channels to compare.

• Click the Strongest Single Channel (SSC)Command to display SSC data in the activetable window.

Cell Displays data for the intersection of row andcolumn headings.

• Click on a single cell to select it.

• Shift and click on two cells to select those cellsand all cells between them. (Note that the lastcell selected contains the focus and may notappear highlighted until you move the cursorout of it with an arrow key, Tab, or Shift+Tab.Any selected cell with the focus may notappear highlighted; however, it is selected.)

• CTRL and click on multiple cells to select allcells you click on.

• Click and hold the left mouse button, and dragthe mouse to select a contiguous range ofcells.



Instructions: Perform the actions described below. To check your answers, compare theresults on your screen with the illustration below.

1. If OPAS32 is not already open, perform the steps in "Starting OPAS32" in Lesson 1.

2. From the File menu, select Open to convert the file TrainAmps1.sd4 to .OIF format.

3. Using the table for Scanner #8, highlight the data as shown in the following illustration.

After you have checked your answers, de-select everything by clicking the Table Selectbutton twice.



Using the Keyboard to Move Around the TableYou can use the mouse and scroll bars to move around the Table window; however, if you preferusing the keyboard for navigation, this section lists the key combinations you’ll need.

To move here… Use these keysUpper left cell CTRL+HOME

Farthest lower-right cell CTRL+END

Up or down a screenful at atime

PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN

Left SHIFT+TAB

Right TAB

Customizing the Table View DisplayThere are many ways you can change the physical look of a table, from resizing the rows andcolumns to changing colors and fonts. You can also do many things to manipulate the displayof data, including hiding columns or deleting rows and changing the layer or parameter data thatis displayed. This section describes how to customize the Table View display.

Resizing Rows and Columns� To adjust the column width or the row height:

1. Position the cursor over the divider (the line separating one button from the next)between two column or row label buttons. When the cursor is correctly positioned, itwill change to two parallel lines with arrows pointing outward.

2. Click and drag the divider to the desired height or width.

3. Release the mouse button.

� To adjust the width or height of multiple rows:1. Select the rows or columns to be adjusted.

2. Drag the row or column divider of one of the selected rows or columns to the desiredheight or width.

� To adjust the height of all rows or columns in a table:1. Click on the Table Select Button (the button in the upper, left corner of the table

data).

2. Drag the row or column divider to the desired height or width.



Hiding and Unhiding ColumnsYou can remove columns from the display without actually deleting them, and then re-displaythem at a later time. This feature makes it possible to see more columns of important data in thetable, reducing the amount of scrolling you would normally do.

� To hide a column:1. Point to the column label.

2. Right-click the mouse to display a pop-up menu.

3. Select Hide from the pop-up menu.

� To unhide a column:1. Point to a column label that is either before or after the position where you want the

column(s) to re-appear.


3. Select Show from the pop-up menu to display the Select Show Column dialog box.

Figure 2-5. The Select Show Columns dialog box shows all columns that havebeen hidden.

You can use this dialog box to select one or more columns to unhide, or use it to unhide acolumn in a new location as follows:

1. Select one or more columns in the Columns box to unhide.

2. Click the --> button, and select either the Before col. or After col. radio button toidentify where the column should be inserted relative to the current column.

3. Click OK to unhide the column(s).



� To unhide all hidden columns:1. Point to a column label that after the position where you want the column(s) to re-

appear.


3. Select Show All from the pop-up menu to display the hidden columns to the left ofthe current column.

Instructions: Using the Scanner #8 table, perform the activity below. To check youranswers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes”

1. Hide all SAT columns from SAT for 334 through SAT for 338.

Note that these columns will remain hidden until you unhide them during this OPAS32session, or until you exit OPAS32. For the purposes of your OPAS32 training,however, all SAT columns will be automatically hidden when you use the TrainingSetup program to prepare for all lessons, starting with Lesson 3. This will be doneusing the OPAS32 API scripts, which you will learn about in Lesson 6, “AutomatingCommon Tasks with Scripts.”

Moving Columns� To change the order of columns in a table:

1. Select one or more columns to be moved.

2. Click and hold the left mouse button while pointing to the center of one of theselected column labels. The cursor will change to the move cursor.

3. Continue holding the left mouse button as you drag the pointer to the new columnlocation.

4. Release the mouse button to complete the move.

Displaying Different Layers� To display a different layer for for the current table view:

1. Click on the down arrow (�) next to the Layer Selection Drop Down Box.

2. Click on the layer you want to display.

Instructions: Using the Scanner #8 table, perform the activities below. To check youranswers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes”

2. Switch to the Markers layer, and take a moment to review the data that is nowdisplayed in the table view.

3. Return to the Signal Strength layer.



Displaying Different Parameters (Analog Data Only)When you first display a Table View, OPAS32 displays parameter measurements based on theaverage value of all the values for each sequence number. You can display different parametermeasurements based on the values that were set up during the test run. The followingparameters may be available, depending upon the data that the collection system was configuredto collect during the test run:

● Ave: (Default value). Displays the average of all values for each sequence number.

● Max: Displays the maximum of all values for each sequence number.

● Min: Displays the minimum of all values for each sequence number.

● Standard Deviation: OPAS32 displays the standard deviation of all values for eachsequence number.

● 10th, 50th, and 90th Percentile: OPAS32 displays a value that is equal to or better than 10,50, or 90 percent of the values, respectively.

� To display a different parameter for for the current table view:1. Click on the down arrow (�) next to the Parameter Selection Drop Down Box.

2. Click on the parameter you want to display.

Deleting RowsYou can delete rows from a table. This action is permanent for the current session unless yousave the data by selecting Save from the File menu). If you save the change, the row cannot beretrieved.

� To delete a row:1. Select one or more rows to be deleted.

2. Press the Delete key.



Using the Splitter BarsThe row and column splitter bars allow you to create horizontal and vertical table areas (splitterwindows) that scroll independently from the body of the table. This feature makes it possible tokeep the row headings and sequence numbers (or more data, if you prefer) stable as you scrollaround the body of the table.

Figure 2-6. shows a typical use for the splitter bars.

❶

❷Figure 2-6. To use the splitter bars, click on the bar (located at the base of each arrow in the illustration) withthe left mouse button, and drag to the new location. In this illustration, both the row (see ❶) and column (see❷) splitter bars have been moved, creating three separate scrollable windows in the table. By using the scrollbars in the body of the table (lower, right window), you can move the data while leaving the row headings andthe sequence numbers in place.



Defining Color SchemesColor schemes applied to data provide visual impact and differentiation in tables and maps.Prior to release 2.4, a color scheme consisted of numeric data values segmented into a series ofranges and the color assignments to each range. (New Feature) As of release 2.4, text columnscan also be assigned their own color schemes. Color schemes do not apply to the latitude,longitude, and sequence columns.

Note: You can create your own custom color schemes using the Edit | Color schemes option.

? OPAS32 Help provides detailed instructions on how to create or edit colorschemes.

� To display all color scheme-related topics:1. From the Help menu, select Index.

2. If the Contents tab is not active, click on it to display theHelp Contents.

3. Double-click the OPAS32 book to display the OPAS32sub-topics and books.

4. Double-click the Procedures book.

5. Double-click the Global Procedures topic to display theGlobal Procedures topics window.

The "Creating a New Color Scheme" topics provide step-by-step instructionsand provide links to other related topics.


4. Select any Channel column in the table, and apply the SigStr (Signal Strength) colorscheme. Notice how the colors of the values in all columns (not just the one that wasselected) have changed.

5. Use Simple Edit to display the color scheme. Notice how colors have been assignedto a range of values so you can instantly differentiate between good and bad signalstrength values in the table.

When done, you can click the Close buttons on any open dialog boxes to return to theTable View display. The colors you assigned are now activated, and they will remainactive until you change them in this OPAS32 session or a future one.



Changing the Look of a TableYou can change the physical display characteristics of a table, such as the font, grid lines, andcolors by setting the table options.

Note: As you will see, OPAS32 offers the option of changing the appearance of one table (asingle device) or all tables (all devices in the current file plus those in any other files you open).

� To change the look of one or all tables:1. (Optional.) If you want the changes to apply only to a table for a single device, be

sure to make that table active before proceeding with the following steps. If youwant the change to affect all tables in all files, any table can be active.

2. From the Tools menu, select Options to display the Options dialog box.

3. Click on the Table tab to display the Table options.

Figure 2-7. The Table tab in the Options dialog box lets you change the physical appearance of one or alltables.

4. You can change any or all of the following characteristics of a table:

● Font: Click on the Change Font button to display the Font dialog box. Then select the font,font style, size, and script you want to use.



● Grid: Check the Vertical Lines and/or Horizontal Lines check boxes to display grid lines.Uncheck these boxes if you do not want to display grid lines.

● Color: Click an option, and then click on the color you want to assign.• Select lets you change the highlight color when an item is selected.• Background lets you change the color of the table background.• Grid Lines lets you change the color of the vertical and horizontal lines (if

you choose to display them).• Tracking Line lets you change the line that shows the new border location

when you resize columns.

● Scope: Check All Tables or Current Table Only to indicate whether the changes shouldapply to all tables that are open or only the current table.

If you click on the All Tables option, the changes you make will affect all tablesin the current file and in any other files you open. If you click on Current TableOnly, the changes you make will affect only the table that was active when youaccessed Options from the Tools menu.

Changing the Order of the Window DisplayYou can change the order in which the individual table windows are displayed by using astandard Windows technique. You do this by activating each window in the order that you wantit displayed, and then using the Tile or Cascade option from the Window menu. There areseveral ways to activate a window; however, this section describes the easiest way to do it.



� To change the window order:1. From the Window menu, select Tile to display all the windows in a tiled view.

Figure 2-8. Since tiling the windows lets you view them all at once, you can activate them easilyby clicking on them in the order in which you want them to appear.

2. Click the title bar of each window in the order you want them to appear. In thisexample, the windows were clicked in reverse numerical order (from 8 to 1).



3. From the Window menu, select Cascade to display the windows cascaded in the neworder. (You can also change the Tile order by selecting Tile from the Windowmenu.)

Figure 2-9. The resulting order of cascaded windows has the first one activated appearing in theback, and the last one activated appearing in the front.



Using Popup Menus in the Table ViewOPAS32 provides numerous “right-click” pop-up windows to speed access to commonly-usedfeatures. This section describes the pop-up windows that are available from the Table View andexplains how to access them.

Go to Relative Map:Highlight a row, then right-click on: Data cellUse this command to go directly from the current table windowto its related map window. This command appears on a pop-up menu when a table window is active.

Decode Layer 3 Parameters:Right-click on: Parameter Cell when GSM Layer 3 data is inthe active table window.

When GSM data is loaded and Layer3 data is displayed in theactive table window, this option converts the data in theselected Parameter cell from hexadecimal to plain Englishtext. The following viewing option buttons are available:

Enlarges the text display cell to show all data, or asmuch as will fit based on the size of the table window.

Displays the Cell Information box.

Scrolls the text display.



Hide, Show, Show AllRight-click on: Column labels

Lets you hide or show columns, as described in “Hidingand Unhiding Columns” on page 46.

Invert SelectionRight-click on: Column labels after selecting a row

Lets you reverse the selection so that the currentlyselected item is de-selected, and everything else isselected. This feature provides a good way to display theinverse of a Boolean Selection (refer to "Selecting TableData With Boolean Selection" beginning on page 63).

Color SchemeRight-click on: One or more column labels for anycolumn that supports color schemes.

If a color scheme is already defined for the column(s) thatwere clicked, this option allows you to edit the colorscheme, select a different color scheme, or create a newone. If a color scheme has not been defined for theselected column(s), OPAS32 asks if you want to defineone.

Manipulating the DataThis section explains how to reduce the data in the Table View and how to perform operationsspecific to the Analog, CDMA, GSM, and IS-136 technologies.

Reducing DataThe Reduce feature allows you to display fewer rows of the test run data based on a number ofdifferent calculation methods. This feature allows you to show only the most significant data ina test run, which can be very helpful for presentation purposes.



Figure 2-10. In this example, the reduction calculation is set to reduce by selecting the minimumvalue for each 5 records. Thus, 15 rows become 3 rows after the reduction.

� To reduce data:1. From the Operations menu, select Reduce to display the Reduce dialog box, shown in

Figure 2-10.

2. Select the layer to reduce.

3. Select a reduction calculation method, and enter the number of records to combinebased on the selected reduction calculation method. For example, if you chose theAverage (Ave) calculation method for a bin size of 5 records, OPAS32 will find theaverage value of every 5 records and display only one row for every 5 rows originallydisplayed, reporting that average value for the first row (sequence number) in the bin.

4. Select Update All Views to use the reduced data in other views (map or graph), orselect Update Current View Only to use the reduced data in the current Table Viewonly.

5. Click OK to reduce the displayed data. The Layer drop-down box shows a new layer:“Signal Strength MIN:5,” as shown in Figure 2-10. During the current OPAS32session, you can switch between this reduction layer and other available layers byusing the Layer drop-down box.

Note: You can save layers created with the Reduce option by using the Save As option on theFile menu. Refer to “Saving Table Data" on page 59.



Instructions: Using the Scanner #8 table, perform the activities below. To checkyour answers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes”

6. Scroll vertically through the table data, noting how frequently the colorschange to show strong and weak signal strengths. Then, reduce the data inthe table so that the average value of every ten rows is displayed. Scrollthrough the data vertically to see the effect the reduction had on the data.Also note the layer name that has been assigned to the data.

7. Reduce the data again, this time displaying the minimum value for every fiverows. Again, look at the rows that now display to see the effect the reductionhad on the data. Notice how the layer name has been changed to reflect thattwo reductions have been done on the data.

Performing Scanner-Specific OperationsYou can use the three buttons (SS, C to I, and SSC) to view different scanner layer data. Thesebuttons are only available when scanner data is in the active table.

The Signal Strength ButtonClick this button to view the signal strength layer for the active table window.

The C to I ButtonClick this button to display the Carrier to Interferer dialog box.

Figure 2-11. The Carrier to Interferer dialog box lets you identify whichchannels you want to compare.

When you click OK, the table data displays the selected channels and the radio of the strength ofthe desired channel (carrier) to the strength of the interfering channel (interferer).

The SSC ButtonClick this button to display the strongest single channel for each row in the active table. Inaddition to the sequence number, position number, lattitude, longitude, and time, two columnsare displayed: the SSC Value column shows the strongest signal strength for the row, and theSSCName column identifies the channel.



Saving Table DataOPAS32 offers the option of saving table data to the same file name or to a different one, whichis a handy feature in the event that you leave your computer for an extended period of time. Thissection explains what part of your work gets saved and how to save your data.

Note: OPAS32 automatically saves changes to table data when you exit. In the event that youwant to save to a different file name or save table data while still working in OPAS32, use theSave option as described in this section.

What Gets SavedWhen you save table data, only the data is saved. In other words, activities that you performedbefore saving, such as hiding columns or changing the displayed parameters return to theirdefault settings when you re-open the file. On the other hand, if you delete rows or change avalue in a cell, these changes are saved.

When you make a change to the table options (Options from the Tools menu), as discussed in“Changing the Look of a Table” on page 50, you can save the changes through Save Options onthe Tools menu, or they will be saved automatically when you exit OPAS32. In this case, theoptions are not saved as part of the .OIF file; they apply to all .OIF files until they are changedagain.

Saving the Table Data

The Save Button� To save table data to the original file name:

1. From the File menu, select Save, or click the Save tool bar button to display theSelect Devices/Layer dialog box.

Figure 2-12. The Select Devices/Layers dialog box gives you the



opportunity to permanently add or eliminate devices and/or layers fromthe .OIF file.

2. (Optional) Click on any device(s) that you want to permanently remove from the file(which automatically removes the associated layers), or click on any layer(s) youwant to permanently remove. When you click, an X appears to indicate exactly whatis being removed. (You can click a second time to remove the X from the display forthe selected item.)

3. When you are done selecting items to remove (if any), click the OK button, or clickthe Cancel button to exit without saving. If you click the OK button, a messagereminds you that you are overwriting an existing file.

To overwrite the existing file, click the Yes button. To cancel without saving, clickthe No button.

� To save table data to a new file name:1. From the File menu, select Save As to display the Select Devices/Layer dialog box

shown in Figure 2-12.

2. (Optional) Click on any device(s) that you want to permanently remove from the file(which automatically removes the associated layers), or click on any layer(s) youwant to permanently remove. When you click, an X appears to indicate exactly whatis being removed. (You can click a second time to remove the X from the display forthe selected item.)

3. When you are done selecting items to remove (if any), click the OK button to displaythe Save As dialog box.

4. Select a folder, enter a file name, and accept the .OIF type.

5. Click OK to complete the save.

Instructions: Perform the activity below. To check your answers, refer to Appendix A,“Answers to Quick Quizzes.”

8. Save TrainAmps1.oif using the original file name.

Exporting Table DataOPAS32's Export Layer feature allows you to save the data in a selected layer in your choice ofcomma- or tab-delimited format. The resulting file can be used in a wide range of Microsoft®Windows™ programs such as spreadsheets and word processing tables. It can also be used inMapInfo. This section explains how to set up your own export preferences and how to exporttable data.



Setting Up for Export LayerBefore you use the Layer Export feature, you should set up the default settings that areappropriate for the way you generally use the feature. Default settings identify the folder youwant to export to, how you want latitude and longitude expressed in the export file, the delimiter(the character that separates one column of data from the next in your export file—you canchoose between commas or tab characters), and how to express invalid values, which isimportant if you plan to use the exported data in MapInfo.

� To set up for the Export Layer feature:1. From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. Click on the ASCII Export Page tab to display the available settings for the ExportLayer feature.

Figure 2-13. As with many features in OPAS32, the Tools | Options selection is the place toset up default settings for the Layer Export feature. It is referred to as ASCII Export becausethe export file is in ASCII (also known as plain text) format.

From this dialog box, you can change the default settings for the Layer Export feature.



? To get detailed explanations of each object in this dialog box, use theOnline Help system, as follows:

� To display Help for the ASCII Export Page from OPAS32:1. From the Help menu, select the Index option.

2. If it is not already displayed, click on the Index tab.

3. In the first field in the Index tab, type export layer.

4. Select Export Layer from the second field to display theTopics Found dialog box.

5. You can select the Layer Export Command topic to viewoverview information about the dialog box, or select theOptions – ASCII Export Page Tab topic to see ahotspotted picture of this tab. This selection allows youto click on the different objects in the picture to learntheir purpose and how to use them.

Using the Exported File in Microsoft® Excel™The method you use for opening the exported file in Microsoft® Excel™ depends on whetheryou have elected to export to a comma-delimited file (*.CSV) or to a tab-delimited file (*.TXT).

● Microsoft® Excel™ automatically displays .CSV files when you open them. No furtherinput is required.

● When you open a .TXT file in Microsoft® Excel™, a wizard automatically runs to handlethe conversion to Excel™ format. When you see this wizard, simply click the Finish buttonto complete the conversion and display the file in spreadsheet format.

Handling Invalid Values for Exports to MapInfoIf you plan to use the exported file in MapInfo, it is important that you understand that MapInfoautomatically converts invalid (blank) values to zero (0). Since invalid values are displayed asblank (this is the default value upon installation of OPAS32), MapInfo will convert them to zero(0), which may be misleading when mapping certain column values. To avoid this conversion,you can change this default value to a unique number that will immediately signal an invalidvalue in the MapInfo map (for example, -11111). You can then use MapInfo to substitute all11111s with blanks.



Performing the ExportThe Layer Export feature exports data from the currently active layer to an ASCII format textfile. Unless you set different default values by using Tools | Options and entering values on theASCII Export Page, the default settings that are displayed on the ASCII Export Page the firsttime you display it are automatically used when you run the Layer Export feature. The OnlineHelp identifies default values if you need to refer to them. Additionally, the export is output tothe same folder as the data (.OIF) file used to generate the export.

OPAS32 automatically assigns an export filename that is constructed as follows:TRName___DevNameandID___LayerName.ext

Where: TRName is the name of the test run (followed by three underscore characters)

DevName and ID is the Device name and ID number (followed by three underscorecharacters)

LayerName is the name of the layer in the active table (followed by a dot)

ext is the file extension (.TXT for tab-delimited files, and .CSV for comma-delimitedfiles)

Note: The data in the resulting file will be an exact duplicate of the data in the current layer.This means that any data modifications that you make in the layer (for example, deleted records,data reduction, and so forth) will be reflected in the exported file. All the columns that aredisplayed when you run the Layer Export command are exported to the file.

Selecting Table Data With Boolean SelectionOPAS32's Boolean Selection feature allows you to select data in a table based on its value. Thissection introduces you to this powerful tool.

How Boolean Selection WorksBoolean Selection allows you to select table or map information by entering an expression(query). This expression identifies any data field available in the current layer, plus arithmeticoperators (like plus and minus) and logical operators (like equal to, not equal to, less than, andgreater than). By combining data fields and arithmetic and logical operators, you can haveOPAS32 identify the data fields that meet the specifics of your expression.

The result of a Boolean expression can only be one of two possible answers -- 0 (false) or 1(true). The result of the query displayed in the toolbox is the number and percentage of recordsthat are true. In a table, you can use Ctrl-Down arrow and Ctrl-Up arrow to view the selectedrecords.



About the Boolean Selection ToolTo begin Boolean selection, you display the Boolean Selection Tool.

� To display the Boolean Selection Tool:From the Operations menu, select the Select option.

Figure 2-14.. Initially, the Boolean Selection Tool provides a place for you toselect a previously-saved query and apply it. When you apply the query, youcan use the scroll buttons on the right to scroll the table behind the tool to viewthe data that has been selected. They have no effect on a map. The More>>>button lets you display more options that offer a wide range of features forcreating a new query.

� To display More Query Features:With the basic Tool displayed, click the More>>> button.

Queries List: Use toselect from list of savedqueries.

Query Entry Box: Typea query, or use OperatorKeypad and Column List tocompose a query..Once acolumn is displayed in thisbox, you can right-click todisplay a list of possiblevalues for that column.

Name Field: Enter aunique query name, andclick the Save button to saveit for future use.

Operator Keypad: Clickkeys, and they appear in theQuery Entry box.

Column List: Displayscolumns that are availablefor the current layer.Double-click a columnname, and it displays in theQuery Entry box.

Deletes query in Queriesbox.

Saves the current query.You must enter a name first.

Reduces the Toolbox to thebasic display.

Displays Help informationabout the Tool.

Applies the current query tothe active table. Also showsresults information in theResult: field.

Buttons let you scroll thetable behind the BooleanSelection Tool up or down toview selections. They haveno effect on maps.

Further expands the Tool topermit programming-likequeries to be written.

Figure 2-15. In addition to providing more information to make formulation of queries easy, the Expanded Toolprovides a means to save a query for later use. Advanced users who understand basic programmingtechniques can click the Advanced button to further expand the Tool. Information on the advanced option isprovided in the online help.



Using the ToolYou can use the Tool to:

•••• Enter a query manually or through use of the Operator Keypad and Column List.

•••• Apply a query that was saved previously.

•••• Save a new query.

•••• Delete an existing query.

•••• Scroll vertically through a table that is behind the tool to view selected data (not applicablefor maps).

� To enter a query manually:1. Click in the Query Entry Box to display a cursor.

2. Type the query using appropriate syntax. For example, Column names must beenclosed in double quotation marks (").

3. Click the Apply button to perform the query. The appropriate cells in the active tableare highlighted, and the results of the query display in the Result: field (for example,155/888 records 17.45% indicates that your query caused 155 records out of888 records in the active table to be selected, and the selected records represent 17.45percent of the total number of records).

?For complete syntax information, click the Help button to display the Boolean SelectionTool help. Then, click the Syntax Rules button at the bottom of the help display.

� To use the Operator Keypad and Column List to enter a query:1. Double-click on column names from the Column List, and single-click on buttons in

the Operator Keypad to formulate a query, which displays in the Query Entry box.Correct syntax is automatic using this method; however, you must select operatorsand columns in the order that you want them to appear in the query.

2. Follow step 3 from the manual entry instructions to perform the query.

Tip: Once you have selected a column, you can display a list of valid values for that columnby right-clicking in the Query Entry Box. Once the list is displayed, you can select anyvalid value to be included in the query by clicking on it.

� To apply a previously-saved query:1. Click the down arrow in the Queries List to display a list of saved queries.

2. Click on the query you want to use. The query displays in the Query Entry Box.

3. Click the Apply button to perform the query.



� To save a new query:1. Enter the query.

2. In the Name field, type a unique name for the query.

3. Click the Save button to save the query under the specified name. It is now availablefor selection.

Note: When you save a query, it applies to the current layer only. Since the tool can be usedthroughout an OPAS32 session, each time the current layer changes the query list changes inthe tool box.

� To delete a query:1. Select a saved query that you want to delete from the Queries List.

2. Click the Delete button to delete the displayed query.

Logical OperatorsThe following table shows the symbols that you can in the Boolean expression.

OperatorName

OperatorSymbol Definition

NOT ! (exclamationpoint)

Selects fields that are not equal to the specified value.

OR | (pipingsymbol)

Selects fields that contain values that meet the criteriaof either of two expressions.

XOR ^ (carat) Finds those records that are true if either one of thetwo operands in the equation is true.

Example: ("ch 313" < -70) ^ ("ch 314" < -70)

If only one is less than -70, the equation is true.

AND & (ampersand) Selects only those fields that contain values that meetthe criteria of both of two expressions.

Greater Than > Selects fields that contain values that are larger than aspecific value. This value can be expressed as afixed number, or it can be the result of a mathematicalequation.

Less Than < Selects fields that contain values that are smaller thana specific value. This value can be expressed as afixed number, or it can be the result of a mathematicalequation.

Greater thanor equal to

>= Selects fields that contain values that are larger thanor equal to a specific value. This value can beexpressed as a fixed number, or it can be the result ofa mathematical equation.

Less than or <= Selects fields that contain values that are smaller than



OperatorName

OperatorSymbol Definition

equal to or equal to a specific value. This value can beexpressed as a fixed number, or it can be the result ofa mathematical equation.

Equal to = Selects fields that contain values that are equal to aspecific value. This value can be expressed as afixed number, or it can be the result of a mathematicalequation.

Arithmetic OperatorsYou can use the following arithmetic operators in an expression:

Symbol Meaning+ Adds two values together

- Subtracts the second value from the first value

* Multiples the first value by the second value

/ Divides the first value by the second value

@ (Delta) Identifies the difference between the current record and the previousrecord. The Delta operator can be used in conjunction with =, !=, <, >, or anyother operator requiring a numeric operand. Delta finds those records wherethe value of a column changes from the current record to the previous record bythe delta value (ignores first record in file because there is no previous record)

Examples:

@ "Ch 313" = 5 selects any record where the Ch 313 column value has adifference of 5 from the previous record.

(“Ch 313” > “Ch 314”) @ > 0 first evaluates whether the value of Ch 313 isgreater than Ch 314. Then it looks at the previous row to determine if the samecondition was true (1) or false (0). If it has switched from true to false or fromfalse to true, it means that the delta is greater than 0; thus, the record isselected. Notice that the Delta operator appears to the right of the expression itmodifies. The ability to place the operator to the right of an expression is mosthelpful when used with parenthetical expressions.

$ (Is Invalid) Identifies blank values.

Example: $ "Qual" selects any record where the Qual value is blank. The abilityto place the operator to the right of an expression is most helpful when usedwith parenthetical expressions

# (Force Numeric) Changes the contents of a string (text) column to be treated asa number. The Force Numeric operator can be used in conjunction with =, !=,<, >, or any other operator requiring a numeric operand. This operator allowsstring values containing numbers to be used in numeric operations.

Example: (# "Chnl") > 313 selects any record with a channel greater than 313.

Note: The Force Numeric operator converts a string containing alphabeticalcharacters to a blank numeric column, which is an invalid record.



Creating Exception LayersWhere Boolean Selection works by highlighting records that meet a pre-defined set of selectioncriteria in an existing table or map, the Exception Reporting command creates new layers basedon a pre-defined set of selection criteria. This section teaches you how to use ExceptionReporting to create layers and how to define custom Exception Reports.

Note: To learn how to map exception layers, refer to Lesson 4, "Using Map Data."

Exception Layers, DefinedOPAS32 is supplied with a set of exception reports, which identify a set of selection criteria thatOPAS32 uses to generate subsets of data for a device. An exception layer is the result ofapplying an exception report to a single layer within a device within a test run.

To clarify this concept, assume you have a CDMA test run for which you want to see only datathat indicates an out of coverage situation. Now, let's further assume that you have defined aCDMA Power Exception report that selects any record that meets one or more of the followingconditions:

● "RxPwr" > -90

● "TxPwr" > 17

● "FwdFER" > 3

When you apply this exception report, you will generate a layer that shows only those recordsfor which one or more of the above conditions is true. Thus, you now have weeded out only thedata that you need to see for this particular analysis. You can map the data and apply a symbolscheme to further facilitate your analysis.



Differences Between Exception Reporting and BooleanSelection

As mentioned earlier, both Boolean Selection and Exception Reporting let you write a query andselect records based on that query. The query syntax is the same for both features; as a matter offact, you can import Boolean Selection queries into Exception Reporting, avoiding typing thequery a second time. Although these two features are very similar, there are two importantdifferences:

● Running a Boolean Selection query highlights data in an existing table. An ExceptionReporting query, on the other hand, actually creates a new layer containing the records thatmeet the query’s selection criteria.

● While you can run only one Boolean Selection query at a time, Exception Reporting allowsyou to generate several Boolean results and view them simultaneously.

● Boolean Selection queries are transitory; they must be run each time you want to see theselected data in a table. On the other hand, you have the option of making a new ExceptionLayer a permanent part of the data.

Creating an Exception LayerThe Exception Reporting command lets you create custom exception layers for devices in anyopen test run. First, you select from a list of pre-defined exception reports, and then you selectall test run/device combinations for which you want to generate exception layers. For eachselected exception report, OPAS32 generates an exception layer for each layer in selected devicethat satisfies at least one condition.

For example, assume you have a CDMA Tracker device for which two layers, CDMA1 andCDMA2, both contain the RxPwr column, and you have defined an Exception Report that looksfor any record where RxPwr is greater than –70. If both layers CDMA1 and CDMA2 containrecords meeting this criteria, two Exception layers will be generated.



� To create an exception layer:

Note: You must have an .OIF file loaded, and be in the Table View to use this feature.

1. From the Operations menu, select Exception Reporting to display the ExceptionReporting dialog box.

Figure 2-16. This dialog box lets you generate a new exception layer. You canalso view the selection criteria used for each exception report, create customsymbol schemes for exception layers, and create your own custom exceptionreports from this dialog box.

2. In the Exception Reports box, use standard Windows selection techniques to selectone or more exception reports for which you want to generate layers. (Refer to"Viewing Exception Report Details" in the next section for information on viewingthe selection criteria for any listed report.)

3. In the Testrun / Device box, select one or more devices for which you want togenerate layers.



4. You can select exception layer(s) that you will want to be available in all .OIF filesthat contain the same devices and columns. Simply click any unchecked check boxesof those exception layers that you want automatically loaded, and then check theAutomatically Create Exception Layers at OIF Load checkbox at the bottom of thedialog box.

Similarly, if you want to stop loading certain exception reports at OIF load, click anychecked boxes to remove the checkmarks, and make sure the Automatically CreateException Layers at OIF Load checkbox is still checked (assuming there are stillsome exception reports checked).

Remember: When an OIF file is loaded, these settings only affect those exceptionreports that contain data that is in the loaded OIF file. For example, checking thisbox when creating an exception layer that is calculated with CDMA-specific columnswill not create the same exception layer when an Analog .OIF file is loaded.

5. Click the Evaluate button. The screen does not change in any way; however, whenyou close the Exception Reporting dialog box, you will be able to view new layersfor each Exception Report / Device combination. In the event that there are norecords matching any condition in the Exception Report, a message informs you thatthe Exception Report has not been created.

6. To save the layer for future use, use the File | Save As Command.

Viewing Exception Report DetailsTo help you identify the exception report you need, you can use the View Details… button toinstantly see the selection criteria that is defined for any listed exception report. Any reports thathave been created in OPAS32 release 2.14 or later can be modified using this feature. Thisincludes any reports that you have defined, and it may include some reports that are pre-suppliedwith OPAS32.



� To view details for a report defined in OPAS32 release 2.13 or earlier:1. In the Exception Reporting dialog box, click on a report to select it.

2. Click the View Details… button to display the Exception Settings dialog box.

Figure 2-17. The Exception Settings dialog box is used to view the selection criteria used to create a layer fromany selected exception report. This helps you confirm that you have selected the correct exception reports forlayer creation. This example shows a single Result line, which is structured similarly to an expression that mightbe used in Boolean Selection. Exception Reports can have more than one Result line, which would allow formultiple conditions to be met. You can change existing exception reports or create new ones. Refer to "Creatingor Changing Exception Reports" on page 75 for detailed instructions.

3. When you have finished reviewing the information, click the Close button to returnto the Exception Reporting dialog box.

Note: The Result column in this dialog box is used to identify which of the expressions weretrue. This is done through the addition of a Result and a Description column in the resultingexception layer. You will learn more about this in "Viewing an Exception Layer" on page 74.

� To view details for a report defined in OPAS32 release 2.14 or later:1. In the Exception Reporting dialog box, click on any report that you have defined to

select it.



2. Click the View Details… button to display the Build Query dialog box.

Figure 2-18. The Build Query dialog box is displayed when you click the View Details button after selecting aquery that you have defined.

3. You can edit the displayed query using the procedures described for creating a newException Layer in “Creating or Changing Exception Reports,” beginning on page 75or simply review it and click the Cancel button to return to the Exception Reportingdialog box without making changes.

Creating an Exception Layer Symbol SchemeYou can create a custom character- or icon-based symbol scheme for an exception layer. Theresulting symbol scheme will be available when you map the Result column, as described in"Mapping an Exception Layer" in Lesson 4.

� To create a symbol scheme:1. From the Exception Reporting dialog box, select an exception report and all

applicable devices.

2. Click the Symbol Wizard button to display the Edit Symbol Map dialog box from theSymbol Wizard.

3. You can select the Character radio button and then enter the characters that you wantto represent each value. Or, select the Icon radio button, and then select icons assymbols.



Viewing an Exception LayerThe following illustration shows the details of an exception report and the resulting layer.

Figure 2-19. An exception layer contains the columns used as selection criteria in the exception report,and it adds two columns, Result and Description, that identify which search criteria each record meets.

The example above only has one Result defined; however, as mentioned earlier, it is possible todefine multiple results. In this case, OPAS32 would select records based on whether one ormore than one defined result is true. In this case, the Result column would use BooleanAddition to show which expressions were met by each row. This means that, when more thanone expression is true, the assigned Result numbers of those expressions are added together toarrive at the result shown in the column.

For example, if Results 1 and 2 are met by a specific record, the Result column would show aresult of 3, which indicates that this record met Results 1 and 2 (1+2=3). In this case, theDescription column would show descriptive text for both Results 1 and 2.

Hint: When more than one Result is met, the Description column lists each Result on a separateline. To easily view them all, it is helpful to enlarge the table rows so that there is room todisplay one line for each possible Result, as was done in Figure 2-19. A quick way to do this isto highlight the entire table by clicking the button in the upper left corner, and then drag the firstrow downward. All rows will be enlarged using this method. Click in any cell of the table toremove the highlighting from the table when done.



Instructions: Using TrainAmps1.OIF, perform the activities below. To check youranswers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes”

9. Create an exception layer using the AMPS Interference Exception Report for the RSSlayer in Portable #1, specifying that the layer should be available to all AMPS .OIFfiles.

10. Create an icon-based symbol scheme for the single value in this Exception Report.You can use any available icon in the Symbol Wizard.

11. Return to the Table view, and display the new exception layer. There should be threerows of data in this layer.

12. Save the .OIF file, retaining the original filename of TrainAmps1.OIF making sureyou save it in your own Training Folder. You will be using this exception layeragain when you get to Lesson 4.

Creating or Changing Exception ReportsAlthough OPAS32 comes pre-supplied with a set of Exception Reports, you may want to createyour own custom exception reports or import pre-existing Boolean Selection queries to createnew layers. This section explains how to create new exception reports or change existing user-defined reports.

Accessing the Build Query FeatureYou can access this feature in two ways, depending on whether you want to edit an existinguser-defined query or create a new one.

� To edit an existing user-defined query:1. From the Exception Reporting dialog box, click on a user-defined query that you

want to edit.



2. Click the View Details button to display the Build Query dialog box, which showsthe expressions for the selected query.

Figure 2-20. Although you access this dialog box differently when you want to edit an existing user-definedquery, you will learn that the process for changing a query is the same as that for creating a new query.

3. Follow the instructions in Building a Query” on page 80 to edit the query.



� To create a new user-defined query:1. From the Exception Reporting dialog box, click the Add New button to display the

Select Layer dialog box.

Figure 2-21. The first step is to drill down to the device and layer for which you want to create anexception report.

2. Click on the plus-sign (+) box for the device you want to use, and then click on thelayer you want to use for the query. Remember that, once you create the exceptionreport, you will be able to apply it to other similar layers from any test run.



3. Click the Next> button to display the Select Columns dialog box.

Figure 2-22. Once you have selected a layer, you can select any columns that you want to appearin your new Exception layer. Be sure to select the columns in the order in which you want them toappear in the resulting layer. The first column in the Selected Columns box will be the left-mostcolumn in the Exception layer table.

4. To select columns, click on a column in the Available Columns box to highlight it,and then click the --> button to copy it to the Selected Columns box. You can alsode-select a columns by clicking on it in the Selected Columns box, and then clickingthe <-- button to remove it from the Selected Columns box.



5. Click the Next> button to display the Build Query dialog box.

Figure 2-23. When you create a new query, the Build Query dialog box initially displays the start of a defaultquery (Time =). As you will learn, the table at the top allows you to select columns, criteria, and values forqueries of one line or more. The More column lets you string multiple sets of conditions together using &(and), | (or), or ^ (XOR). The Exception box at the bottom of the dialog box displays the query as you buildit and is also used for manual editing.



Building a QueryOnce you have displayed the Build Query dialog box, you can quickly use the top portion tobuild a query.

Figure 2-24. The tree structure on the left identifies the name of the Exception Report, which will be assigned in thelast step when you save your definition. The level beneath it (New Expression) is the name you assign to each set ofconditions. You can define multiple distinct sets of conditions that will all be run simultaneously when you create alayer using this Exception Report.

� To build a query using the table’s features:1. In the tree structure to the left of the table, right-click on the first branch name to

display a popup menu. You can now enter a meaningful name that will be used inthe Description column of the layer’s table.

Figure 2-25. Right-click popup menu.

This popup menu offers the following options:● Add Expression: Allows you to create another query. You can define multiple

queriesthat will be run simultaneously. When you produce the exception report,a Condition column is created in the layer to identify which condition orconditions have been met for each row.

● Delete: This option only appears when one or more expression is listed in thetree structure. It allows you to delete the highlighted expression. A messageasks you to confirm the deletion before it is executed.



● Rename: Makes the expression name modifiable so you can type a differentname.

2. In the table, you can enter all column values directly, or you can click in a field todisplay a down arrow, which allows you to select from all available values for thatcolumn.

3. When entering a value, click on the “…” button to display a list of all availablevalues for the column specified.

4. You can use the following options to edit the query:Combine Button Highlight two or more rows, and click this button to

combine their expressions into one. OPAS32 placesparentheses around the selected expressions, whichcan be viewed in the Exception box at the bottom ofthe dialog box. This is required to change the orderin which the expressions are evaluated.

Split Button Highlight one or more rows that have been combined,and click this button to separate the expressions. Ifyou highlight less rows than were originallycombined, the other combined rows remaincombined, if applicable. For example, assume thefollowing rows have been combined:

dBm = -100dBm = -102dBm = -103dBm = -104dBm = -105

When combined, their expression reads as follows:

( (("dBm" = -100)|("dBm" = -102)|("dBm" = -103)|("dBm" = -104)|("dBm" = -105)) )The bold parentheses are the ones that combine theentire set of expressions.

If you highlight the middle row (dBm = -103) and usethe Split feature, the first two conditions will becombined, the middle condition will stand alone, andthe last two conditions will be combined. Theirexpression now reads as follows:

( (("dBm" = -100)|("dBm" = -102)) | ("dBm" = -103) |(("dBm" = -104)|("dBm" = -105)) )

Insert Button Highlight a row, and click this button to insert a newrow above the selected one.

Delete Button Highlight one or more rows, and click this button toremove the selected row(s) from the query.

Validate Button When building a query as described in this section,the syntax is virtually guaranteed to be correct. Youcan check its correctness, however, by clicking theValidate button. In the event of a syntax error, amessage box would notify you.



Manual Edit Button Click this button to activate the Exception box at thebottom of the dialog box. You can now type changesdirectly into the query expression. See “Using theManual Edit Feature“ on page 83 for details on thisoption.

Import Query Button Click this button to copy a saved Boolean Selectionquery into Exception Reporting. See “Importing aSaved Query from Boolean Selection“ on page 84 fordetails on this option.

A sample completed query is shown in Figure 2-26.

Figure 2-26. This completed query is actually a replica of the Amps Interference query that is pre-suppliedwith OPAS32.

5. When you are done entering a query, click the Finish button. If there are syntaxerrors, a message displays to notify you. Otherwise, the Save Exception dialog box isdisplayed.

Figure 2-27. The name you enter here will be used in the Exception Reportingdialog box to identify the report you have created.



6. Enter a unique name, and then click the OK button to save the query.

Using the Manual Edit FeatureWhen you click the Manual Edit button, the Exception box becomes active so you can manuallyedit a query.

Figure 2-28. This illustration shows an existing query that has just been opened for manual edit. You do nothave to create a query using the standard method; you can write the entire query using manual edit, if youprefer. Notice that the table at the top of the dialog box is now greyed out, and the rows have been removedfrom the display. Once you use Manual Edit to write or change a query, the standard options from the top ofthe dialog box are no longer available.

You can now enter queries using the same syntax as is used in Boolean Selection queries.

? If you are unsure on how to enter an expression, the online help forException Reporting also provides direct links to syntax information.

� To display syntax information for queries:1. From the Build Queries dialog box, click the Help button to

display general help about the dialog box.

2. Click the Syntax button in the Help topic to display the BooleanSelection Syntax Rules, which are the same for ExceptionReporting.

Pay particular attention to the exact format you must use. For example,be sure to use double quotation marks around column names and singlequotation marks around each string. Use the exception reports that aresupplied with OPAS32 as examples to ensure that you use the correctsyntax.



You can check your syntax at any time by clicking the Validate button. Once you have finishedentering the query, click the Finish button so you can save the query.

Importing a Saved Query from Boolean SelectionIf you find you need to create a layer using criteria that have already been created and saved inBoolean Selection, you can avoid re-typing the query by importing it directly from BooleanSelection. You can use this option to import a Boolean Selection query for use as-is inException Reporting, or you can import a Boolean Selection query as part of a larger query.

� To import a saved Boolean Selection query:1. Click the Import Query button to display the Select dialog box.

Figure 2-29. This dialog box lists all queries that have beensaved in Boolean Selection.



2. Select a query, and click the OK button to display the query syntax in the Exceptionbox of the Build Query dialog box.

Figure 2-30. The Import Query feature copies the query exactly as it appears in the Boolean Selection feature.You can use the query as it was originally written, or you can make changes.

3. You can edit the existing query, import other queries, or perform any other editingoperation, and then save the query as described earlier.

Note: Once you have imported a query, only Manual Edit mode is available. You cancontinue to import queries, or manually enter any changes into the Exception box.

Creating New Layers with Analysis WizardsAfter you have worked with OPAS32 for a while, you are likely to develop patterns that youfollow for performing analyses on certain technologies. For example, you may find that youprefer to see only a subset of all available columns, you might want to see columns groupeddifferently than the default view display, or you may want to see certain columns calculated in aspecific way. This section explains how to use OPAS32's Analysis Wizards to create customlayers for these purposes.



Using the Analysis WizardsOPAS32 currently offers Wizards for the CDMA, GSM, and iDEN (New) technologies. EachAnalysis Wizard walks you through the steps required to create a customized layer for a specifictechnology. On-screen information explains the purpose of each step, and online help is alsoavailable to provide more detail if needed.

� To run an Analysis Wizard:1. From the File menu, select Analysis Wizards to display a drop-down list of available

Wizards.

2. Click on the Wizard for the technology you want to analyze.

Each Analysis Wizard consists of certain steps specific to the technology being analyzed.Although the list is similar from one technology to the next, some technologies may offer stepsthat do not apply to other technologies. The steps common to all technologies are as follows:

● Create or Modify Analysis: Creates a new analysis, deletes an existing analysis, or selectsan existing analysis for modification. Note that the GSM Analysis Wizard contains twomandatory layers—The Call Summary and Idle Summary layers. You can edit these layersby adding columns or deleting columns that you have previously added. You cannot deletethe default columns in these layers or delete the layers themselves.

● Select Time or Event-based Analysis: For non-summary layers, identifies the type ofanalysis being defined – time-driven or event-driven. This lets you determine whether youwant to perform your analyses based on a specified period of time that has passed or basedon the occurrence of certain events, which you define later in the Wizard.

● Select Source of Mobile Data: Allows you to select the type of mobile data to convert. Thelist of mobile data sources is specific to the technology you are analyzing.

● Select Columns: Allows you to identify the specific column data to include in theconversion for analysis. The columns you can select are based on the source of mobile dataselected in the previous step.

● Modify Column Properties: Lets you review and assign properties to a specific datacolumn. Properties include column title, units of measure, event triggers, compression andexpansion factors, filters, and threshold values to apply to the data selection.

● Select Event Trigger Columns: (Appears only when Event is selected in the Select Timeor Event-based Analysis step for definition of an event-drive layer.) Identifies those eventcolumns that are to be used as triggers in the selection of records for the converted file.

● Define Layer: Opens the Layer Definition Name dialog box to save the layer definitionproduced by the Analysis Wizard.

Note: Even when the steps are the same for each technology, there may be technology-relateddifferences in how to enter information (or what information to enter) for a particular step. Theonline help provides buttons to display specific information for each technology when necessary.If you are uncertain about how to use a certain Analysis Wizard step, we recommend that youuse the Help button to learn more about the requirements for the step.



Expanding CDMA or GSM Data for Easy AnalysisA CDMA or GSM .OIF file automatically shows certain data; however, much more data isavailable than you will see in the default view. For every technology's .OIF file, there shouldalso be a raw data file (.DM for CDMA, and .SUM for GSM) in the same folder. This filecontains all data captured during the test run, but the data must be expanded to get it to display inany OPAS32 view.

Expanding is actually a two-step process. First, you use the Analysis Wizard to create a layercontaining the data that you want. Once this layer is created, you use the Expand feature to loadthe layer’s data into the .OIF file.

Note: You can also use any of the pre-defined layers supplied with your OPAS32 software.

� To expand data for a layer:1. Select the layer definition in the Expand combo box (to the right of the Expand

button) in the Table window.

2. Click the Table Select button in the upper left corner of the body of the table to selectthe entire table, or select a block of contiguous layers as described in "Using theKeyboard to Move Around the Table" beginning on page 45.

3. Click the Expand button. There is a brief delay while the conversion takes place.

4. From the File menu, select Save to save the .OIF file, accepting the default values.

� To display the new layer:Select it from the Layer drop-down box. Note that expanded layers always show the nameyou assigned followed by [EXP].

Note: To see how the CDMA Analysis Wizard is used in an actual analysis, refer to Lesson 5.

Converting iDEN FilesUnlike CDMA or GSM data, iDEN data is not expanded in OPAS32. To display iDEN layersthat you have created in the Wizard, simply use the iDEN tab in Tools | File Converter Optionsto identify those iDEN layers that you want to display. Any layers that have been selected willautomatically display when you convert .SD5 or FTA files to .OIF format.



Producing Table OutputYou can print tables directly from OPAS32 for use in presentations, or you can output your datato other software, such as spreadsheet software or a word processing table. This section tells youhow to format and produce table output.

Copying Data for Use in Other Software� To copy table data to the Clipboard:

1. Select the data you want to copy using the techniques described in “The Parts of theTable Window” on page 42.

2. From the Edit menu, select Copy. Depending on the amount of data you are copying,there might be a slight delay as the data is copied to the Clipboard. When the copy iscomplete, the message, Done. appears in the lower left corner of the OPAS32 mainwindow.

The data is now available to be copied to another application.

� To paste Clipboard data into another application:1. Open a file in the application you want to copy to. This will most typically be

spreadsheet software, or word processing.

2. Move the cursor to the place where you want the data to appear, and use thesoftware’s Paste function to paste the data into the file. Most often, you can selectPaste from the Edit menu to perform this task.

3. The data will appear in whatever font you used for your OPAS32 data. You canchange the formatting using the software’s formatting options. If you pasted the datainto a word processing file, you might want to convert it to a table, specifying a tabdelimiter (the character that separates one cell’s data from the next).


13. Select several rows of data, and copy them to the Clipboard. Then paste the data intoa spreadsheet, noting the results. You may want to paste the data into a wordprocessing document and, if the option is available in your word processing software,convert the data to a table with tab delimited text to see the results there, as well.



Modifying the Format of Printed TablesOPAS32 offers a full set of formatting options that pertain to how your table will look on aprinted page. These are all available from the File Menu.

� To access print formatting options:1. From the File Menu, select Page Setup to display the Page Setup dialog box.

Figure 2-31. The Page Setup dialog box offers four tabs that allow you to controlhow your printed table will look.

2. Click on the tab that pertains to the settings that you want to change. Keep in mindthat these settings affect the printed page only; they do not affect the way a tabledisplays on your screen.

When all settings are complete, click the OK button to save your settings.

� To select fonts for headers and footers:1. If necessary, click the Font Tab to display the settings available for font selection

(shown in Figure 2-31.).

2. From the Object box, select the object (Header or Footer) to which you want toassign fonts.

3. From the Selected Font box, select the font, font style, and/or point size from thedisplayed lists. Note that a small font size smaller creates a somewhat smaller filesize. You might need small text to fit more horizontally on the page; however, fontsmuch smaller than 8 point might be hard to read, depending on the font you select.



Note: This procedure changes the font for the header and footer only. To change the font forthe actual table data and headings, refer to “Changing the Look of a Table” beginning on page51.

� To change page margins for printing:1. If necessary, click the Margins Tab to display the current margin settings.

Figure 2-32. Use the Margins tab to specify the margins for a printed page.

2. Use the Page Margins box to set the margins for the table. These settings areexpressed in inches from the edges of the page.

3. Use the Header/Footer Margins box to set the margins for the headers and footers.These settings are also expressed in inches from the edges of the page. If you acceptthe default settings of 1.00 inch for all fields, the header will print over the top line ofthe table. To print the header above the top line, you must reduce the measurement(for example, 0.50 inch).



� To change header and footer text:1. If necessary, click on the Header/Footer tab to display the settings for headers and

footers.

Figure 2-33. In this example, the printed header will show the file name followedby the device name in square brackets, a dash, and the current date in short form.Then, in parentheses, the words, 'Collection Date' will print, followed by the shortcollection date and the collection time.

2. Use the Edit/Select Header and Footer boxes to indicate the text you want printed inthe header and footer. Note that these are both drop-down boxes, allowing you toselect any header or footer text that was previously defined. Or, type new textspecifications by typing the text you want displayed and using the codes at thebottom of the window to insert those values at print time.



� To change the page layout:1. If necessary, click on the Layout tab to display the settings for page layout.

Figure 2-34. You can change how titles and gridlines are displayed, how the tableis centered on the page, and how the order of printed pages will be determinedwith the Layout tab.

2. Click the check boxes in the Titles and Gridlines box and the Center on Page box toselect or de-select the options you want. Then use the Page Order box to selectwhether columns or rows should determine the print page order.



3. Click the Help button for descriptions of the listed options.

Figure 2-35. When you click on the Help button for any dialog box, you can instantly see general help,which often supplies all the information you need. You can also click on the View the Dialog Box heading ina general help topic to see a picture of the dialog box. You can click on any control in a picture to pop up adescription.

4. To quickly exit both Help windows at once, select Close from the File menu of thefirst window displayed (shown at the left of Figure 2-35.).

Previewing the Printout Print Preview Button

Once you have finished setting up how your printout should look, you can preview how it willprint.



� To preview the printout:1. From the File menu, select Print Preview (or click the Print Preview button) to

display the Print Preview window.

Figure 2-36. The Print Preview window lets you see how the table will look when youprint it. You can even see which data falls on each page in case you want to do aselective page print.

2. When you have clicked the Zoom In button to change the cursor to a magnifyingglass, you can click anywhere in the table to zoom in. When the cursor is an arrow,click the table to zoom back to the original view. Or, use the buttons to view the nextor previous page or to display one or two pages in the window.

3. If you want to print, click the Print button. To close the window without printing,click the Close button.

Printing the TableYou can print all or a portion of a table.

� To print a table:1. (Optional) Use the selection methods described in "The Parts of the Table Window"

on page 42 to select a portion of a table (one or more rows, columns, or cells) thatyou want to print.

2. From the File menu, select Print to display the Print dialog box.

3. Enter the printer specifications, the print range, and the number of copies. If youselected data, be sure to click the Selection radio button to print just the selectedrows.

4. When done, click the OK button to start printing.



Other Table View OptionsThis section provides an overview of other OPAS32 options that are available for the TableView and identifies where to go for more information.

API Commands Used with TablesOPAS32 offers a complete set of Advanced Programming Interface (API) commands usedspecifically to manipulate tables and table data. The table-related API objects are as follows:

API Object Used ForCDMATableView Object Table activities that are specific to CDMA data.

Column Object Table column activities.

TableView Object Table activities regardless of technology

ScanTableView Object Table activities that are specific to Scanner data.

TableViewPageSetup Object Setup activities for the printed table page, as set inthe Page Setup option from the File menu.

TableViewSetup Object Table setup activities, as set in the Table tab ofOptions from the Tools menu.

In addition to these table-specific APIs, commands that can be used for Tables and other viewsare provided in other object types, such as commands related to the OPAS32 object, the PageSetup Object, the TestRun object, and the View object.

You will learn more about these commands and how to write scripts in Lesson 6,“Automating Common Tasks with Scripts.”

The AXF Format FileWithin the cellular engineering community various measurement, analysis and prediction toolsare available to design and optimize cellular radio networks. Traditionally, when data needed tobe shared among the various tools, special translators were created to transport data from onetool to another. This method of transporting data was inefficient and hard to maintain. Auniversal exchange file format would enable users to easily exchange data among the varioustools.

SAFCO Technologies has addressed this need by developing a universal exchange file formatcalled ASCII Exchange Format (AXF), which provides the means to exchange cellsite,measurement, and predictive information among the various measurement, analysis andprediction tools. The format for measurement data is self-defining, flexible and expandable.The format for cellsite information is pre-defined, but expandable. The format for exchangingprediction information is to be determined

Binary and ASCII exchange file formats are defined. Systems utilizing the exchange format canchoose to provide support for the Binary format, the ASCII format, or both formats.



Note: SAFCO Technologies, Inc. grants a royalty-free license to anyone who wants to use thisformat.

? The OPAS32 online help provides a detailed description of the ASCIIExchange format.

� To access AXF help from within OPAS32:1. From the Help menu, select Index to display the OPAS32 Help

dialog box.

2. Click the Contents tab to display a list of all Help items available inOPAS32.

3. Double-click on the ASCII Exchange Format book to display theAXF subtopics.

4. Double-click on any subtopic to display the Help text.


Lesson 3 ▪ Using Graph Data

What You Will Learn in this LessonSetting Up for This Lesson

Before you begin reading this lesson, you should set up so you can followalong at your computer and so you can perform the Quick Quizzesthroughout the lesson. This section tells you how to set up for this lesson.

Displaying a GraphTo display a graph, you use the Graph Wizard. This section describes howthe Graph Wizard works.

The Parts of the Graph WindowThe Graph View window is made up of several panes. This section explainshow the panes and the other window objects operate.

Customizing the Graph View DisplayThe options you choose when you use the Graph Wizard are not final. Youcan do many things to customize how the graphs look and the data theycontain. This section shows you how.

Using the Info Tool to View Graph DataWithin a graph, the Info tool allows you to see specific data values. Thissection explains how to use the features of the Info tool within a map.

Creating a Distribution Chart (Histogram)In addition to standard graphs, OPAS32 provides a feature that produces ahistogram layer and then creates a distribution chart in Microsoft® Excel™.This section explains how to use the Histogram feature.

Producing Graph OutputOPAS32 offers the same output options for graphs as it does for tables. Thissection explains how to use them.

Other Graph View OptionsThis section provides an overview of other OPAS32 options that areavailable for the Graph View and identifies where to go for more information.



Setting Up for This LessonBefore you begin reading this lesson, you should set up so you can follow along at yourcomputer and so you can perform the Quick Quizzes throughout the lesson. This sectiontells you how to set up for this lesson.


Important: You must have a training ID registered, and you must have performed thesetup and Quick Quizzes for Lesson 2 before you set up for this lesson. Double-clickon the Teach Yourself OPAS32 icon, and refer to the Setting up for Training sectionin the "Before You Begin" section at the front of this guide for detailed instructions onhow to register a training ID and perform lesson setup.

1. Once the Lesson Setup dialog box is displayed, click the Lesson 3 button. Thiscopies all files you will need for this lesson to your training folder, startsOPAS32, and activates the correct table. It also runs a script that automaticallyhides columns that are not needed for this lesson.

2. After you have performed the Quick Quizzes in this lesson, exit OPAS32 byselecting Exit from the File Menu. This returns you to the Setup for Lessondialog box so you can set up for another lesson, if necessary.

3. To exit the training system, click the Exit button in the Setup for Lesson dialogbox.

Remember: Once you have installed the Training program and registered an ID, you canview help about the Training Program at any time by Selecting TYO help from the Helpmenu in the Setup for Lessons dialog box.

Displaying a Graph New Graph Button

To display a graph, you use the Graph Wizard. This section describes how the GraphWizard works.

� To display a graph:1. (Optional) Before starting the Graph Wizard, you have the option of selecting

one or more columns from the active Table. Each column you select will then begraphed, provided you select columns that contain graphable data. Regardless ofwhether or not you select columns at this time, the Graph Wizard offers theopportunity to select columns or change the current selection.



2. From the Operations menu, select New Graph, or click the New Graph buttonfrom the OPAS32 toolbar to display the Graph Wizard Step 1 of 2 dialog box.

Figure 3-1. Step 1 of the Graph Wizard lets you select any graphable column forthe X Axis and assign a graph style. Once you select a column for the X-Axis, itcannot be changed for the current graph.

3. Select from any of the common columns (sequence number, position, or time), orselect any other mappable column from the current layer to plot as the X axis.

Graphs created using common columns are displayed with a connecting linebetween the points by default. Graphs created using non-common columns arescatter charts (without connecting lines) by default. To add or removeconnecting lines, right-click on the graph and select Series Property… from thepopup menu. From this dialog, you can change the line style and the color of thegraph data.

You can also choose between a stacked or overlaid graph (defined in "Stackingor Overlaying Graphs" on page 104). You will be able to switch between astacked or overlaid graph once the graph is displayed without re-running theWizard.



4. When the dialog box is complete, click the Next button to display the GraphWizard Step 2 of 2 Dialog box.

Figure 3-2. Step 2 uses a tree structure to allow you to select the data to be graphed. Whenyou select a common column for the X-Axis, you can select data from any layer. If you selectnon-common column X-Axis data, only the layer you selected from is displayed in this step.You can click the plus sign (+) and minus sign (-) boxes to expand and collapse branches asrequired, and you can remove the X in the column boxes to select data for the graph. Noticethat, although the SAT columns were hidden in the table view, this has no effect on the graphview. In this illustration, we selected the Channel columns, but we left the SAT columnsunselected.

5. If you selected one or more columns in step 1 of these procedures, these columnswill already be selected in the dialog box. Regardless of whether or not you havealready selected columns for the Y axis, you can click in the box next to eachcolumn to select (no X next to the item) or deselect (an X appears next to theitem) the data to be displayed in the Y axis of the line graph.

6. When you are done selecting columns, click the Finish button to draw the graph.

Instructions: Use the file TrainAmps1.oif, and the Scanner #8 table (Signal Strengthlayer) to perform the tasks below. To check your answers, refer to Appendix A, “Answersto Quick Quizzes.”

1. Select column Ch334, and start the Graph Wizard.

2. In step 1 of the Wizard, select the overlaid form of graph. You can leave the Seq Noselection as-is.

3. In step 2 of the Wizard, select the columns Ch335 and Ch336 (Ch334 should alreadyshow as selected).

4. Complete the Wizard so the graph displays on your screen.



The Parts of the Graph WindowThe Graph View window is made up of several panes. This section explains how the panesand the other window objects operate.

Graph DataPane

Graph Legend Pane

Scaler

Y AxisLine

X Axis Line

OPAS32Tool Bar

GraphTools

Figure 3-3. The Graph View is actually three panes: The Graph Data pane, the Graph Legend pane, and the Scalerpane. A series of special graph tool buttons provides easy-access functionality in the Graph View.



The following table provides a brief overview of how the parts of the Graph View windoware used.

Item FunctionOPAS32 Toolbar The standard toolbar that is displayed in all OPAS32 views.

Graph Data Pane Displays either stacked or overlaid views of the data selectedin step 2 of the Graph Wizard. You can change the width ofthis pane by clicking and dragging the right edge. This actionsimultaneously changes the width of the Graph Legend pane.

X Axis Line Displays the X Axis data (Seq No, Pos No, or Time) selectedin step 1 of the Graph Wizard.

Y Axis Line Displays the Y Axis data selected in step 2 of the GraphWizard.

Graph Legend Pane Identifies the data represented in the graphs based onfilename, layer, and column. The squares identify the colorused for each column. You can change the width of this paneby clicking and dragging the left edge. This actionsimultaneously changes the width of the Graph Data pane.

Scaler Allows you to change the range of X Axis data displayed onthe graph.

Graph Tools These buttons allow you to perform special operations tocustomize the display.

You will learn how to use these features as you progress through this lesson.

Customizing the Graph View DisplayThe options you choose when you use the Graph Wizard are not final. You can do manythings to customize how the graphs look and the data they contain. This section shows youhow.



Changing the Axis and Legend FontsYou can change the font typeface, style, size, and script for the legend and for the X and Yaxes.

� To change the fonts:1. From the Tools menu, select Options to display the Options dialog box.

2. Click the Graph tab to display the Graph Options dialog box.

Figure 3-4. The Graph Options tab lets you set the font used for the legend and axislabels in the graph.

3. Click either Legend or Axis to select the item whose font you want to change.

4. Click the Change Font button to display the Font dialog box, from which you canchange the font for the selected item.



Stacking or Overlaying GraphsYou can easily switch between stacked or overlaid graphs in the Graph Data pane byclicking the appropriate graph tool, as follows:

Tool ActionClick the Stack tool to display the selected data columns as separate graphs in avertical column in the Graph Data pane. Stacked graphs were illustrated in Figure3-3. This graph view is helpful when the data for some or all columns is within anarrow range that can be hard to view in one graph.

Click the Overlay tool to display a single graph showing data from all selecteddata columns. Overlaid graphs are shown in Figure 3-5. This graph viewhighlights where data from one column diverges from the pattern of othercolumns.

Figure 3-5. The overlaid graph view lets you quickly see similarities and differences between datacolumn values. Like the stacked view legend, the overlaid view legend identifies each column ofdata using a different color.



Adding or Deleting Column Data

Add or Delete Columns Graph ToolAs mentioned earlier, you can change the column data that you selected when you createdthe graph with the Graph Wizard.

� To add or delete column data:1. Click the Add / Delete Columns Graph tool to display the Select/Deselect Y

Columns dialog box.

Figure 3-6. Just like when you initially display a graph, the X represents acolumn that is not selected.

2. Select or de-select columns using the same methods used for Step 2 of the GraphWizard (refer to "Displaying a Graph," beginning on page 98 for completeinstructions).

3. Click the OK button to complete the selection.

Instructions: Continue using TrainAmps1.oif and Scanner #8 (Signal Strength layer) toperform the following tasks. To check your answers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers toQuick Quizzes.”

5. Switch the displayed graph to a stacked view.

6. Remove column Ch334 from the display so you can better view the differencesbetween Ch335 and Ch336.



Adding Columns from the Table ViewYou can drag one or more graphable columns directly from the Table View into the GraphView.

Figure 3-7. We reduced the Table and Graph View windows so we could see all the columns we wanted to map inthe table view while providing a little of the graph to provide a target for the columns on the graph. We selectedmultiple columns to add to the graph, including one ungraphable column (Longitude).

Drag and Drop Pointer

Null Pointer� To drag and drop table columns to a Graph:

1. In the Table View, use standard Windows selection methods (click on thecolumn title, CTRL+Click to select another non-contiguous column, orSHIFT+Click to select a range of columns) to select one or more graphablecolumns.



2. Holding down the left mouse button, drag across to the main body of the graph.When the mouse arrow passes over to the Graph View, it changes to the Dragand Drop pointer. If you have selected only non-graphable columns (such astime, latitude, or longitude), the mouse arrow changes to a Null pointer toindicate that no columns will be added to the graph. If you select a combinationof graphable and non-graphable columns, a message box informs you of thosecolumns that will not be added to the graph.

3. Release the left mouse button. The columns now appear in the Graph View.

Zooming In or Out

Zoom In and Zoom Out ToolsYou can view a smaller segment of the data in a larger size (zoom in), or a larger segment ofthe data in a smaller size (zoom out). Zooming in is particularly helpful when similardatapoint values make the lines in overlaid view difficult to distinguish. Zooming out canoften be helpful because it lets you see all or a large part of the test run, making it easier toidentify trends or anomalies in the data.

� To zoom in:1. Click on the Zoom In tool.

2. Next, click and hold the left mouse button at the left-most or right-most startingpoint of the data you want to zoom in on.

3. Drag to the right or left to identify the portion of data you want to see.

4. Release the mouse button.

Figure 3-8. shows the result of zooming in on a segment of the data.

Figure 3-8. A zoomed-in view of data. Notice how much moredistinguishable the individual data lines are when only a portionof the data is in view.



� To zoom out1. Click the Zoom Out tool.

2. Click at a point in the data to zoom out.

Highlighting Segments of the Displayed Graphs

Highlight ToolYou can use the Highlight tool to select and highlight datapoints on a graph. When youhighlight data in a graph, the data is automatically highlighted in the Table and Map views.

� To highlight a segment of a graph:1. Click the Highlight tool.

2. At the point in the graph that you want highlighting to begin, click and hold theleft mouse button. The starting point can be the left-most or right-most point thatyou want to highlight.

3. Drag the arrow to the point in the graph where you want highlighting to end. Asyou drag, the highlight area temporarily displays in reverse highlight.

4. Release the mouse button. The highlighted area now displays with plus signs (+)over the highlighted data points.

Figure 3-9. In this zoom view of the graph, the points from sequencenumber 18 through 329 were highlighted. Notice that both graphs arehighlighted.

� To remove highlighting:1. Right-click anywhere on a displayed graph to display a popup menu.

2. Select Clear Highlights to remove the plus signs from the display. Highlights arealso removed from the Table View and Map View data.



Viewing Information About Specific Points

Information ToolThe Information tool shows a window containing information about specific points in thegraph.

� To view information:1. Click the Information tool button to display a popup window showing details

about the starting data point.

Figure 3-10. The Information popup window is best viewed on a stacked graph, particularly whenyou have graphed data from different devices and/or layers, as shown here, where Portable #1 isthe device used for the first graph, while Scanners #6 and 8 are the devices for the second andthird graphs, respectively. The current Information window shows data from the Portable #1device, RSS layer. If you were to click a point in the second graph, the Information window's titlebar would change to "Signal Strength", and the data would change to reflect the layer shown inthe second graph. Note that the information shown in the Information window is marked on thegraph by a small circle so you can pinpoint exactly the information that is shown.

2. You can change the information displayed by clicking on another point in thegraph. Or, click and hold the left mouse button in the graph, and then draghorizontally to change the information in the Information box.

3. To remove the popup window, click the X box in the upper right corner of thepopup window.



Instructions: Continuing with file TrainAmps1.oif, and using the graph as you left it inQuick Quiz question 6, perform the tasks below. To check your answers, refer toAppendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes.”

7. Display information for Position 18 of the two columns (Ch335 and Ch336). What isthe signal strength for each column at this position?

Ch335 _________ Ch336 _________

Changing the Y Axis RangeOPAS32 automatically sets the Y Axis range based on the lowest and highest valuescontained in the data. You occasionally might want to change this range to move the datawithin the graph. This might be helpful when you want to output the graph to other softwareand then add text or graphics above or below the data. Or, more important, changing the Yaxis range can provide a fairer comparison of data from different types of columns (forexample, the TxPwr and RxPwr columns from CDMA data).

� To change the Y Axis range:1. Right-click on the Y Axis line or range numbers to display a popup menu.

2. Select Range from the popup menu to display the Change Axis Display Rangedialog box.

Figure 3-11. You can include the values of all graph ranges to make iteasier to compare different types of data.



3. Change the From and To values, and then click the OK button to change thedisplayed range.

Figure 3-12. In this CDMA example, the top graph (TxPwr) started with a range of -40 to 30.The bottom graph (RxPwr) started with a range of -110 to -80. By changing the range ofboth graphs to include both ranges (-110 to 30), it is easier to compare the two values.

Customizing the X Axis with ScalerYou can use the scaler to change the range of data that is displayed. The scaler is the slidingscale that is displayed beneath the graph window.

Figure 3-13. The scaler allows you to easily change the range of data that is displayed. It also lets you panhorizontally through the X Axis data while maintaining your choice of interval between the first and last values.

� To view a portion of the graph:1. Click and hold the left mouse button on either of the the elevator buttons.

2. Drag the button toward the center of the graph. As the elevator buttons move,the X Axis numbers change to reflect the data that is displayed.

� To pan slowly through the X Axis data:1. Click and hold the left mouse button on either of the arrow buttons to slowly

move the view of the X Axis horizontally.

2. When done, release the left mouse button.



� To view a set interval of data in the graph:1. Use the "To view a portion of the graph" instructions above to establish an X

Axis range interval to display. For example, drag the elevator buttons to displayfrom sequence number 18 to 318, which is an interval of 300.

2. Drag the area between the elevator buttons to the right or left to move the datadisplay. As you move through the data, it will retain the set interval. Forexample, if you move the data so that 200 is the low value displayed, the highvalue will be 500, still an interval of 300.

� To page left or right at a set interval:1. Use the "To view a portion of the graph" instructions above to establish an X

Axis range interval to display. For example, drag the elevator buttons to displayfrom sequence number 225 to 275, which is an interval of 50.

2. Click in the area between the left arrow button and left-most elevator button pageleft, or click in the area between the right arrow button and the right-mostelevator button to page right. As you move through the data, it will retain the setinterval. For example, if you have set up an interval of 50, and 225 – 275 iscurrently displayed, clicking the area to the left will change the display to show175 - 225.

Click here to page left. Click here to page right.

Figure 3-14. When viewing a portion of the graph, you can use the spaces between the left or rightarrow buttons and elevator buttons to page through the data.

Instructions: Continuing with file TrainAmps1.oif, and using the graph as you left it inQuick Quiz question 7, perform the tasks below. To check your answers, refer toAppendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes.”

Note: Use the sequence numbers below as guidelines. It is not necessary to display theexact sequence numbers stated below.

8. Change the graph to display only sequence numbers 18 through 2045.

9. Now display only sequence numbers 2534 through 4561.

Changing the Axis Ticks PropertyYou can change the interval, position, and length of tick marks for both the X and Y axes.



� To change the axis ticks property:1. Right-click on the X or Y Axis line or range numbers to display a popup menu.

2. Select Ticks to display the Change Tick Property dialog box.

Figure 3-15. This illustration shows the dialog box for the X axis. For theY axis, the Position ratio buttons are for Left, Middle, and Right settings.

3. Use this dialog box to set the interval between tick marks, the length of the tickmarks, and the position where the tick marks are displayed. Click the Helpbutton for details on completing the information in this dialog box.

Drawing Grid LinesYou can add horizontal gridlines to a graph to help identify the value of the data points moreprecisely.

� To draw grid lines:1. Right-click to the left of the Y Axis line to display a popup menu.

2. Select Grid Line to display the Draw Horizontal Grid Lines dialog box.

Figure 3-16. You can easily turn horizontal grid lines on or off.

3. Select Draw Grid Line to display grid lines.



4. Click the OK button to display the lines.

Figure 3-17. The grid lines make it easier to more preciselyidentify data values.

Note: You can also create grid lines from the Graph Properties dialog box. From the Editmenu, select Graph Properties, and then click the Graph tab.

Drawing Threshold LinesYou can add a threshold line for any value.

� To draw a threshold line:1. Right-click to the left of the Y Axis line to display a popup menu.

2. From the popup menu, select Threshold Line to display the Draw Threshold Linedialog box.

Figure 3-18. You can add a threshold line, specifying any thresholdvalue you choose.



3. Enter the threshold value, and click the Draw Threshold Line radio button.

4. Click the OK button to display the threshold line.

Figure 3-19. The threshold line appears at the position you selected as a dotted line.

Note: You can also create a threshold line from the Graph Properties dialog box.From the Edit menu, select Graph Properties, and then click the Graph tab.

Instructions: Continuing with file TrainAmps1.oif, and using the graph as you left it inQuick Quiz question 9, perform the tasks below. To check your answers, refer toAppendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes.”10. Use the Edit menu to add a threshold line of –90 to the graph.



Changing Series PropertiesYou can change the line type, width, and color used to display any series in the graph.

� To change series properties:1. Right-click in the body of the graph to display a popup menu.

2. Select Series Property to display the Series Property dialog box.

Figure 3-20. You can alter the appearance of each series line by using theChange Series Property option.

3. Complete the fields to change the displayed settings. You can also click theColor button to change the line color used. Click the Help button for details oncompleting the information in this dialog box.

Note: You can also change the series property from the Graph Properties dialogbox. From the Edit menu, select Graph Properties, and then click the Series tab.

Using the Info Tool to View Graph DataWithin a graph, the Info tool allows you to see specific data values. This section explainshow to use the features of the Info tool within a map.

Information Tool Button� To display information:

1. Click the Information tool button.



2. Point to a data point on the map, then click the left mouse button.

The Record Information window is displayed.

Figure 3-21. The Record Information window displays column data for aselected point in a graph. You can change which columns are displayed byusing the Add or Delete Columns button.

This window displays all of the record data for the selected data point. TheRecord Information window also provides a Playback feature, which moves anarrow through the map data in row order. As the arrow traces the map data, theRecord Information window changes to reflect the information for each point onthe map.



Add or Delete Columns Button3. Click the Add or Delete Columns button to display the Select Columns dialog

box.

Figure 3-22. By default, all columns are selectedfor display. To remove a column, simply click thecheck box to remove the check mark.

In this dialog box, you can add or remove columns to be displayed in the InfoTool, or select all columns by clicking the Select All Columns check box.

4. Point to another data point to see its information in the Record Informationtoolbox.

The Record Information Toolbox remains open on the window after a record isselected. You can close the toolbox or drag it off to the side while you do othergraph operations. To see information on another record, just select theInformation button and point at the desired data point.



Creating a Distribution Chart (Histogram)In addition to standard graphs, OPAS32 provides a feature that produces a histogram layerand then creates a distribution chart in Microsoft® Excel™. This section explains how touse the Histogram feature.

Using the Histogram Wizard

Histogram Button� To create a histogram:

1. From the table view, select a column to be used to produce the histogram layer.

2. Click the Histogram button to display the Histogram Parameters dialog box.

Figure 3-23. The Histogram Parameters dialog box lets you identify specificinformation about how you want the histogram to be produced.

3. Complete this dialog box to specify how you want the histogram produced. Youcan click the Help button for details on the available options.



4. Click the OK button to create a histogram layer and a graphical representation ofthis data in Microsoft Excel.

Figure 3-24. First, OPAS32 creates a histogram layer, based on your selections. Then it opensMicrosoft Excel to produce a distribution chart. It also places the source data for the chart in aseparate tab of the spreadsheet for easy reference. Note that the created histogram layer is temporyfor the current chart only. This layer cannot be saved, merged, or used to create another histogramlayer.

How the Histogram is ProducedOnce the Histogram layer is created, OPAS32 automatically invokes an API script to takethe distribution data (percentile or cumulative percentile) from the layer data, copy the datato the Windows Clipboard, open Microsoft Excel and then use a Microsoft Excel script tocreate a 3-dimensional bar chart of the distribution of data for the selected numeric column.

The Excel script that draws the histogram is provided in the file, STIHist.XLS. If you arefamiliar with writing scripts in Microsoft Excel, you can modify this script to furthercustomize your histograms.

Producing Graph OutputOPAS32 offers the same output options for graphs as it does for tables. This sectionexplains how to use them.



Copying Data for Use in Other SoftwareYou can copy your graph to the Windows Clipboard for use in other software.

� To copy and paste a graph:1. With the graph formatted as you want it to appear in the other software, select

Copy from the Edit menu.

2. Open the other software (for example, spreadsheet, graphic, or word processing),and open or create the file you want to paste to.

3. From the software's Edit menu, select Paste.

PrintingOPAS32 offers a variety of print and page setup options.

Modifying the Format of Printed Graphs (Page Setup)� To modify the printed graph format:

1. From the File menu, select Page Setup to display the Page Setup dialog box.

Figure 3-25. The Page Setup dialog box offers many options forchanging how the graph will appear when printed.



2. Establish the print settings by using the tabs as follows:

Tab What it ControlsFont Allows you to make font selections for the header and

footer.

Margins Allows you to set margins for the body of the page andfor the headers and footers.

Legend Allows you to specify which pages legends should printon.

Header/Footer Allows you to use special codes to print variableinformation in the header and footer at print time.

3. Click the OK button.

Instructions: Continuing with file TrainAmps1.oif, and using the graph as you left it inQuick Quiz question 10, perform the tasks below. To check your answers, refer toAppendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes”

11. Display Page Setup for the current graph. Based on the information displayed in thedialog box, what will print in the header?

__________________________________________

12. To the current header, add a dash, followed by the long form of the collection date.

Previewing the Graph Before Printing

Print Preview ButtonOnce you have finished setting up how your printout should look, you can preview how itwill look.



� To preview the printout:1. From the File menu, select Print Preview (or click the Print Preview button) to

display the Print Preview window.

Figure 3-26. The Print Preview window lets you see how the graph will lookwhen you print it. You can even see which data falls on each page in caseyou want to do a selective page print.

2. When you have clicked the Zoom In button to change the cursor to a magnifyingglass, you can click anywhere in the graph to zoom in. When the cursor is anarrow, click the graph to zoom back to the original view. Or, use the buttons toview the next or previous page or to display one or two pages in the window.

3. If you want to print, click the Print button. To close the window withoutprinting, click the Close button.

Printing the GraphYou can print all or a portion of a graph.

� To print a graph:1. From the File menu, select Print to display the Print dialog box.

2. Enter the printer specifications, the print range, and the number of copies.

3. When done, click the OK button to start printing.



Note: If you have changed the graph title (from the Edit Menu, select Title) and want thattitle to print with the graph, you must change the Header/Footer codes to include the revisedmap title.

Other Graph View OptionsThis section provides an overview of other OPAS32 options that are available for the GraphView and identifies where to go for more information.

API Commands Used with GraphsOPAS32 offers a complete set of Advanced Programming Interface (API) commands usedspecifically to manipulate graphs and graph data. The graph-related API objects are asfollows:

API Object Used ForGraph Object Graph activities that specify the details normally

entered in the Graph Wizard.

GraphView Object Graph activities that control how the graph appearson the screen.

GraphViewPageSetup Object Setup activities for the printed graph page, as set inthe Page Setup option from the File menu.

GraphViewSetup Object Graph setup activities, as set in the Graph tab ofOptions from the Tools menu.

In addition to these table-specific APIs, commands that can be used for Graphs and otherviews are provided in other object types, such as commands related to the OPAS32 object,the TestRun object, and the View object.



Lesson 4 ▪ Using Map Data


Setting Up for This LessonBefore you begin reading this lesson, you should set up so you can follow along atyour computer and so you can perform the Quick Quizzes throughout the lesson.This section tells you how to set up for this lesson.

Displaying a MapThis section describes how to map data in the active table view.

About Data Tracks and Map SheetsBefore examining the parts of the map window and the things you can do tocustomize the display, it is helpful to know two new terms. This section defines datatracks and map sheets and explains the concepts associated with them.

The Parts of the Map WindowThe Map View window is made up of several panes. This section provides anoverview of how the panes and the other window objects operate.

Importing and Displaying Cell Site DatabasesCell Site Editor stores and edits vital cellsite information. It imports existing cellsitedatabases, creates new cell site databases and acts as a data management tool.This section explains how to display the cell sites from an existing cell site databasein maps.

Using the Map ToolsThis section explains what the map tool buttons do and how to use them.

Adding and Modifying Data TracksThis section explains two methods for adding one or more data tracks and how tocustomize their display on the map through their data sheets.

Modifying the Legend DisplayThis section explains how you can change the display of the Symbol Scheme andColor Scheme legends in a map.

Drawing a Terrain Profile (New Feature)Setting Map View Defaults

This section explains how to set up maps in OPAS32 so that your displaypreferences are used when you create maps. You always have the option ofchanging the default settings for the current session after you have created a map.

Displaying Street MapsOnce you have added one or more maps to the Street Map Index, you can display orhide street maps in the Map View. This section identifies some of the map typessupported by OPAS32 and describes how to display them.



Creating or Changing Symbol SchemesLike color schemes, event symbols add another dimension to your map informationby making it easy to identify important data based on symbols or characters. In theprevious section, you learned how to change the graphic symbols that representcertain events in the displayed test run information. In this section, you will learn howto create or change both character-based or icon (graphical) symbol schemes fordifferent data layers.

Mapping an Exception LayerThe Result column of an exception layer is mappable after creating a map for any thedevices that produced the exception. As mentioned in "Creating an Exception LayerSymbol Scheme"in Lesson 2, you can apply a symbol scheme created specifically foreach exception layer. This section explains how to map an exception layer.

Using the Info Tool to Play a Map RouteWithin a map, the Info tool allows you to play the map route as if you were using anaudio or video tape player. This section explains how to use the features of the Infotool within a map.

Inserting BitmapsIn addition to the street maps supported in OPAS32, you can also underlay anybitmap (.BMP) file on a map. This feature is helpful any time you want to use acustom illustration. It is often used to provide blueprint images when a test run isperformed in a building. This section explains how to place a bitmap on your map.

Viewing Data from Multiple Test Run FilesThe Advanced File Retrieval System (AFRS) lets you merge or open from multipletest runs based on geodetic extents, time extents, and/or channel ranges. Thissection identifies typical uses of AFRS, describes how to set up for its use, andexplains how to use it.

Using Map Popup MenusOPAS32 offers a variety of popup menus that provide convenient access to many ofthe activities that you have already learned about. You can access these popupmenus by pointing to a specific area of the window and clicking the right mousebutton ("right-clicking"). This section identifies the popup menus that are availablefrom the Map view.

Producing Map OutputOPAS32 offers the same output options for maps as it does for tables and graphs.This section explains how to use them.

Other Map View OptionsThis section provides an overview of other OPAS32 options that are available for theMap View and identifies where to go for more information.



Setting Up for This LessonBefore you begin reading this lesson, you should set up so you can follow along at yourcomputer and so you can perform the Quick Quizzes throughout the lesson. This sectiontells you how to set up for this lesson.


1. If you have not already registered a new training ID, you should do so now, andperform all Quick Quizzes from lessons 2 and 3. Double-click the TeachYourself OPAS32 icon, and refer to the Setting up for Training section in the"Before You Begin" lesson for detailed instructions on how to register a newtraining ID.

2. Once the Lesson Setup dialog box is displayed, click the Lesson 4 button. Thiscopies all files you will need for this lesson to your training folder, startsOPAS32, loads the correct .OIF file and activates the correct table. It also runs ascript that automatically hides columns that are not necessary for this lesson.

3. After you have performed the Quick Quizzes in this lesson, exit OPAS32 byselecting Exit from the File Menu. This returns you to the Lesson Setup dialogbox so you can set up for another lesson, if necessary.

4. To exit the training system, click the Exit button in the Lesson Setup dialog box.

Remember: Detailed information about how lesson setup works, including illustrations ofall the dialog boxes you see during lesson setup, are provided in the Setting Up for Trainingsection of the "Before You Begin" lesson.

Displaying a Map

New Map ButtonThis section describes how to map data in the active table view.

� To display a map:1. Make sure the table view that you want to map is active by clicking on it.

2. To map a specific column in the table, select that column first. (As you will learnin "Adding and Modifying Data Tracks" on page 140, you can change thecolumn displayed or display additional columns after displaying the new map.)

3. From the Operations menu, select New Map, or click the New Map button fromthe OPAS32 toolbar to display the map view illustrated in the next section.



About Data Tracks and Map SheetsBefore examining the parts of the map window and the things you can do to customize thedisplay, it is helpful to know two new terms. This section defines data tracks and mapsheets and explains the concepts associated with them.

Data Track, DefinedA data track is any mappable data column. When we say a column is mappable, we meanthat it contains any data except time, ordering, and positioning columns (position, sequencenumber, latitude, longitude, and time).

The test run route that displays on a map is a data track.

Map Sheets, DefinedA map sheet contains a data track and the properties that you define to display it, such as thesymbols and colors that represent those points on a map. Multiple map sheets can beoverlaid to create instant customized map displays.

Displaying Multiple Map SheetsIn OPAS32, you can display more than one test run on a map simultaneously. As you willlearn in this lesson, you do this by defining more than one map sheet, each with its own setof properties that govern how it appears on a map.



The Parts of the Map WindowThe Map View window is made up of several panes. This section provides an overview ofhow the panes and the other window objects operate.

Map Pane

MapTools

DrawingTools

MapOverviewPane

OverlayManager Pane (Map Sheets Tab)

Layer ToolButtons

Data Tracks

(Legends &Colors Tab)

UnderlayToolButtons

Figure 4-1. The Map View is actually multiple panes: The Map pane, the Map Overview pane, and theOverlay Manager, which has two tabs – one for viewing and defining map sheets and one for viewing theactive symbol and color schemes. A series of special map tool buttons provides easy-access functionality inthe Map View, and the drawing tools let you add a variety of your own annotations to the map. Each mapsheet defined on the Overlay Manager’s Map Sheets tab also has buttons for quick access to the mostcommonly-used functions.



The following table provides a brief overview of how the parts of the Map View window areused.

Item FunctionMap Pane The pane that displays the one or more map sheets,

which are collections of data points, including the symbolsand colors that represent those points on a map. You candisplay one or more map sheets in the Map Pane. Eachmap sheet displays in the same color scheme as itsrespective Table view. You can also customize symbolschemes for each map sheet to provide further visual cuesof the information. OPAS32 supports the display of avariety of street maps that can be underlayed to identifythe exact route or even show a satellite view of the testarea. You can also add your own graphics to illustrate keypoints about the data or the test area.

To help you keep track of which data is displayed whenmultiple data tracks are displayed, simply put the cursorarrow over a data track, and hold for a moment—a tool tipdisplays identifying the data track you are pointing to.

Data Track(s) The test run route that displays on a map is a data track.A map can display multiple data tracks.

Map Overview Pane This pane always displays the entire test area. If youhave zoomed in on a smaller area in the Map pane, theMap Overview pane highlights the zoom area to help youidentify the zoom view relative to the entire test run. Youcan also zoom to any part of the map from this pane.

Map Tools These buttons allow you to perform special operations toview data and customize the display, as described in“Using the Map Tools” on page 134.

Map Layer Tools These buttons provide various ways to customize thedisplay, such as displaying or hiding street maps ormarkers. The buttons displayed vary based on the dataand setup options you have selected.

Underlay Tools These buttons provide a way to display or hide map andbitmap underlays.



Item FunctionOverlay Manager The Overlay Manager has two tabs that let you view

information about the displayed map. The Map Sheet tabidentifies all Map Sheets that have been defined (althoughit is possible to hide a map sheet from the actual MapPane display, as you will learn later). You can also edit amap sheet's properties from this tab, change the order inwhich data tracks are stacked on the map, and turn a datatrack's display on or off by using the check boxes. TheLegends & Colors tab identifies symbols and colors thathave been defined for each map sheet and providesaccess for turning the legend display on or off for eachmap sheet.

!!Notice in the illustration that each line in the OverlayManager has various buttons. These buttons displaywhen applicable to provide quick access to commonly-used features.

You will learn how to use these features as you progress through this lesson.

Importing and Displaying Cell Site DatabasesCell Site Editor stores and edits vital cellsite information. It imports existing cellsitedatabases, creates new cell site databases and acts as a data management tool. This sectionexplains how to display the cell sites from an existing cell site database in maps.

Cellsite Name and Cellsite Symbol Buttons� To display cell sites in a map:

1. From the File menu, select Load Cell Site Database to display a submenu withtwo options.



2. Select the OPAS Format (cd2, mdb) option. This displays the Select CellsiteDatabase dialog box.

Figure 4-2. You can select cell site databases in .MDB or .CD2 format from the SelectCellsite Database dialog box.

3. Select the cell site database file that you want to display, and click the Openbutton to return to the prior window.

4. Click the Cell Site Name and/or the Cell Site Symbol button. These buttons actdifferently depending on the status of the map, as follows:● If data from a layer in only one device is displayed on the map, then clicking

the Cell Site buttons turns the display on (or off, if they’re already displayed)● If data from layers from more than one device is displayed and more than

one Cell Site database has been opened, then a Properties dialog box displaysto allow you to select which device’s cell site database should be displayed.

● Similarly, if more than one test run is open, and Cell Site databases havebeen opened for both test runs, then a Properties dialog box displays to allowyou to select both the test run and the device for which the cell site databaseshould be displayed.

When you display the cell site name, symbol, or both, the Cell Site layer is addedto the Overlay Manager list.

Note: You can set up OPAS32 to automatically display a loaded cell sitedatabase. From the Tools menu, select Options. Click the Cell Site Databasetab, and place a check mark in the Auto Display in Data Maps box.



Figure 4-3. When you open a cell site database, OPAS32 displays any cellsites that are within the geographical range of the map. In this illustration,the NILES cell site displays. Note that cell sites display regardless ofwhether or not you have included street maps in your display.

� To hide the Cell Site Name and/or Symbol display:Click the Cell Site Name and/or the Cell Site Symbol button. This action does notdelete the layer; it hides the selected item (name or symbol) from view. If you hideboth the name and the symbol, the eye in the Overlay Manager closes to indicate thatthe entire cell site layer is hidden. You can re-display either the name or the symbolby clicking on the appropriate button, or you can click on the eye in the OverlayManager to display the last item (name or symbol) that was displayed.



� To set display options for Cell Site Databases:1. Prior to loading a cell site database, select Tools | Options, and click the CellSite

Database tab to display the CellSite Database Options dialog box.

Figure 4-4. There are a number of options you can set from this tab. Refer tothe online help for a complete explanation of each option.

2. To change the color of the cell sites when they appear in maps, click the colorbutton next to the CellSite Color heading, and select a color from the displayedpallet. The color setting remains in effect for any cellsite database that you loadafter changing the color. You can change the color again; however, the old colorsetting will be in effect until you load a new cellsite database.

3. To automatically display channel numbers in a map, place a check mark in theDisplay Channels check box. This setting remains in effect unless you changethe setting and create a new map. Note, however, that you change whetherchannel information is displayed in the current map by double-clicking thecellsite layer in the Overlay Manager, clicking the Cell Site Layer Display tab,and clicking the Display Channels check box

Instructions: Use the TrainAmps1.oif (which was opened when you clicked the Lesson 4button in the Teach Yourself OPAS32 program) and TrainAmps1.mdb files to perform thefollowing steps. To check your answers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes.”1. Open the cellsite database TrainAmps1.mdb, stored in your training folder.2. Display a map of Scanner #8.3. Display cellsite symbols and names for the mapped area. Depending on the size of

your monitor, you may have to zoom out to see the cellsite symbols and names.



Using the Map ToolsThis section explains what the map tool buttons do and how to use them.

Linear Distance Click this button to measure the distance between twopoints.

Note: You can change the units of measure from the Toolsmenu by selecting Options and clicking the Units tab.

� To measure linear distance:1. Click the Linear Distance button.

2. Then, point to the first point.

3. Click and hold the left mouse button as you drag to thenext point. The total distance displays in the status barbeneath the map.

� To remove the distance line from the map:Click on the distance line on the map.

� To measure additional segments:Press and hold the CTRL key while dragging to add anew point.

Distance Click this button to measure the distance of the radiusbetween two points.

� To measure the radius between two points:1. Click the Distance button.

2. Then, point to the first point.

3. Click and hold the left mouse button as you drag towiden the circle.

The distance between the original point and the cursorposition displays on the status bar, along with the longitudeand latitude positions of the pointer. Measurements aredisplayed in your choice of feet, miles, meters, orkilometers, based on the options selected from the Toolsmenu under Options.

Grab When you click this button, the pointer changes to a hand.You can click and hold the left mouse button, and then dragto re-position the map as if the hand was holding it.



Zoom In When you click this button, the pointer changes to amagnifying glass with a plus-sign (+). You can point to anarea, and click and hold the left mouse button while youdrag a portion of the map to zoom to. Note that, when youselect a zoom area, you can see it highlighted in the MapOverview pane. This helps identify the portion of the entireroute you are currently viewing.

You can also zoom in by using the Plus (+) key on yourcomputer's numeric keypad. This zooms in by a factor of 4.

Zoom Out When you click this button, the pointer changes to amagnifying glass with a minus sign (-). You can point andclick on an area to zoom the map out, reversing a previouszoom in action. Or, drag a rectangle to place the content ofthe current view extents into the selected rectangle.

You can also zoom out by using the Minus (-) key on yourcomputer's numeric keypad. This zooms out by a factor of4.

Select Rectangle When you click this button, a rectangle is added to thepointer, indicating that you can define an area of the mapby outlining a rectangle shape. You have several optionsonce this tool has been selected:

� To make a selection:1. Point to the starting point of the area you want to select.

2. Then click and hold the left mouse button as you drag arectangular area. When you release the mouse button,the area of the route is highlighted.

� To make multiple selections:1. Select one area, as described above.

2. Then hold down the CTRL key as you repeat the stepsin the above paragraph. This retains your previousrectangle selection while selecting another.

� To move selected segments:1. Select one or more areas.

2. Then hold down the SHIFT key, point to a selectedarea, then click and hold the left mouse button to movethe selected area(s) to another position in the window.Note that all selected areas move simultaneously.



� To de-select areas:Click on an area of the map outside of the selection.

Note that you can use the Go to Relative Table optionfrom the right-click popup menu to view the data intable format. The resulting table also highlights thedata that was selected with the Select Rectanglebutton.

Select Circle When you click this button, a circle is added to the pointer,indicating that you can define an area of the map byoutlining a circle shape. This option operates identically tothe Select Rectangle tool described above.

Note that you can use the Go to Relative Table option fromthe right-click popup menu to view the data in table format.The resulting table also highlights the data that wasselected with the Select Circle button.

Retrieve Click this button and then select an area on the map tostart the Advanced File Retrieval System (AFRS) CriteriaWizard. This wizard lets you select test run file(s) based ongeodetic extents, time extents, and/or channel ranges.Once you enter your criteria, the AFRS Wizard identifies alltest runs that meet the search criteria. You can thendisplay the files, merge them into a single test run file, or,when TQNM data is present, merge TQNM call statisticsand export them into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. Referto “Viewing Data from Multiple Test Run Files” on page 189for details on using this option.

Info When you click this button, an information box displays onthe map. This box displays information about the datapoints on the map. The box offers a Playback feature,which moves through the data in row order. Refer to“Using the Info Tool to Play a Map Route” on page 183.

Using the Layer ToolsThe Layer Tools display a layer in the Overlay Manager and on the map. You have alreadylearned how to use the Add Data Track button. The other layer buttons work similarly, butwith a few differences:

● In most cases, a button does not display if the type of layer it works on does not exist.

● These buttons are intelligent, so they act differently depending on what is currentlydisplayed on the map and what is available for display. Sometimes they act as an on/offfunction to display or remove a layer from the map display. For example, if only onelayer for a displayed tool is displayed, and all other layers correspond to the samedevice, then the button acts as an on/off button; it displays the layer if it’s not currentlydisplayed when you click the button, and it removes it from the map if it was displayedwhen you clicked the button.



At other times, they act as an Add function, displaying a Properties dialog box similar tothat shown when you use the Add Data Track button. This allows you to select whichlayer you want to display on the map.

The exact rules are as follows:• If layers on the map correspond to different devices and more than one Markers layer

exists in open test runs, then a Properties dialog box similar to that shown when youuse the Add Data Track button is displayed. This allows you to select the appropriateMarkers layer to be displayed on the map. However, if only one Markers layer existsin all test runs, then that Markers layer is immediately created on the map.

• If layers on the map correspond to the same device, then the Markers layer for thatdevice is created on the map. Similarly, if only one Markers layer exists for all opentest runs, then that Markers layer is created on the map. However, if no Markerslayers exist for that device, and more than one Markers layer exists in open test runs,a Properties dialog box similar to that shown when you use the Add Data Trackbutton is displayed. This allows you to select a Markers layer.

• If all the layers on the map correspond to the same device or only one Markers layerexists in all open test runs, then once a Markers layer is displayed, the Markerscommand acts as an on or off button. Otherwise, it will act as an Add button.

● The buttons always display a Properties dialog box if you hold down the CTRL button onyour keyboard as you click the Markers button.

Add Data Track This button always displays the Layer Properties dialogbox, which allows you to define a new Data Track fordisplay on the map.

Show, Hide, orAdd ExceptionLayer

Allows you to map any exception layer that has beendefined for any open test run. If only one exception layerexists, this button toggles the display of the Exception layeron or off. If more than one Exception layer exists, thisbutton displays a Layer Properties dialog box so you canselect one for display on the map.

Show or Hide (orAdd) MarkerLayer

If only one Marker layer exists, this button toggles thedisplay of the Marker layer on or off. If more than oneMarker layer exists, this button displays a Layer Propertiesdialog box so you can select one for display on the map.

Show or Hide (orAdd) Cell SiteNames Layer

If only one Cell Site database is open, this button togglesthe display of the Cell Site layer names on or off. If morethan one database is open, it allows you to display a LayerProperties dialog box so you can select one for display onthe map.

Show or Hide (orAdd) Cell SiteSymbol Layer

If only one Cell Site database is open, this button togglesthe display of the Cell Site layer symbols on or off. If morethan one database is open, it allows you to display a LayerProperties dialog box so you can select one for display onthe map.



Show or Hide (orAdd) TQNMVoicePrint Layer

If only one TQNM VoicePrint layer is open, this buttontoggles the display of the TQNM VoicePrint layer on or off.If more than one TQNM VoicePrint layer is open, it allowsyou to display a Layer Properties dialog box so you canselect one for display on the map.

Show or Hide (orAdd) EventsLayer

If only one Events Layer is open, this button toggles thedisplay of the Events layer on or off. If more than oneEvents Layer is open, it allows you to display a LayerProperties dialog box so you can select one for display onthe map.

Show or Hide (orAdd) HandoffLayer

If only one Handoff layer is open, this button toggles thedisplay of the Handoff layer on or off. If more than oneHandoff layer is open, it allows you to display a LayerProperties dialog box so you can select one for display onthe map.

Show or Hide (orAdd) HandoverLayer

If only one Handover layer is open, this button toggles thedisplay of the Handover layer on or off. If more than oneHandover layer is open, it allows you to display a LayerProperties dialog box so you can select one for display onthe map.

Show or Hide (orAdd) Notes Layer

If only one Notes layer is open, this button toggles thedisplay of the Notes layer on or off. If more than one Noteslayer is open, it allows you to display a Layer Propertiesdialog box so you can select one for display on the map.

Show or Hide (orAdd) Layer 2Layer

If only one Layer 2 layer is open, this button toggles thedisplay of the Layer 2 layer on or off. If more than oneLayer 2 layer is open, it allows you to display a LayerProperties dialog box so you can select one for display onthe map.

Show or Hide (orAdd) Layer 3Layer

If only one Layer 3 layer is open, this button toggles thedisplay of the Layer 3 layer on or off. If more than oneLayer 3 layer is open, it allows you to display a LayerProperties dialog box so you can select one for display onthe map.

Show or Hide (orAdd) MessageLayer

If only one Message layer is open, this button toggles thedisplay of the Message layer on or off. If more than oneMessage layer is open, it allows you to display a LayerProperties dialog box so you can select one for display onthe map.

Show or HideBitmap Layer

After a bitmap has been added to a map, this buttontoggles the display of the Bitmap layer on or off.

Annotation Tool Displays a text box for you to insert notes and annotationsinto a location in the current map. You can change the fontand text color, as described in the online help.

Freehand Tool Activates the Freehand Drawing tool for insertion of yourown drawings into a location in the current map. You canchange the size and color of the freehand drawing asdescribed in the online help.



Line Tool Activates the Line Drawing tool for insertion of a straightline into a location in the current map. You can change thesize and color of the line as described in the online help.

Rectangle Tool Activates the Rectangle Drawing tool for insertion of a boxoutline into a location in the current map. You can changethe size and color of the box outline as described in theonline help.

Ellipse Tool Activates the Ellipse Drawing tool for insertion of a circle oroval outline into a location in the current map. You canchange the size and color of the ellipse outline asdescribed in the online help.

Instructions: To check your answers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes.”

4. Measure the linear distance between the starting and ending points of the horizontalsegment of the drive test (the starting point is approximately N 42:00:37.66,W 87:52:12.41, and the ending point is approximately N 42:00:40.87, W 87:49:47.10.

5. Remove the line drawn from the linear distance measurement on the map.

Adding and Modifying Data TracksThis section explains two methods for adding one or more data tracks and how to customizetheir display on the map through their data sheets.

Data Track ButtonBy default, a new map will show one data track representing the layer that was in the activetable at the time you created the map. You can modify this properties of data track, and youcan also add more data tracks to the Map View display, either from the Map View or fromthe Table View.



� To add a new Data Track from the Map View:1. Click the Data Track button to display the Data Layer Properties dialog box.

Figure 4-5. The Data Track Selection tab lets you identify thedata track that you want to display on the map and select thesymbols that you want to use to display it. Symbol Schemes canbe defined with the Symbol Scheme Wizard, described later inthis lesson.

2. Use the drop-down boxes to identify the data track you want to display. The datatrack can be from the same test run used to display the previous data track, or itcan be from another test run file, as long as it has been opened in OPAS32. Youcan also attach an existing Symbol Scheme to the display. Refer to "Creating orChanging Symbol Schemes" on page 163 for more information on symbolschemes and how to create them.

Note: You can select any listed column in the layer from the Color Column drop-down box.If you have a symbol scheme defined and would like to display that on a map independent ofa color column, you can choose (None) as your color column. Again, Symbol Schemes arecovered later in this lesson.



Figure 4-6. The Data Track display tab lets you specify how you wantdata track information displayed in the Map View, or whether you wantthe data track displayed at all (Overlay Visible).

3. Use the check boxes to select your preferences. If you uncheck the OverlayVisible box, the data track will not show up in the Map View display (you canalso do this from the Overlay Manager, as you will learn). If you uncheck any ofthe name or Legend display boxes, that information will not appear in theOverlay Manager. By checking the Track Line Visible box, a line will be drawnin the route in addition to whatever symbol scheme is used. By checking theStart Indicator box, an arrow will appear at the first point of this data track in theMap View.

4. Multiple data tracks are automatically offset in the display to enable you todistinguish between them. If more than one data track covers the same route asthe one you are adding, however, you might want to specify additional x(horizontal) and/or y (vertical) offset values so the data tracks are farther apart onthe screen and easier to distinguish. To do this, use the up or down arrows tospecify the offset value in pixels, where a positive number offsets the data trackto the right of (x) or above (y) the previous one, and a negative number offsets tothe left (x) or below (y).



5. If you are using an icon-based symbol scheme (described in "UnderstandingSymbol Schemes" on page 163), OPAS32 sets the default size of the displayedicon equal to the character symbols. To increase or decrease the default iconsize, use the up (increase) or down (decrease) arrow on the Icon sizing control.The number you select adjusts the default size. For example, if the default size is12 and you select a value of 3, the icon size will be 15. Any value you select willhave no affect on data tracks that use character-based symbol schemes.

� To change the properties of an existing data track:1. Double-click on the data track's row in the Overlay Manager to display the Layer

Properties dialog box.

2. Make any changes required as described in "To add a new Data Track from theMap View:" on page 141.

Drag and Drop Pointer

Null Pointer� To drag and drop table columns to a map:

1. In the Table View, use standard Windows selection methods(lick on the columntitle, CTRL+Click to select another non-contiguous column, or SHIFT+Click toselect a range of columns) to select one or more mappable columns that you wantto map.

2. Holding down the left mouse button, drag across to the main body of the map.When the mouse arrow passes over to the Map View, it changes to the Drag andDrop pointer.

Figure 4-7. We dragged the Table and Map View windows to half their total horizontal width in order todisplay them side-by-side and then selected the Lwr Chnl column. If you wanted to, you could make theTable View very narrow—just wide enough to show the column or columns you want to map. Or, you canoverlap the views, as long as enough is showing so you can drag and drop.



If you have selected only non-mappable columns (such as time, latitude, orlongitude), the mouse arrow changes to a Null pointer to indicate that no columnswill be added to the map. If you select a combination of mappable and non-mappable columns, a dialog box will inform you of those columns that will notbe added to the map.

3. Release the left mouse button. The columns now appear in the Map View, andtheir map sheets are listed in the Overlay Manager.

OPAS32 automatically makes the correct assumptions, based on the layer you are selectingcolumns from:

● If the Result column from an exception layer has been dropped, an exception layer isadded to the Map View.

● If the Chnl column in an event layer has been dropped, an event layer is added to theMap View.

Although these are different types of layers, they operate the same as a standard layer interms of the ways you can manipulate them on the map.

Note: Regardless of which method you use to add data tracks, data tracks are stacked on themap based on the order that they appear in the Overlay Manager, with the top rowidentifying the top-most data track on the map display. In the event that multiple data tracksfrom the same route are on the map, you might periodically want to change the order to giveyou a clear view of a data track that is of concern during a certain analysis.

Figure 4-8. When you look at the Overlay Manager in the top panel, you can see that two map sheets areactive on the map, yet you can see only one. This is because the second map sheet uses a charactersymbol scheme, which is blocked from view by the larger icon symbol scheme used by the first map sheet.By dragging the second map sheet to the top position, you can now see both map sheets on the map.



� To change the stack order of data tracks on a map using drag-and-drop:1. In the Overlay Manager, left-click and hold on a map sheet that you want to

move.

2. Drag upward or downward to the new location. The map sheet will be relocatedimmediately before the map sheet you drag to.

3. Release the mouse button. The list order changes, and the map re-draws to stackthe data tracks in the same order as the list.

Note: It is possible to lock certain map sheets into their current positions. This means thatthey retain their current position number, regardless of the movement of other map sheets.For example, a locked map sheet in position #1 will always be at the top of the stack orderand will not permit another map sheet to be moved in front of it. This is described in thenext section.

Map Sheet Locked Button Map Sheet Unlocked Button

� To lock or unlock a map sheet:Click on the Locked or Unlocked button. This button toggles the locked status on oroff.

Note that, when you delete an unlocked map sheet, the next available unlocked mapsheet automatically moves to its position. In spite of this physical change of positionin the Overlay manager, the moved map sheet’s original spot number is retained. Thismeans it retains its original position in the stack order. The following illustrationshows what happens when one unlocked map sheet is deleted.



#1 (locked)

#2 (unlocked)

#3 (locked)

#4 (unlocked)

#5 (locked)

#6 (unlocked)

#1 (locked)

#2 (unlocked)

#3 (locked)

#6 (unlocked)

#5 (locked)

delete

move

Before Deletion After Deletion

Figure 4-9. When the map sheet in position #4 is deleted, it leaves a blank spacethat must be filled by the next available map sheet. Since map sheet #5 is locked, itmust remain in the #5 position. Therefore, map sheet #6 automatically moves intothe #4 position.

To change the stack order of the data tracks in the map display, drag and drop thelisted map sheets to new positions. To drag and drop, click and hold the left mousebutton on a map sheet that you want to re-position. Then, with the mouse button stilldown, drag upward or downward to the new position, and release the mouse button.

� To change the properties of an existing map sheet:1. Double-click on the map sheet's row in the Overlay Manager to display the Layer


2. Make any changes required as described in "To add a new Data Track from theMap View:" on page 141.

Note: Another way to display the Layer Properties dialog box is to right-click on a listedmap sheet to display a popup menu. Then, select the Properties option.



� To toggle the display of a data track on or off:

Show Map Sheet Button

Hide Map Sheet ButtonClick its Show or Hide Map Sheet button. These buttons toggle the display of theselected map sheet on or off. Even when the Map Sheet is hidden, it is still active inthe Overlay Manager.

� To toggle the display of multiple data tracks on or off:1. Use standard Windows selection techniques (CTRL+Click, or SHIFT+Click) to

select the map sheet(s) you want to change.

2. Then, right-click to display a popup menu, from which you can select the Visibleoption, which toggles between Show or Hide.

Note that, if a combination of checked and unchecked map sheets have beenselected, using this method turns the display on for all of them.

� To delete one or more map sheet(s) from the map:1. Use standard Windows selection techniques (CTRL+Click or SHIFT+Click) to

select one or more map sheets that you want to delete.

2. Right-click in the Overlay Manager to display a popup menu.

3. Select the Delete option to permanently remove the selected map sheets from themap. If you want to include these map sheets later in the session, you will haveto add them back as described in "To add a new Data Track from the Map View:"on page 141.

� To display a different column within a layer:

Column Selection Button1. Click on the Column Selection button to display a drop-down list of all mappable

columns available for that layer.

2. Click on the column you want to display on the map. The map and the listing inthe Overlay Manager are instantly updated.

� (New Feature) To reduce or enlarge a selected map sheet to fit the mapdisplay (the Zoom To feature):

1. Right-click on the map sheet you want to zoom to. This displays a popup menu.

2. From the popup menu, select the Zoom To option. The map display changesimmediately.



� (New Feature) To add or remove offsets between all data tracks in the mapdisplay:

1. Right-click on the map sheet you want to zoom to. This displays a popup menu.

2. From the popup menu, select Cascade to automatically add space between thedata tracks, in the same way as using vertical and horizontal offset settings. Or,select Stack to remove any offset space between data tracks. If all data tracks onthe map cover the same test run area, it will appear as if only the first data trackappears on the map because all the ones following it in the Overlay Manager willbe hidden from view.

Instructions: Continue using the Scanner #8 table in TrainAmps1.oif for the nextexercises. To check your answers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes.”

6. Drag the Time, Ch335, and Ch336 columns from the Scanner #8 table to the map.What happens?

________________________________________________________________

7. Maximize the map for better viewing. Then edit the properties of the Ch335 andCh336 mapsheets to offset them both vertically and horizontally by 25 and 50,respectively.

8. Use one mouse click to hide the display of the Ch334 and Ch335 map sheets.



Modifying the Legend DisplayThis section explains how you can change the display of the Symbol Scheme and ColorScheme legends in a map.

Figure 4-10. The Legends & Colors tabinitially shows all color and symbolschemes that have been applied to a mapsheet. You can change how muchinformation is displayed and the look ofthe legend.

� To change the font used in the legend:1. Right-click within the Legends & Colors Tab to display a popup menu.

2. Then select the Font option to display a standard Font dialog box. You can nowchange all font properties for the legend display.



� To remove color scheme or symbol scheme information from the legenddisplay:

1. Right-click within the Legends & Colors Tab to display a popup menu.

2. Then select the Properties option to display the Map Legend Properties dialogbox.

Figure 4-11. The Map Legend Properties dialog box lets you choose to display or not display a color schemeor legend for any map sheet.

3. For each Map Sheet, you can check or uncheck the box in the appropriate columnto display (checked) or not display (unchecked) legends for the color or symbolscheme.

Drawing a Terrain Profile (New Feature) Draw Terrain Profile Button

Terrain Profile Mouse ArrowThe Terrain Profile feature allows you to view a profile of the terrain in a map in order to seehow high or low any point is relative to the base station. This feature can be very helpful inanalyzing the reason for insufficient signal strength or dropped calls.



� (Optional) To preload existing terrain profiles into OPAS32:1. From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. Click the Terrain Profile tab to display the Terrain Profile dialog box.

Figure 4-12. You can prepare for using the Terrain Profile feature bysupplying the name(s) of your terrain profiles in advance. Or, select them onthe fly when you click the Draw Terrain Profile button in a map.

3. Select the file(s) that you want to be automatically available for Terrain Profiledisplay.



� (Optional) To generate custom terrain files from the Rocky MountainTerrain (USGS 3 sec format) CD:

1. From the Terrain Profile tab in Tools | Options, click the Import from CD buttonto display the Import Terrain from CD dialog box.

Figure 4-13. The Import Terrain From CD lets you specify the boundariesand other information about the section of terrain data that you want toimport.

2. Complete this dialog box as instructed in the online help.

� To draw a terrain profile in a map:1. With a map displayed, click the Draw Terrain Profile button. If you do not have

existing terrain profiles pre-loaded, or if no existing terrain profiles match thelocation shown in the current map, you will be prompted to supply terrain profileinformation. Then the mouse arrow changes to the Terrain Profile Mouse Arrow,and the Draw Terrain Profile button displays in the down (pushed) position.



Note: When you click the Draw Terrain Profile button (or, after you haveselected a terrain profile, if prompted), a rectangle marking the terrain fileboundaries appears on the map. Depending on the zoom level displayed whenyou activate the terrain profile feature, this rectangle may not be visible withinthe zoom view.

If, when drawing the terrain profile, you drag the arrow outside of the rectangle,the terrain profile graph curve will drop off the graph until you drag the arrowsomewhere within the rectangle.

2. Click and hold down the left mouse button, and drag a line in the current map.Typically, you will drag the test route; however, you can drag within an area ofthe map. As you drag the mouse, terrain information appears in the TerrainProfile Window.

Figure 4-14. As long as you stay within the boundaries of the terrain file, the TerrainProfile window displays the elevation for the area you drag in the map.

� To discontinue the Terrain Profile Window display:Click the Close button in the Terrain Profile Window to close the Terrain ProfileWindow. Selecting a different map tool from the Map View will also quit from theTerrain Profile Tool state.

� To print the displayed terrain profile:Click the Print button in the Terrain Profile Window. Note that using the File | Printoption in OPAS32 prints the current map only--not the Terrain Profile.



Setting Map View DefaultsThis section explains how to set up maps in OPAS32 so that your display preferences areused when you create maps. You always have the option of changing the default settings forthe current session after you have created a map.

Accessing Map-Related Default OptionsAs you have learned in past lessons, default settings for OPAS32 can be accessed from aseries of tabbed dialog boxes.

� To display the Options dialog boxes:1. From the Tools menu, select Options. (You can also right-click within the map

pane, and select Map Options from the popup menu.)

2. Click on the appropriate tab. Examples of the map-related dialog boxes areshown and described in the following sections.

Changing a Map's Appearance (The Map, Map2, and Map3Tabs)

Figure 4-15. The Map Options dialog box tab is one of several tabs that pertain tomap setup. This one sets the basic display options for the parts of the map.



You can make the following selections for the appearance of a map window:

● Font name and font size for certain map elements.

● Point size for map symbols such as handovers, events, markers and TQNM symbols.

● Point size for cell site symbols, or scale the symbol size display based on the ERP(Effective Radiated Power) of the antenna.

Recommendation: When you select a smaller point size for the map symbols (cell site andother overlay symbols), the map will draw faster in the window.

Note: A Scope panel appears in virtually every Options dialog box tab. It lets you choosebetween displaying your current selections in the current map window only or using thesettings as a default to be used in all map windows in the current OPAS32 session and insubsequent sessions.

The Map2 tab offers additional options for controlling a map’s appearance.

Figure 4-16. The Map2 tab lets you fine-tune your map display by setting theinformation that should be displayed and the format to use.



You can make the following selections for the appearance of a map window:

● Display of Tool Tips when you pass the mouse arrow over a data track in a map.

● The display of gridlines in a map.

● The colors used for different types of lines displayed by the Info Tool when it is run on amap with a cell site database loaded.

The Map 3 tab offers some additional options.

Figure 4-17. The Map 3 tab lets you set the data to be displayed and the playbackspeed of the Info Tool in the Map View.

● By checking the Show invalid color column values check box in this dialog box, yougive control of invalidation from the color scheme to the symbol scheme. Thus, invalidvalues can now appear.

● When you drag a combination of mapable and non-mapable columns from a table to amap, a message box displays a list of any non-mapable columns to inform you that thesecolumns will not be displayed on the map. To turn off this message box, make sure nocheck mark appears in this box.

● Finally, you can change the playback speed of the Info Tool by specifying the amount oftime between playing one data point and the next. The default of 250 msecs(milliseconds) means that it takes ¼ second for the Info Tool arrow to move from onedata point to the next.



Identifying Street Maps to Display (The Street Map Index Tab)

Figure 4-18. The first time you open the Street Map Index tab, the large scrollbox is empty. You can use the Add button to add one or more maps to thedisplay, and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order inwhich multiple maps (for the area covered) will be displayed. In this case, themap in the first position is displayed; however, if that map is not solid, a lowerlevel map for the same geographic area may show through.

The Street Map Index is the way you identify your most frequently-used maps to OPAS32.These maps will be used as underlays (referring to the fact that they display underneath thebasic map display). The Street Map Index tab lets you identify these maps. Whenever amap window is opened, OPAS32 checks to see if a map that matches the geographiccoordinates in the test run file is listed in this index. If a matching map is found in the mapsthat you add in this dialog box, that map is used in the map window.

Note: Keep in mind that the Street Map Index tab identifies maps to be displayed, but itdoesn't actually display them. For information on how to display maps included in the StreetMap Index tab, refer to "Displaying Street Maps" on page 161.



� To add a map to the index:1. If you are adding an unfamiliar type of map, we recommend that you click the

Help button from the Street Map Index dialog box to review any specialinstructions that pertain to the file type you want to select.

2. Click the Add button to display the Select Street Map File dialog box.

Figure 4-19. The Select Street Map File dialog box displays all maps of thefile type indicated in the Files of type field. As of this writing, you can choosebetween ETAK maps, .MAP file type; SPOT Image maps (satellite imagedata provided by SPOT Image Corp.), .TIF file type; or MapInfo maps, .MIFfile type. More map types may be supported in the future. The OPAS32online help system always provides up-to-date information on the map typessupported and any actions you may need to take to use each file type.

3. (Optional.) If necessary, you can change the Files of type field to display thetype of map you want to select.

4. Once the map you want to select is displayed, click on it, and then click the Openbutton. The file is then displayed in the box in the Street Map Index dialog box.

5. Click the OK button to save your selection(s) and return to the previous window.

Note: If you have not added any maps that match the geographic coordinates in a particulartest run file, and if you have activated street maps in Street Maps options or by turning onthe Street Map underlay, OPAS32 will give you the opportunity to add one on the fly whenyou create a map. In this case, the Select Street Map File dialog box automatically opens soyou can select a related map. This map is then automatically included in the map index.

� To change the order of maps listed in the Street Map Index dialog box:1. Click on a map that you want to move to highlight it.

2. Click the Move Up or Move Down button to move it one position up or down,respectively. This changes the order in which multiple maps (for the areacovered) will be displayed. If a higher-level map is not solid, a lower-level mapfor the same geographic area may show through.



Instructions: If you are licensed to use ETAK maps with your OPAS32 software, performthe exercise below. If you do not have the ETAK license, you can skip this exercise. Tocheck your answers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes.”9. Add the ETAK map, Chi_il.map to the Street Map Index. If your Street Map Index

already has maps listed, make sure this new map is listed at the top.

Customizing the ETAK Street Map Display (The Street MapsTab)

You can specify many details on how you want ETAK street maps to display. This is donewith the Street Maps tab.

Note: This tab affects ETAK maps only.

Figure 4-20. The Street Maps Options dialog box provides a variety of optionspertaining to what is displayed in a street map.

� To set Street Maps options:1. Click on the Street Maps tab.



2. Use the Options panel to identify whether street maps should be automaticallydisplayed when a map is drawn. This panel also controls whether Areas (forexample, lakes and parks), Points (of interest), and/or Lines (interstates,highways, railroad tracks, and so forth) should be drawn. If you elect to drawthese items, you can also elect to label them.

3. Use the Street Level options to identify which level of street types should bedisplayed.

4. Use the Feature Options panel to change the color and size of lines used torepresent the street types in the map.

5. Use the Scope panel to identify whether the settings you select should beavailable for the current map only or for all maps.

6. Click the OK button to save your changes and return to the previous window.

Instructions: If you are licensed to use ETAK maps with your OPAS32 software, performthe exercise below. If you do not have the ETAK license, you can skip this exercise. Tocheck your answers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes.”10. Customize the map display so that it matches the options shown on page 159 in

Figure 4-20.

Specifying Units of Measure (The Units Tab)

Figure 4-21. The Units tab lets you determine how distance on the map should bemeasured.



� To identify how you want distance measured:Click on the appropriate option (Feet, Miles, Meters, or Kilometers), and click the OKbutton to return to the previous window.

You can switch back and forth to view different distances on a map.

� To identify how you want signal strength displayed:1. Use the Select Technology drop-down box to select a technology.

2. Click on the appropriate option (dBm, dBUV/m, or RxLev).

You can select a difference signal strength display option for each technology.

Displaying Street MapsOnce you have added one or more maps to the Street Map Index, you can display or hidestreet maps in the Map View. This section identifies some of the map types supported byOPAS32 and describes how to display them.

Types of Maps SupportedOPAS32 supports a variety of map file types such as:

•••• .MAP (ETAK)

•••• .MIF (MapInfo)

•••• .BMP (Bitmap)

•••• .TIF (satellite image data provided by SPOT Image Corp. in Geo TIF file format)

? Note that some map file types require additional processing. Use the Help Index tab tolocate the Street Map topic, and select Index of Map Files to display details forall supported map file types.

Adding Street Maps to the Map Display

Street Map Button� To display a street map:

1. First, be sure you have one or more maps in the Street Map Index, as described in"Identifying Street Maps to Display (The Street Map Index Tab)" on page 157. Ifyou set up OPAS32 to automatically display street maps each time you create amap, the street map(s) you identified that pertain to the appropriate geographicregion will automatically display whenever you create a map.

2. If you did not set up for automatic street map display, click the Street Map buttonfrom the Map View window to either display a street map or remove it from thedisplay.



� To override the map display order set in the Street Map Index Tab:1. When a map is displayed, from the View menu, select Underlay Selector to

display the Map Underlay Selector Dialog Box.

Figure 4-22. The Map Underlay Selector dialog box shows all street maps that are currentlydisplayed in the map view. Because the maps are layered, you may not actually see anymaps listed below the top position. This dialog box lets you change the order of the layers onthe fly.

2. Highlight the map whose order you want to change, and use the Up or Downbutton to move the map’s position in the list.

3. You can click the Redraw button to change the map immediately.

Instructions: If your OPAS32 software is licensed to support ETAK maps, perform theexercise below. Otherwise, you can skip this exercise. To check your answers, refer toAppendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes.”11. Display the Chi_il.map in your Map View display.

Controlling the Map Re-DrawAs is true with most graphic operations on a computer, a map may take a few moments todraw on the screen. You can stop drawing or redraw maps in OPAS32.

� To stop drawing a map:Press the ESCAPE key on your keyboard. This halts drawing and displays the partially-drawn map.

� To redraw a map:Press the INSERT key on your keyboard. You can also select Redraw from the Toolsmenu.



� To pause map updates:Press the PAUSE key on your keyboard. OPAS32 displays a "Paused Map Updates"message, but allows you to continue making menu selections. This feature is helpfulwhen you are setting up options in a layer and do not want to re-draw the map for eachchange you make. For example, if you want to set up street maps to display minorroads, you want your map to display a different legend, and you also want to displaymarkers, you would normally wait for the map to re-draw itself for each change. Bypausing the map updates, you can set all these things before viewing the map with itsnew settings. When you are done making changes, press the PAUSE key again, and themap will re-draw itself with all the new settings in place.

Creating or Changing Symbol SchemesLike color schemes, event symbols add another dimension to your map information bymaking it easy to identify important data based on symbols or characters. In the previoussection, you learned how to change the graphic symbols that represent certain events in thedisplayed test run information. In this section, you will learn how to create or change bothcharacter-based or icon (graphical) symbol schemes for different data layers.

Understanding Symbol SchemesSymbol schemes provide a way for you to provide easy visual queues to identify the data ina data track. As mentioned above, there are two types of symbol scheme display:

● Character symbol schemes use alphabetical characters to identify changes in values ina map display. If no other symbol scheme has been assigned, the default symbol schemeshows a data track using the letter "A." When a character symbol scheme is in use, youcan use color schemes to change the colors of the characters to add more clarification tothe map.

● Icon symbol schemes use small pictures to identify changes in values in a map display.Your OPAS32 software is shipped with a variety of icons (stored in the\OPAS32\Symbols folder). You can also create your own symbols using any drawingsoftware capable of creating .WMF files. When you use an icon symbol scheme, anyassigned color scheme will be inactive. In other words, the colors of the icons will notchange as a result of a color scheme.



Figure 4-23. This picture shows a zoom view of a map with two data tracks. Actually, these are both the samedata track, but, while the same color scheme applies to both data tracks, the one on the left has been assigned anIcon symbol scheme (dBmIcon), and the one on the right has been assigned a Character symbol scheme(dBmChar). If you refer to the legend, you can see that the two symbol schemes are identical as well, except forthe type of symbol that has been assigned. For example, the symbol used to represent the weakest signalstrengths (dBm values of -115 to –95) is either a sad face or the letter A. The ranges are the same, regardless ofwhether the icon or character symbol scheme is used.

Regardless of whether you prefer to use characters or symbols, you use the Symbol Wizardto create or change symbol schemes. This Wizard walks you through the steps that createthe symbol scheme. Based on the options you select along the way, the Wizard displays theappropriate steps.

Using the Symbol WizardThe Symbol Wizard consists of the following steps:

● Create or Modify Symbol Scheme: Creates a new symbol scheme, deletes an existingsymbol scheme, or selects an existing symbol scheme for modification.

● Symbol by Value or Fixed Symbol: Lets you determine whether you want to displaythe same symbol for each record in the layer (fixed symbol) or display different symbolsbased on the value of one or more columns (symbol by value). If you select Symbol byValue, the Wizard walks you through the decisions you need to make in order to definethe symbols you want and apply each symbol to the correct data.

● Select Layer (Symbol by Value Only): Lets you select the layer that contains one ormore columns that the symbol scheme should be based on.



● Select Column (Symbol by Value Only): Lets you select one or more data columnsthat the symbols should be based on.

● Select Symbol Map Type (Symbol by Value Only): Offers three choices of symbolmap types to be associated with the symbol scheme: Discrete (symbols are assigned tounique column value combinations), Range (symbols are assigned to numeric rangeswithin a single column), and Use Column (draws the actual column values directly onthe map).

As you can see from this list, you will not always see all of the steps. For example, if youselect a fixed symbol scheme in the second step, you will not see the remaining three stepsbecause they do not apply to fixed symbol schemes. Similarly, some of the steps havebuttons that let you perform actions that are specific to your selections. Depending on yourselections, some of these buttons may be disabled because they do not apply.

Creating a New Symbol SchemeIn this section, you will see one example of creating one type of new symbol scheme. Wewill be creating an icon symbol scheme that shows dBm values for a tracker in ranges, likethe one shown in Figure 4-23. Along the way, we'll discuss some of the differences that youwould see if you made different selections.

Before we run the Symbol Wizard, we are going to add three new icons to OPAS32 that willprovide a simple, but easy-to-understand dBm rating system.

� To add new icons to OPAS32:1. If OPAS32 is open, close it. You will need to restart OPAS32 after creating the

icon graphics.

2. Use any drawing or presentation graphics software to create the icon images.The software must be capable of creating images in .WMF or .EMF format.

3. When you save or export the graphics, be sure to save them in the\OPAS32\Symbols folder. OPAS32 automatically recognizes .WMF or .EMFfiles stored in this location.

4. Start OPAS32. When the Symbol Wizard lets you assign icons to a symbolscheme, the new icon(s) you added will be available for selection.



� To create a new symbol scheme:1. Open an .OIF file. In this example, we used TrainAmps1.oif.

2. From the Edit menu, select Symbol Wizard to display the Create or ModifySymbol Scheme dialog box. (You can also right-click in the Map Pane andselect Symbol Wizard from the popup menu.)

Figure 4-24. The first Wizard step lets you create a new symbol scheme or modify or delete anexisting one. Note that if you want to create a symbol scheme that is similar to one that alreadyexists, you can use the Modify/Delete… option. Later, when you are prompted to save it, simplyspecify a new name.



3. To create a new Symbol Scheme, click the Create New Symbol Scheme option,and then click the Next> button to display the Symbol by Value or Fixed Symboldialog box.

Figure 4-25. In the second step, you identify whether you want to create a fixed symbol scheme (Symbolby Record) or whether you want the symbols in your map to differ based on a unique combination ofcolumn values (Symbol by Value). The default is Symbol by Record, using the character "A". If youprefer, you can change the character, or select an Icon. Either way, for a Symbol by Record, this is thelast Wizard step, and a Finish button displays so you can save the symbol scheme.



4. Since we want our symbol scheme to be based on a range of values, we selectedSymbol by Value, and clicked the Next> button to display the Select Layerdialog box.

Figure 4-26. In this step, you click on the + buttons to drill down to the layer that contains the column(s)that you want to use as the basis for your symbol scheme.

5. Select the layer that you want to use for the basis of your symbol scheme. Eachtime you click on a + button, the information beneath it opens on the screen untilyou can see the layers for the file and device you have selected. After selecting alayer, click the Next> button to display the Select Column dialog box.



Figure 4-27. In this step, you can select one or more column(s) to be used as the basis for your symbolscheme. In this picture, you can see that only one column (dBm) from the layer has been selected.When you define a range-based symbol scheme, as we are doing here, you can select only one column.

?OPAS32 Help details your options on this and other dialog boxes.

� To display Help on your options:1. From this dialog box, click the Help button to see descriptive

information about the dialog box. This information details theavailable options in the dialog box.

2. To learn how to complete any part of the dialog box, click onthe View Dialog Box option. A second help window will showa picture of the dialog box. You can click on the parts of thepictured dialog box to learn what they are and how to use them.



6. Select the column(s) that you want to use for the basis of your symbol scheme. Ifyou select more than one column, you will be able to create a symbol schemeeither based on a unique combination of column values, or one that draws actualcolumn values directly on the map. If you select only one column, you will beable to either select symbol map types, or you will be able to create a symbolscheme based on ranges of values. Once you have made your selection, click theNext> button to display the Select Symbol Map Type dialog box.

Figure 4-28. This dialog box lets you identify the values that will be the basis for your symbol scheme. Adiscrete symbol map assigns a symbol to unique column value combinations. A range symbol mapassigns a symbol to a range of values and requires that you select only one column in the previous step.Use Column Value(s) as Symbol actually draws the column value directly in the map, instead of usingsymbols. This option lets you display only one column value or all selected column values.

?For further details on the concepts behind the symbol map types you cancreate, use the Online Help system.

� To display Help about symbol scheme concepts:1. From the Help menu, select Index.

2. Click on the Index tab in the Help Table of Contents.

3. In the field at the top of the Index tab, type symbol scheme.You will see a topic entitled symbol scheme: overviewin the list box at the bottom of the Index tab.

4. Double-click on this listing to view the online help.



Figure 4-29. This dialog box lets you define the ranges that OPAS32 will use to determine when asymbol should change and which symbols to use. A character symbol scheme is the default; however,you can change to an icon symbol scheme by clicking the Icon radio button. You can change symbols bytyping over the default values in the Symbol column. You can also enter new ranges by typing them inthe left and right Value fields or by entering new right values and checking the Auto Update Left Valuecheck box to have OPAS32 assign the left values automatically. You can also have OPAS32 assignrange values by clicking on the Modify Ranges button, as we will be doing in this example.

7. In addition to the options noted in the caption above, you can also re-size icon-based symbols in a range symbol scheme by clicking the Size Icons check box.Refer to “Sizing Icons in a Range Symbol Scheme “ on page 174 for details onhow to change icon sizes.

8. You can use any method to define the symbols and ranges, as described in thecaption for Figure 4-28. In this example, we have clicked the Modify Rangesbutton to display the Modify Ranges dialog box.

Figure 4-30. This dialog box tells OPAS32 what it needs to knowto automatically calculate ranges for you. In this case, we askedfor three ranges. We retained the default Starting Value of –115,and requested a Step Size of 20, which means that each range(except for the last one) will contain 20 values. The last one willcontain all values from the starting value through the highestvalue in the file.



9. To change the icons for each range of values, click inside the icon’s box todisplay a drop-down list of icons.

10. Scroll to the icon you want, and click on it to select it.

Figure 4-31. After making the range change, only three ranges show up. Since the Icon radio button wasselected, a graphical symbol is now displayed in all rows. If you are following along with this procedure,the symbol that shows up on your screen for each range may differ from the one shown here.



11. When you click the OK button, the Edit Symbol Map dialog box is re-displayed.Click on the Icon radio button to display icon symbols.

Figure 4-32. To change a symbol, click on the symbol you want to change to reveal a drop-down boxshowing all available icons. For this training, we created three new icons – happy.wmf, medium.wmf, andsad.wmf, which are already installed in your \OPAS32\Symbols folder. These faces were created in black,which ensures that they will take on the assigned color scheme in a map. We also added three facialexpressions to tell the tale as well, as you'll see when we apply it to a map.

Notice that there is no longer a Next> button. This is because you are donedefining the symbol scheme. The Finish button displays at different times,depending on the options you select within the Wizard. When you click the OKbutton, the Edit Symbol Map dialog box is re-displayed. Click on the Icon radiobutton to display icon symbols.

12. Click the Finish button to display the Save Scheme dialog box.

Figure 4-33. To save a new symbol scheme, you must enter a unique name inthis dialog box. If you enter a name that already exists, the Wizard will ask if youwant to overwrite it. On the other hand, if you want to create a new symbolscheme from an existing one, simply select it in the first Wizard step, make anychanges as you progress through the Wizard, and then save it under a newname in this dialog box.



12. Enter a name for the symbol scheme, and click the OK button. The next timeyou run the Symbol Wizard, you will see this new scheme listed in the first step.

Using Icons With Color SchemesWhen applying icon-based symbol schemes to color columns (columns containingmeasurable data, as opposed to non-measurable data such as messages, time, and so forth),OPAS32 also applies any assigned color scheme to the icons. If the icons you are using arealready colored, the results of this dual-color assignment can be unpredictable.

To ensure that color scheme colors are applied to icons representing color columns, it isrecommended that you use solid black icons, like the ones shown in the previous examples.On the other hand, if you want a symbol scheme to represent non-measurable data such asmessages, and if you want the symbols colored for quicker visual recognition, it isrecommended that you create colored icons since no color schemes can be applied to thistype of data.

Note: For more information about how to create the .WMF files that are used as symbols,visit the SAFCO web site (www.safco.com), and look for the OPAS32 FAQ section. Detailson how to do this are available in “Using the SAFCO Web Site” in the Getting Startedsection of this book.

Sizing Icons in a Range Symbol SchemeYou already know how to apply symbols and colors to make data track values instantlyrecognizeable when displayed in a map. When you create an icon-based range symbolscheme, OPAS32 presents an additional option to obtain even more meaning from a datatrack: icon sizing.

You can apply sizes to the icons representing a column's values. This means, for example,that you can enlarge icons that indicate areas of concern in a route map so they will beimmediately noticeable as areas in need of further analysis.

You can also take icon sizing a step further by assigning sizes from a different column thanthe one represented by the symbol scheme. An example of using this option comes from theCDMA technology. Assume that you plan to create a map that shows the CDMA RxLevcolumn, and have assigned a set of symbols to represent the RxLev data ranges, for example,the happy faces used in the early symbol scheme examples. By assigning sizes for theseicons based on ranges for the FER column, you have now made it possible to see FERvalues, based on icon size, within the RxLev data track while seeing the values based on theicons displayed, and perhaps seeing another dimension of the data by applying anappropriate color scheme. Thus, every icon in the data track now imparts three meanings.

� To size icons in a range symbol scheme:1. From the Edit Symbol Map dialog box (which is only displayed for range-based

symbol schemes), switch to an Icon Symbol Type by clicking the radio button,and assign icons for the scheme as described earlier.



2. Click the Size Icons check box. The dialog box switches to display the Size tabin the Edit Symbol Map dialog box.

Figure 4-34. The Size tab appears to be very similar to the Symbol tab, but you use this tab to assign sizesbased on various criteria. The Size column lets you assign the size values and defaults to a range fromsmallest to largest. The Icon column shows the assigned size of the icon. Notice that the same icon appearsfor all ranges in the Icon column. In this tab, the same symbol is displayed for all ranges to make it easier foryou to compare the relative sizes of the icons. When the symbol scheme is actually applied, the icons fromthe Symbol tab will be used. The icon displayed defaults to the first one from the Symbol tab. Or, you canselect an icon before clicking the Size Icons check box to use the selected icon as a default.

3. To resize the icons, click in the Size column and then either use the up and downarrows to change the value, or type over the existing value. Alternatively, youcan first select a column from the column selection drop-down box, and assignsizes based on the values that display for the selected column.

4. You can also modify ranges with the Modify Ranges button, as described in Step8 (page 171) in “Creating a New Symbol Scheme”. This allows you to usedifferent ranges for the size of the symbols than the one you used to assignsymbols.

5. When done, click on the Finish button to save the symbol scheme, as describedearlier.

Applying Symbol Schemes to a Data TrackOnce a symbol scheme is defined, you can apply it to any data track that contains the samecolumn data. For example, the symbol scheme defined in "Creating a New SymbolScheme" can be used for any data track that shows a tracker phone's dBm column in theRSSI layer.



New Map Button� To apply a symbol scheme:

1. Use the New Map Button to create a new map. In this example, we selected theTracker #1 phone's table view and then selected the dBm column of the RSSlayer. You can also work on an existing map.

Figure 4-35. We turned off the street map display in this illustration so you can see the data track easily. Wealso zoomed in on the right-most portion of the data track so you can see that the default symbol scheme iscurrently in effect. If you click on the Legends & Colors tab in the Overlay Manager, you will see that thisscheme is the letter "A."



2. In the Overlay Manager, double-click on the data track you want to change todisplay the Layer Properties dialog box.

Fixed Symbol

Figure 4-36. As you can see, the symbol scheme in use is called FixedSymbol. This is the default symbol scheme. To change to the new symbolscheme, click on the down arrow in the Symbol Scheme drop-down box,and select dBm-Char, the symbol scheme created in the previous section.



3. Select a symbol scheme in the Symbol Scheme drop-down box, which onlyshows those symbol schemes that can be applied to the column that is selected.Then click the OK button to return to the map display.

Figure 4-37. The default symbol scheme has been replaced with the new icon symbol scheme. Looking atthe Legends & Colors tab, we can see information about the new symbol scheme. If you're following alongon-screen, you can see that the black icons have colors applied from a color scheme, making it easy to spotbad data in the display. We used Boolean selection to find a pink sad face at the point where the Info Toolarrow and the Boolean Selection rectangle indicate. The Info tool also provides details about that data.

Instructions: Using the Tracker #1 device in TrainAmps1.oif, perform the steps below.To check your answers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes.”

12. The dBm-Icon symbol scheme has been included with your training data. Use thissymbol scheme to create a new, character symbol scheme, where the letter Arepresents the sad.wmf data, the letter B represents the medium.wmf data, and theletter C represents the happy.wmf data.

13. Save the new symbol scheme as dBm-Char.14. After creating the dBm-Char symbol scheme, display it in a map of the dBm column

from Tracker #1.



Displaying Symbols from Previously Unmappable ColumnsThere may be times when you want to display symbols from columns that do not representquantifiable data. An example of this would be the Class column in the TQNM layer. Thiscolumn contains call status information in text format (Good Call, Dropped Call, NoService, and so forth), and columns containing non-numeric data cannot be mapped.

In versions of OPAS32 prior to 2.1, you could only display data from such columns byediting a vector symbol scheme, applying that scheme to the TQNM VoicePrint layer, andthen overlaying that layer on a mappable column, called a color column.

The current Symbol Wizard effectively eliminates this complex workaround by allowingyou to create a symbol scheme for virtually any column values.

Once you have created a symbol scheme, however, you still need to apply it to a mappablecolumn so that it can be displayed on a map. This section teaches you how to do this.

Data Track Button� To display symbols from unmappable columns:

1. Click the Data Track button to display the Layer Properties Dialog box.

Figure 4-38. Since the Class column in the TQNM layer is not mappable,we created an icon symbol scheme for it and selected a color column of(None) so we can view the call status information on a map.



2. Select the layer, select a Color Column of (None), and select the symbol schemeyou want to use for the map display.

3. Click OK to display the symbols on the map.

Figure 4-39. Here we have two map sheets displayed. The first one is the dBm column data using acharacter symbol scheme. Our second map sheet displays the icon symbol scheme for the TQNM Classcolumn. If you compare the symbols shown to the ones in the legend, you can see at a glance that therewere no communication problems here—only call start and good call symbols appear.

Creating Your Own SymbolsYou can create your own symbols in Windows Metafile Format (.WMF) and save them intothe OPAS32\symbols folder (where "OPAS32" is the folder where you installed OPAS32)for use in your symbol schemes. You can use any graphics or presentations graphicssoftware that provides a Save As or Export function that creates .WMF files.

The SAFCO web site (www.safco.com) provides detailed instructions in creating .WMFfiles using Microsoft® PowerPoint™. To access these instructions from the SAFCO homepage, click on the Secure Client Services heading in the Customer Support area, and log in.The instructions are available from the OPAS32 page in the FAQ section.

For detailed instructions on how to use the SAFCO web site and how to obtain a login ID forthe secure area, refer to the "Before You Begin" section of this training guide.



Using Icons With Color SchemesWhen applying icon-based symbol schemes to color columns (columns containingmeasurable data, as opposed to non-measurable data such as messages, time, and so forth),OPAS32 also applies any assigned color scheme to the icons. If the icons you are using arealready colored, colors may not appear as you would expect them to appear.

To ensure that color scheme colors are applied to icons representing color columns, it isrecommended that you create solid black icons, like the ones in the previous examples. Onthe other hand, if you want a symbol scheme to represent non-measurable data such asmessages, keep in mind that color schemes cannot be applied to this type of data. In thiscase, it is recommended that you create colored icons.

Mapping an Exception LayerThe Result column of an exception layer is mappable after creating a map for any thedevices that produced the exception. As mentioned in "Creating an Exception Layer SymbolScheme"in Lesson 2, you can apply a symbol scheme created specifically for each exceptionlayer. This section explains how to map an exception layer.

Exception Layer Button� To map an exception layer:

1. Begin by mapping any column from the device that originated the exceptionlayer.

2. From the resulting map display, click the Exception Layer button. If more thanone exception layer has been defined for this device and layer, an ExceptionLayer Properties dialog box displays, allowing you to select the layer whoseResult column you want to display on the map, and also select a custom symbolscheme created for the exception layer, if applicable. In this case, there was onlyone exception layer, so it was immediately mapped.



Figure 4-40. The original map in this picture was created by mapping the table. The down-arrowicons are a symbol scheme that was created for the exception layer using a .WMF graphic that issupplied with OPAS32. By using the Overlay Manager to drag the original map below the exceptionlayer map, we were able to clearly display the icons on top of the original map line to show the Out ofCoverage areas in the test run.

Instructions: Using TrainAmps1.oif, perform the steps below. You must haveperformed Quick Quiz exercises 9, 10, and 11 in Lesson 2 in order to perform thesteps below. To check your answers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes.”15. In Quick Quiz Step 10, you displayed a map of the dBm column using the dBm-Char

symbol scheme you created. Leaving that map displayed, map the AMPSInterference Exception layer, using the Amps Interference Symbol Scheme. Makesure the x and y Track Offsets are set to 0 (zero).

16. Use drag-and-drop to display this new map sheet on top of the dBm map sheet thatwas already displayed.



Using the Info Tool to Play a Map RouteWithin a map, the Info tool allows you to play the map route as if you were using an audioor video tape player. This section explains how to use the features of the Info tool within amap.

Information Tool Button� To display information:

1. Click the Information tool button.

2. Point to a data point on the map, then click the left mouse button.

The Record Information window is displayed.

Figure 4-41. The Record Information window displays column data for aselected point in a route map. You can change which columns are displayedby usint the Add or Delete Columns button.

This window displays all of the record data for the selected data point. TheRecord Information window also provides a Playback feature, which moves anarrow through the map data in row order. As the arrow traces the map data, theRecord Information window changes to reflect the information for each point onthe map.



3. Click the Add or Delete Columns button to display the Select Columns dialogbox.

Figure 4-42. By default, all columns are selectedfor display. To remove a column, simply click thecheck box to remove the check mark.

In this dialog box, you can add or remove columns to be displayed in the InfoTool, or select all columns by clicking the Select All Columns check box.

4. Point to another data point to see its information in the Record Informationtoolbox.

The Record Information Toolbox remains open on the window after a record isselected. You can close the toolbox or drag it off to the side while you do othermap operations. To see information on another record, just select theInformation button and point at the desired data point.



� To use the Playback feature tool buttons:Use the Playback tool buttons as follows:

Button Function DescriptionBeginning Rewind to the first point in the map. The

information for the first point in the map displaysin the box.

Fast Reverse Move arrow rapidly backward through the map.The information for each point changes quickly toshow each point’s values.

Play Reverse Move the arrow backward through the map atnormal playback speed. The information foreach point changes at the same speed to showeach point’s values. While playing, you can clickon any point on the map to move the arrow tothat point and resume play.

Play Forward Move the arrow forward through the map atnormal playback speed. The information foreach point changes at the same speed to showeach point’s values. While playing, you can clickon any point on the map to move the arrow tothat point and resume play.

Fast Forward Move arrow rapidly forward through the map.The information for each point changes quickly toshow each point’s values.

Note: The Info tool can automatically display lines from serving cell,neighbors, and other cells to the test data when in any of the playmodes (Fast Reverse, Play Reverse, Play Forward, and Fast Forward).You must have a Cell Site database loaded, and the table must containa column called “Serving Cell,” which contains the name of the servingcell for each location in the map. From the Tools menu, select Optionsand the Map2 tab to set the line colors for easy identification.

End Jump to the last point in the map. Theinformation for the last point in the map displaysin the box.

Pause Temporarily stop playback. To resume in thesame direction and at the same speed, press thisbutton again. Or, press any of the buttons toperform the button’s specified action.

Stop Stop playback. The arrow and data identify thepoint being played when the Stop button waspressed.

Add or DeleteColumns

Change the columns that are displayed in theInfo Tool when a route map is being played.



Instructions: With the map that is already displayed on your screen from the last QuickQuiz, perform the steps below. To check your answers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers toQuick Quizzes.”17. Start the Info tool.18. Lengthen the Info box so you can see more information.19. Drag the Info box anywhere that it does not block your view of the route map.20. Making sure you are starting at the first point in the route map (in the upper, left

portion of the map), play the route information until the arrow is at the beginning of thehorizontal portion of the route.

21. Speed up the playback, stopping at the end of the horizontal portion of the route.22. Move the arrow to the last point in the route map.

Inserting BitmapsIn addition to the street maps supported in OPAS32, you can also underlay any bitmap(.BMP) file on a map. This feature is helpful any time you want to use a custom illustration.It is often used to provide blueprint images when a test run is performed in a building. Thissection explains how to place a bitmap on your map.

Bitmap Tool� To use a bitmap (.BMP) file:

1. From the Map display Toolbar, click the Bitmap Tool. Note that this buttonappears identical to the Map Bitmap button; however, this one is located in thesame toolbar as the Annotation tool, Freehand tool, and so forth.

2. Point at the starting corner for the bitmap, then click and hold the left mousebutton.



3. Drag to the opposite corner for the bitmap, and release the mouse button. TheConfigure Bitmap dialog box is displayed.

Figure 4-43. The Configure Bitmap dialog box lets you identify thebitmap to be displayed as an underlay to the map. It also lets you alterthe location and appearance of the bitmap.

4. Use the Browse button to display a dialog box that lets you select a bitmap todisplay.

5. You can, optionally, change the starting point and the width, as well as rotate thebitmap. Click the Help button for details on these options.



6. Click the OK button. The bitmap appears as an underlay to the test run data.

Figure 4-44. In this illustration, we used the file, OFFICE2.BMP (inyour training folder) to show how a blueprint might be used to helpillustrate your data. Obviously, the test run data is not really from anin-building test. When you place the bitmap (steps 2 and 3), thestarting and ending points will affect the size of the bitmap and howwell the bitmap aligns with your test data. To place the bitmap exactlyas you want it, you can edit the bitmap, as discussed in "To change theappearance of the bitmap" in this section, or use the 2 Point PlaceBitmap popup menu option, as described on page 196.

Note: You can also use the 2 Point Place Bitmap option available on the right-click popupmenu. This option allows you to precisely place a bitmap as a map underlay by correlatingany two points on the selected bitmap graphic with two points in the map. Informationboxes walk you through each step of the process. For more information about the popupmenu, refer to “Using Map Popup Menus” beginning on page 195.

� To hide the bitmap from the display:

Map Bitmap Button1. Click the Map Bitmap button. Once a bitmap has been displayed it can be hidden

or re-displayed by clicking this button. Note that this button appears identical tothe Bitmap tool; however, this one is located in the same toolbar as the Show orHide Street maps button.

2. Alternatively, with the Bitmap tool active, you can right-click in the map todisplay a popup menu, and select the Hide Bitmap option.



� To remove the bitmap from the display:With the Bitmap tool active, right-click in the map to display a popup menu, andselect the Remove Bitmap option.

� To change the appearance of the bitmap:1. With the Bitmap tool active, left-click in the map to display the Configure

Bitmap dialog box. This is the same dialog box that displayed when you firstaccessed the bitmap.

2. You can change to a different bitmap with the Browse button, change the startingpoint and size of the bitmap, rotate the bitmap, or flip it. Click the Help buttonfor a complete description of your options.

Note: If the bitmap is not within the extents of the RF data, it will NOT be displayed.

Viewing Data from Multiple Test Run FilesThe Advanced File Retrieval System (AFRS) lets you merge or open from multiple test runsbased on geodetic extents, time extents, and/or channel ranges. This section identifiestypical uses of AFRS, describes how to set up for its use, and explains how to use it.

Typical Uses for AFRSAFRS allows you to retrieve any existing .OIF file based on certain criteria. The followinglist identifies some typical reasons why you might want to use AFRS:

● To locate an .OIF File: Let’s say you collected data in the Chicago area back inJanuary, 1994. Now, you run another test of the same area, and you see problems thatmay be similar to the ones you found in the earlier test. Even if you no longer recall the.OIF filename for the earlier test, AFRS can help you to locate it based on other optionalparameters like the date, channel numbers, and so forth.

● To view changes to the same geographic area over time: You might examine ageographic area where you know the cellsite configuration has been modified over thelast several months. In this case, you would identify the geodetic extents and the timeperiod that you want to examine.

● To compare data for a range of channels or frequencies over a specific time period:You can have AFRS display records for a specific range of channels or frequencies for agiven time period.



Setting up for AFRSBefore you use AFRS, you must load test run files into the AFRS database. The files youload will be the ones that AFRS looks at when performing its selection.

� To load files into AFRS:

Note: If you have changed and saved an .OIF file that is included in your AFRSdatabase, you should re-load it into AFRS using these procedures.

1. From the File Menu, select Advanced File Retrieval. This displays a drop-downmenu with three options.

2. From the drop-down menu, select Load to display the Open dialog box.

Figure 4-45. You can use standard Windows selection techniques to select multiple filesfrom the Open dialog box. As a reminder, the SHIFT key on your keyboard lets youselect a range of files by clicking on the first and last file, and the CTRL key lets youselect multiple files one at a time.

3. Hold down the SHIFT or CTRL keys as you click on the files you want to select.

4. Click the Open button to load the files.

5. (Optional) If you want to load files from multiple folders into the AFRSdatabase, you can repeat steps 1 through 4 above, specifying different folders inthe Open dialog box. OPAS32 will append any selections to the existingdatabase.



� To remove files from the AFRS database:

Note: If you have deleted a file from your hard drive, you should also delete it fromAFRS using these procedures.

1. From the File Menu, select Advanced File Retrieval. This displays a drop-downmenu with three options.

2. From the drop-down menu, select Delete to display the List of Test Runs to beDeleted dialog box.

Figure 4-46. This dialog box displays all files that are currently in the AFRS database.You can use standard Windows selection techniques to select multiple files that youwant to delete. Deleting the files removes them from the AFRS database only—it doesnot remove the files from your disk.

3. Hold down the SHIFT or CONTROL keys as you click on the files you want toselect for deletion.

4. Click the OK button to delete the files.

5. A message box displays asking you to confirm whether or not you want to deletethe specified files. Click the Yes button to delete them, or click the No button toexit without deleting the specified files.

Tip: You can use the AFRS Delete option any time you want to identify which files arecurrently loaded into AFRS. Simply display the Lists of Test Runs to be Deleted dialog boxas described above, view the files, and then click the Cancel button to exit withoutperforming a deletion.



Retrieving Data with AFRS

Retrieve Button� To retrieve data:

1. With a map displayed, click the Retrieve button.

2. Point to the first point on the map that you want included in the retrieval, thenclick and hold the left mouse button as you drag a rectangle to indicate the areayou want to cover in the retrieval.

3. Release the left mouse button to display the AFRS Wizard – Step 1 of 3 dialogbox.

Figure 4-47. The AFRS Wizard displays three dialog boxes that walk you through the selectionprocess. The first dialog box is where you select the area. You can select the area byhighlighting it on your map as we did in this example. You can also change the coordinates bytyping them in the fields provided.



4. You can use the Select Lat/Lon from Street Map button to open a map tohighlight the area. When done, click the Next button to display Step 2 of 3.

Figure 4-48. Step 2 lets you select the beginning and ending dates and times of the test runs tobe selected. The default times are the time extents of all test runs in AFRS. The defaultbeginning date is the earliest date in all available test runs. The default end date is the latestdate in all available test runs. The default start time -- 00:00:00 -- is the earliest time in allavailable test runs. The default end time is the latest time on the latest date in all available testruns.

5. Change the dates and times as necessary using a 24-hour clock (for example,1:00pm is entered as 13:00:00). When done, click the Next button to displaythe Step 3 of 3 dialog box.

Figure 4-49. Step 3 of 3 lets you narrow down the selection to a range of channels orfrequencies.



6. (Optional) You can enter a range of channel numbers or frequencies using wholenumbers to specify channels (for example, 313 to 316) or decimal values tospecify frequencies in MHz (for example: 1867.0 to 1868.0). If you omit thedecimal place when specifying a frequency the AFRS Wizard will assume youare identifying a range of channels.

7. (Optional) You can use the Channel Style drop down list box to identify thechannel style that you want selected. If you do not select a channel style, theAFRS Wizard will select all channel styles. When done, click the Finish buttonto display the List of Test Runs dialog box.

Figure 4-50. The test run files in AFRS that contain data that matches a criteria searchdisplay in this dialog box in alphabetical order. You use this dialog box to select thefiles you want to include and to identify the operation that you want to perform on thefiles.

8. You can select or de-select files to include in the selection. You can also selectan operation to perform, as follows:

● Open Files: Open the files immediately for viewing.

● Merge Files: Merge a group of files into a single test run file for viewing. The Mergewizard starts for additional selections within the merge function.

● Merge TQNM Call Statistics for TQNM Files: When TQNM files are present,choose to view Call Statistics in an Excel spreadsheet and graph. TQNM Call Statisticsdialog boxes display that let you select how the call statistics should be merged.



Using Map Popup MenusOPAS32 offers a variety of popup menus that provide convenient access to many of theactivities that you have already learned about. You can access these popup menus bypointing to a specific area of the window and clicking the right mouse button ("right-clicking"). This section identifies the popup menus that are available from the Map view.

The following options are available from a popup menu that is displayed when right-clickingwithin the Map window.

? For how-to instructions on any of the popup menu options, from the Help menu, select theIndex option. Then, click on the Index tab, and search for Popup. You can click on any ofthe selections on the illustration of the popup menu to display its help topic.

Menu Option Description Right-Click in This AreaCurrent Info. Displays current information

about the test run.On a data point on the map. Ifyou right click in an area that isaway from the data points in theroute, the Current Informationoption does not display in thepopup window.

Sheet Properties Displays the Layer Propertiesdialog box so you can customizeit for the selected Data Track.

On a Data Track in the map.

Color Scheme Displays the Select ColorScheme dialog box, from whichyou can select or edit a colorscheme.

Anywhere in the Map pane.

Go to RelativeTable

Displays the Table view for thedata currently displayed on themap.


(New Feature) Goto Relative Graph

If the selected column alreadyexists in an open graph, thegraph is displayed. If not, thisoption creates a graph, usingTime as the X-axis. If no time isavailable, Sequence Number isused as the X-axis.

On the data track in the MapPane that you want to graph.

Synchronize Synchronizes all applicable tableand graph data with the point youselected. If you have a table orgraph of the same layer open,the data will scrollin both views todisplay the selected data point.

On selected data on a data track.After synchronizing, you can usethe Go To Relative Table popupmenu option, click on the Titlebar of the table, or select thetable from the Window menu,and the selected data will bevisible without the need forscrolling to it.



Menu Option Description Right-Click in This AreaSymbol Wizard Starts the Symbol Wizard, which

lets you create a variety ofcharacter- or icon-based symbolschemes.


Retrieve… Displays the Advanced FileRetrieval System (AFRS) Wizard.This Wizard allows you to entercriteria for selection of test runfile(s) based on geodetic extents,time extents and/or channelranges, as described in “ViewingData from Multiple Test RunFiles” on page 189.


Invert Selection This option de-selects any maparea that is currently selected,and selects everything else. Ifnothing on the map is selected,this option selects the entiremap, and if the entire map isselected, this option de-selects it.


Map options Displays the Map Options dialogbox. Once it is displayed, youcan access any of the Optionstabs.


2 Point PlaceBitmap

Allows you to precisely place abitmap as a map underlay bycorrelating any two points on theselected bitmap graphic with twopoints in the map. Informationboxes walk you through eachstep of the process.

Anywhere in the Map pane. TheBitmap tool must be selectedbefore this option will appear.

Hide Bitmap /Show Bitmap

Hide Bitmap removes an existingbitmap from the display withoutdeleting it.

Show Bitmap displays apreviously-hidden bitmap.

Anywhere in the Map pane, butthese options only display asappropriate, based on whetherone or more bitmaps aredisplayed or hidden. The Bitmaptool must be selected.

Horizontally FlipBitmap

Flips a bitmap so the left andright sides are reversed.

Anywhere in the Map pane, butthis option only displays when abitmap is displayed, and theBitmap tool is selected..

Vertically FlipBitmap

Flips a bitmap so the top andbottom are reversed.

Anywhere in the Map pane, butthis option only displays when abitmap is displayed, and theBitmap tool is selected..



Menu Option Description Right-Click in This AreaRotate Bitmap Opens the Degrees to Rotate by

dialog box for entry of the desiredrotation for the current bitmap.The point of rotation is the pointaround which the rotation occurs.

The rotation is the anglerepresented by a vertical line inthe map pictures, in degreesclockwise from due north. Forexample, if rotation is set to 5°, itmeans that a vertical line on themap is at an angle 5° clockwisefrom north; If rotation is set to -5°, the vertical line on the map isat an angle that is negative 5°(counterclockwise) from verticalor at an angle 355° clockwisefrom vertical.

Note: Bitmap rotation is notcurrently available with Windows95.

Anywhere in the Map pane, butthis option only displays when abitmap is displayed, and theBitmap tool is selected.

Edit Bitmap Info. Opens the Configure map dialogbox for entry of position, widthand rotation information for thecurrent bitmap.


Delete Bitmap Deletes the bitmap graphic at thecurrent cursor location.


Producing Map OutputOPAS32 offers the same output options for maps as it does for tables and graphs. Thissection explains how to use them.



Copying Data for Use in Other SoftwareYou can copy your map to the Windows Clipboard for use in other software.

� To copy and paste a map:1. With the map formatted as you want it to appear in the other software, select

Copy from the Edit menu.

2. Open the other software (for example, spreadsheet, graphic, or word processing),and open or create the file you want to paste to.

3. From the software's Edit menu, select Paste.

PrintingOPAS32 offers a variety of print and page setup options.

Modifying the Format of Printed Maps (Page Setup)� To modify the printed map format:

1. From the File menu, select Page Setup to display the Page Setup dialog box.

Figure 4-51. The Page Setup dialog box lets you customize how yourmaps look when they are printed.

2. Establish the print settings by using the tabs.

For details on changing the print settings common to all views, refer to"Modifying the Format of Printed Tables" in Lesson 2.



3. Page Setup for the Map View provides a Legend tab that allows you to identifywhat information should print in the map legend.

Figure 4-52. Legend tab lets you identify which legends should be printed.

Click the check boxes for those legends that you want to print.

4. Finally, the Print Type tab lets you identify the scale to use when printing themap.

Figure 4-53. The Page Setup dialog box lets you customize how yourmaps look when they are printed.



● Select the Print to Fit Window option if you will normally be printing all ofthe map information in the map window. The resulting printout will includethe displayed legend panes and the main map window pane.

● Select the Print to Scale option if you will normally be printing test run datadisplayed on the map window as an overlay to use with an existing mapprojection. Reference Point refers to the latitude/longitude intersection onthe overlay page and where that point is to be positioned on the printedoverlay. The reference point is used when placing the overlay on the mapprojection.

· Scale:1 - The value entered for the scale is taken from the scale legend onthe map projection.

· Latitude/Longitude - Indicates the location of the selected referencepoint.

· Reference Point - The location (center, upper right, upper left, lowerright, lower left) on which to place the latitude/longitude intersection onthe printed page

5. When you have completed your changes, click the OK button.

Previewing the Map Before PrintingYou can view the printed map on screen before printing it.

� To preview the map:1. From the File menu, select Print Preview to display the Print Type dialog box.

Figure 4-54. The Print Type dialog box lets you specify how you want the map toprint. You can set it up for use as an overlay for use with an existing mapprojection, or just control how much will print on a page.



2. Identify how the printed map should appear by selecting one of the followingradio buttons:● Print to Fit Window: All of the map information in the map window prints,

including the displayed legend panes and the main map window pane.● Print To Scale: Use this option if you are printing test run data displayed on

the map window as an overlay to use with an existing map projection. TheReference Point refers to the latitude/longitude intersection on the overlaypage and where that point is to be positioned on the printed overlay. Thereference point is used when placing the overlay on the map projection.

3. If you select Print to Scale, you must specify what you want to print and where itshould print, as follows:● Scale 1: You can enter a value to scale the view print area. The value you

enter represents how many inches on the ground are represented by one inchon the map. For example, since a mile is 63,360 inches, a scale of 1:63,360would print a mile in one inch of space. This field initially displays the lastvalue entered for the scale.

● Latitude/Longitude: Enter the location of the selected reference point.● Reference Point: Select the location (center, upper right, upper left, lower

right, lower left) on which to place the latitude/longitude intersection on theprinted page.

Note: Print Preview offers a View Print Area feature. When you click on thePrint to Scale option, a rectangle appears on the map behind the dialog box,showing the print area and location on the map based on what you enter. Forexample, if you increase the Scale 1 value, the rectangle size increases.

You can change the location of the print area on the fly by clicking and holdingthe left mouse button anywhere within the rectangle on the map and dragging to anew location. Whatever portion of the map is outlined by the rectangle is theportion that will print.

4. Click the OK button to display a preview of the map printout.

Instructions: Using the map that displayed from the last quick quiz, perform the stepsbelow. To check your answers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes.”

23. Change the print font for footers to any character font other than the one currentlyselected.

24. Create a footer that shows the long date (today's date), the file name, and the longcollection date. Make sure you include appropriate text and punctuation to ensurethat the data in the footer is easy to understand.

25. Use Print Preview to view the resulting printout.



Printing the Map

Print button� To print the map:

1. From the File menu, choose Print, or choose the Print button on the toolbar todisplay the Print Type dialog box.

2. Complete this dialog box as described in "Previewing the Map Before Printing"on page 200.

3. Click the OK button to display the standard Print dialog box, which allows you toprovide any specifics about your printer or printer options.

4. Click the OK button in the Print dialog box to send the map to the printer.

Other Map View OptionsThis section provides an overview of other OPAS32 options that are available for the MapView and identifies where to go for more information.

API Commands Used with MapsOPAS32 offers a complete set of Advanced Programming Interface (API) commands usedspecifically to manipulate maps and map data. The map-related API objects are as follows:

API Object Used ForGSMMapView Object Commands specifically available for scripting

features in GSM maps.

MapView Object Commands for performing all map activities.

MapViewPageSetup Object Setup activities for the printed map page, as set inthe Page Setup option from the File menu.

StreetMapViewSet Object Commands specifically available for scriptingfeatures associated with Tracking Phones.

TrackMapView Object Commands available for scripting actionsassociated with Tracking phones.

MapTool Contr Object Commands available for scripting actionsassociated with the Map Tool features in OPAS32maps.

In addition to these map-specific APIs, commands that can be used for maps and other viewsare provided in other object types, such as commands related to the OPAS32 object, thePageSetup object, the TestRun object, and the View object.



Lesson 5 ▪ Analyzing Data

What You Will Learn in this LessonHow to Use This Lesson

This section explains how to use the case studies presented in this lesson tosee how to use OPAS32's features to identify areas of concern revealed intest run data for different technologies and analyze the reasons forquestionable data.

Analyzing Analog DataThis section provides a case study of AMPS data analysis. It shows you howto use OPAS32 to quickly identify questionable areas in the test data andhelp determine causes. The drive test was performed in the Chicago area,and it contains TQNM (Total Quality Network Measurement) data, whichprovides both forward and reverse information, which is very helpful whenanalyzing areas in the route.

Analyzing CDMA DataThis section provides a case study of CDMA data analysis. It shows you howto use OPAS32 to quickly identify questionable areas in the test data andhelp determine causes. The drive test was performed in the Chicago area.

Analyzing GSM DataThis section provides a case study of GSM data analysis. It shows you howto use OPAS32 to quickly identify questionable areas in the test data andhelp determine causes. The demo files were obtained from a drive testperformed in the United Kingdom.

How to Use This LessonThis section explains how to use the case studies presented in this lesson to see how to useOPAS32's features to identify areas of concern revealed in test run data for differenttechnologies and analyze the reasons for questionable data.

In the previous lessons, you learned how to operate the OPAS32 software. In this lesson,you will examine case studies that demonstrate how to use the techniques you have learnedto analyze test data collected for different technologies. Each technology is covered in adifferent section of the lesson, as summarized in the “What You Will Learn in the Lesson”information above. Although it might be helpful to review the case studies for all thetechnologies, you may prefer to concentrate on the sections that relate to the technologies ofconcern to your organization.



Analyzing Analog DataThis section provides a case study of AMPS data analysis. It shows you how to use OPAS32to quickly identify questionable areas in the test data and help determine causes. The drivetest was performed in the Chicago area, and it contains TQNM (Total Quality NetworkMeasurement) data, which provides both forward and reverse information, which is veryhelpful when analyzing areas in the route.

Setting Up for this AnalysisThe following files were used in this analysis:

● TrainAmpsAnalysis.oif

● Chi_Il.map

Although no Quick Quizzes are included in this lesson, you should still load these files soyou can follow along with the analyses at your computer.

Teach Yourself OPAS32 Icon� To load the files to your training folder:

1. Double-click on the Teach Yourself OPAS32 icon.

2. Follow the instructions in the first dialog box to register your Training ID anddisplay the Training Setup dialog box.

3. Click the Lesson 5 button from the Training Setup dialog box.

4. Click the Analog button from the Lesson 5 Setup dialog box.

These steps will load the correct files into your Training folder and temporarily createspecial symbol and color schemes needed for the Analog analysis. When you exitOPAS32 after going through the analysis, the original symbol and color schemes willautomatically be restored.

Remember: Detailed information about how lesson setup works, includingillustrations of all the dialog boxes you see during lesson setup, are provided in theSetting Up for Training section of the "Before You Begin" lesson.



Identifying Potential Areas of Concern in the Route

New Map ButtonThe first thing you want to do in any analysis is to quickly identify questionable areas in thedrive test route being examined. The best way to do this is to assign a color scheme, whichlets you see questionable data at a glance. Here’s how we set up for our initial analysis.

1. First, we opened the file TrainAmpsAnalysis.oif (automatically done by the TrainingProgram), and created a map of the dBm column of the Portable #1 table by activatingthe Portable #1 table, selecting the dBm column, and then clicking the New Map button.(We could have selected the New Map option from the Operations menu instead ofusing the button.)

2. Next, from the Edit Menu, we selected the Color Schemes option, and selected theSigStr color scheme by highlighting it and clicking the Apply button. (We could haveright-clicked in the map pane and selected Color Scheme from the popup menu insteadof using the Edit Menu.) To see the color legend, we clicked on the Legends & Colorstab in the Overlay Manager, and dragged the left edge of the pane to the left to widen thedisplay.

Figure 5-1. Assigning a color scheme is a good way to quickly identify problem areas in the route. If youare following along at your computer, you will see that the circled area colors are primarily pink (signifyinga dBm value of –105 or lower) and red (signifying a dBm range of –105 to –100). By loading a Cell Sitedatabase (we used the fictitious file, TrainAmps1.mdb, available in your Training folder), you can also seethe location of the cell sites for the area.

Possible ProblemArea

Cell Site



If you are following along at your computer, you can see that the map shows areas ofweak signal strength in the portion circled in Figure 5-1. Note that these low signals arethe signals seen by the tracker; thus, they would be the same signals that your customerwould see. If the Signal to Noise and Distortion (SINAD) values are also questionablefor this area, there is a potential need for network/antenna changes to this area. We willlook at this later in the analysis. The cause of a problem might be seasonal; for example,the weak signal strength may be caused by leaves on trees in the area. The engineerneeds to take the physical properties of the route into account when identifying thecauses and possible solutions for problem areas revealed in the map.

SAFCO Technologies also offers WIZARD, an excellent propagation modeling tool thatcan help you design and optimize your network.

Identifying Problems with TQNM (Total Quality NetworkMeasurement)

Not all data collection devices capture TQNM data; however, if TQNM data is available inthe .OIF file (as it is in the TrainAmpsAnalysis.oif file), you can display more detail aboutthe calls with TQNM symbols. To display TQNM symbols, you could click the TQNMbutton, which would show the symbols set up in the Maps tab of Tools | Options. We'regoing to take a different approach, so we can see the actual TQNM class values instead ofgraphic symbols.

Setting up a TQNM Class Column Symbol SchemeWe're going to set up a symbol scheme that displays the text values in the TQNM Classcolumn directly on the map.

� To set up a Values as Symbols scheme:1. From the Edit menu, select Symbol Wizard to display the Create or Modify

Symbol Scheme dialog box.

2. Since we want to create a new symbol scheme, which is the default, simply clickthe Next> button to display the Symbol by Value or Fixed Symbol dialog box.

3. Select the Symbol by Value radio button to indicate that the symbol scheme willbe based on column values. Then, click the Next> button to display the SelectLayer dialog box.

4. Click the plus signs in both the TrainAmpsAnalyis.oif line and on the AMPSPortable #1 line. Then, click the TQNM check box, and click the Next> buttonto display the Select Columns dialog box.

5. The columns you select in this dialog box will determine the values that will beused for your symbol scheme. In this case, we want our symbol scheme based onthe value of the Class column, so double-click on Class in the left box to move itto the right box. Then, click the Next> button to display the Select Symbol MapType dialog box.



6. Click the Use Column Value(s) as Symbol radio button to indicate that you wantthe actual column values displayed on the map. Then, click the Finish button todisplay the Save Scheme dialog box.

7. Enter TQNM Class in this dialog box, and click the OK button to save thesymbol scheme and exit the Symbol Wizard.

Adding a Data Track to the MapWe're going to add a new data track to overlay the new symbol scheme on top of the mapthat is already displayed. In this way, we can see the problem areas indicated by the colorscheme, while also seeing the text describing the call classes.

Add Data Track Button� To add a new Data Track:

1. Click the Add Data Track button to display the Layer Properties dialog box.

2. Complete this box by selecting the TQNM layer, the Class Color Column, andthe TQNM Class Values Symbol Scheme. The click the OK button to displaythe map with the new symbol scheme overlaid.

Figure 5-2. We zoomed in on the problem area to more clearly see the Class values. In the OverlayManager, we also dragged the Class Map Sheet on top of the data track that was already displayed andchanged the font to Arial Black to ensure that the text showed up clearly.

By zooming in on the problem area, you can see that, although there were no dropped callsin this segment, there were several occurrences of noisy calls, potentially caused by crosstalk or adjacent channel interference.

Noise



As indicated in the caption, we did several things to ensure that the TQNM Class valuesdisplayed clearly. You can do various other things as well to make the TQNM data standout in the map display, such as removing the display of RF data, turning off or reducing thedisplay of streets, and removing annotations, markers, and other layers in the map.

Figure 5-3. By unchecking the dBm column in the Overlay Manager, we temporarily removed its display inthe map pane. We also used Tools | Options and clicked the Street Maps tab to display only major streetsin the display.

� To further simplify the display:

Annotation, Cell Site Name, Cell Site Symbol,Marker, Event, Handoff, and StreetMaps Buttons1. From the Tools menu, select Options, click on the Street Maps tab, and in the

Street Level box, de-select everything except Major Roads. Alternatively, youcan temporarily turn off the entire map display by clicking the StreetMapsbutton.

2. If any of the the Annotation, Cell Site Name, Cell Site Symbol, Marker, Event,and Handoff Buttons, are selected, and if you do not need to view these items forthis part of the analysis, click the buttons to de-select the display of these optionsto help you get a better view of the questionable area.

Note: Some of the buttons shown in the above list may not display on your map.Some of the buttons that display depend on whether the item controlled by the button isin use. For example, No Cell Site Name or Cell Site Symbol buttons display if a cellsite database is not in use.



Using Exception Reporting to Find InterferenceOPAS32 is pre-supplied with a collection of Exception Reports so you can create specialexception layers to show very specific data. In this portion of the analysis, we are going touse the AMPS Interference Exception Report. Keep in mind that you can define your owncustom exception layers, as described in Lesson 2.

� To identify available Exception Reports:1. From the Window menu, select the Portable #1 table.

2. From the Operations menu, select Exception Reporting to view the ExceptionReporting dialog box.

Figure 5-4. The Exception Reporting dialog box lets you view the definitionsof any listed Exception Report. You can also assign a symbol scheme andgenerate the Exception Layer(s) directly from here.



3. Click on AMPS Interference, and click the View Details button to view theException Settings dialog box.

Figure 5-5. As you learned in Lesson 2, this dialog box lets you see the definition for any ExceptionReport. In this case, any row that contains a dBm column value of less than –95, an Upr Chnl columnvalue greater than –100, and a Lwr Chnl value greater than –100 will be selected for the layer. In additionto the standard columns (Latitude, Longiture, Sequence, and Time), this layer will contain the columnsshown in the Columns in Layer box at the bottom of the dialog box.

4. Click the Close button to return to the Exception Reporting dialog box.



� To assign symbols to an Exception Report:1. Since the AMPS Interference report is already selected, click the Symbol Wizard

button to display the Edit Symbol Mapping dialog box.

Figure 5-6. The Edit Symbol Mapping dialog box lets you set up a symbol scheme for the selectedException Report in much the same manner as you learned in Lesson 4. We set up an Icon symbolscheme and selected a red down arrow to identify areas of interference on the map.

2. Once the symbol scheme is set up, click the Finish button. OPAS32automatically prompts you to save the symbol scheme, and supplies theException Report name as a default symbol scheme name. You can type adifferent name, if you want to, but we accepted the default for this example.

� To generate the Exception Report:1. Use the bottom portion of the Exception Reporting dialog box to drill down to

the device(s) for which you want to create this new layer. Although you canselect as many devices as you want, we selected the Portable #1 device alone.

2. Click the Evaluate button. The dialog box does not change in any way.

3. Click the Close button to return to the table.



� To view the exception layer:From the Portable #1 table, use the Layer drop-down box to select AMPS Interference– (RSS).

Figure 5-7. OPAS32 selected 13 rows that met the criteria defined in the AMPS Interference Exception Report.

Once all setup activities have been completed and you have generated the Exception Reportlayer, you can map the layer. You can actually create a map of this layer by selecting theResult column and creating a new map, but Exception layers tend to be more meaningfulwhen combined with one or more columns in the map. We decided to start by displaying thedBm layer, and then overlay the AMPS Interference exception layer.

New Map and Exception Buttons� To set up a map display:

1. Return to the RSS layer, select the dBm column, and click the New Map buttonto display this column in the map view.

2. Click the Exception button to display the new Exception Layer.

3. In the Overlay manager, double-click on the 2: Amps Interference button todisplay the Exception Layer Properties dialog box.

4. Select the AMPS Interference symbol scheme.



5. Click the OK button to re-display the map.

Figure 5-8. We zoomed in on the problem area and dragged the Result map sheet on top of the dBmmap sheet for best viewing. We noticed three arrows that indicated interference very near to each other.

Identifying the Strongest Single Channel (SSC)Now that we have identified areas of interference, we need to identify which channels areinterfering and compare the signal strength of the strongest channels with the channel inwhich the phone call resides. It is easy to set up another map sheet of a scanner’s SSCvalue, which will provide the information we need.



� To identify the strongest single channel in the interference area:1. First, we zoomed in on the interference arrows to get a close-up view. Then we

mapped the Scanner #5 device, plotting the Strongest Single Channel (SSC)value. We dragged this new map sheet on top of the Exception layer andunchecked all map sheets except SSC Value.

Figure 5-9. A look at the SSC values indicates that Channels 326 (a), 318 (L), and 325 (Y) are thestrongest in the area of interference. The color scheme indicates that both these channels' signalstrengths are much higher than the measurements we saw earlier when looking at Portable #1.



2. To compare this against the channels being used by the call, we created anothermap sheet of the Portable #1 device. This time, we unchecked the SSC Valuemap sheet to get a clear view of the channels being used by the phone.

Figure 5-10. Looking at the same area of the map, we can see that the call is using channels 318 (m), 244(e and d), and 73 (G). In all cases, the strongest single channel is not the channel being used by the call.



3. To see the whole picture, we re-displayed all four map sheets.

Figure 5-11. Looking at all four map sheets at once is easier now that we have looked at the map sheetsindividually. Between the symbols and the colors, this view confirms that the phone has not beenassigned to the strongest channel in the area. Therefore, the stronger channels are now imposinginterference on the channel in which the phone call resides.

At this point, the engineer should be thinking about which channels he or she expects to seein this area, and what the calculated values for dBm are for the channels shown. If anexpected channel is shown, you can look at the table or use the Info tool to determine if thesignal strength is within a good range. If an expected channel is not shown, then the signalis possibly too weak. In either case, the Linear Power Amplification Module can be turnedup, or an antenna can be downtilted to help improve coverage.

Similarly, if you see an unexpected channel, it may need to be powered down to avoid cross-talk or unexpected pinging (where voice channels being used by a mobile are handing offback and forth, causing the customer to experience many mutes or gaps in the conversation).

Reviewing SINAD or EMOS MeasurementsThe next step is to look at the forward and reverse SINAD measurements to see noise levelsfor the same area. It is important to note that the data in this test run was collected at a timewhen SAFCO data collection equipment supported SINAD measurements. Currentequipment supports EMOS for quality. In spite of this change, the concepts are easilytransferable from one measurement to the other.



� To view a map of the Forward SINAD Layer, Max column:1. Create a new map sheet of the Fwd. Noise[SINAD] layer.

2. Change the Column to Ave, which shows the average dBm values per bin.

3. Once the map is drawn, change the color scheme to SINAD.

A glance at the colors tells us that, overall, the values are in the low range, indicatingthat the quality received by the phone (forward SINAD) needs improvement. We canconfirm this by looking at the data.

One way to do this is to highlight the data in the map and view the information in therelative table.

� To view the relative table:

Select Rectangle and Select Circle Tools1. Click on the Select Rectangle tool. (You can also use the Select Circle tool,

which is a good choice if you want to view the radiated distance from anantenna.)

2. Left-click on the left most end of the data that we are examining, drag a rectangleto the right and downward, and then release the left mouse button. The line ishighlighted in the map.

3. Right-click on the highlighted area in the map to display a popup menu, andselect Go to Relative Table.



The table is displayed, and the rows representing the map’s highlighted data points arealso highlighted.

Figure 5-12. By seeing the highlighted data in the table, we can instantly see that the details behind theareas of concern in the route.

By looking at the Ave, Min, and Max columns within the highlighted data, we can seethat most values are quite low. We then re-activated the map by clicking on it. Wecould also have done this by right-clicking in the table, and selecting View RelativeMap from the popup menu.

Next, we want to look at the Reverse Noise [SINAD] by changing the ForwardSINAD map sheet to display the Reverse SINAD map sheet, Max column. To do this,we can use the same procedures (selecting Reverse rather than Forward SINAD)described in “To view a map of the Forward SINAD Layer, Max column:" on page217. This will tell us the quality received by the switch. Again, a quick look at thecolors in the area in question indicate that the data is within a good range. To confirmthis, we can look at the relative table, or we can get the same information with the Infotool.

� To use the Info Tool:

Info Tool1. Maximize the map, and click in the highlighted area of the map pane to clear the

selection from the last activity.

2. Click the Info tool.



3. Next, click the right-most point in the data we want to examine. For example,you might want to click the right edge of the segment before the interruption inthe line occurs. Note that the reason we are clicking on the right-most point isthat the drive test was moving from right to left.

4. Once the Info box is displayed, drag it by its title bar to move it away from themap. Then, make it longer by dragging the lower edge of the box downwarduntil all data for the starting point is displayed.

Tip: If you want to just view values for a single column, you can shorten the boxuntil only that column appears. When you play the map (see step 5), the data willshow only that column of data as the arrow moves through the route.

Figure 5-13. With the Info tool, you can display the data without leaving the map display.

5. Click the Play button. The arrow moves in the direction of the route, and the datain the Info box changes. If you watch the Max value, you will see that the data inthis segment is within a good range.

6. Click the Stop button to stop or pause Info tool playback, and click the X buttonin the Info Tool to close it.



Determining Where a Channel of a Cell Site PropagatesFederal Communications Commission (FCC) requirements dictate that you must broadcast achannel in an area in order to keep the channel active. OPAS32 helps you to determine ifyou are broadcasting at an acceptable signal strength by mapping voice channels.

Figure 5-14. Although the TrainAmpsAnalysis.oif file does not really provide voice channel data likeChannel 600 illustrated here, this channel could have been put into the scan list of your data collectiontool, allowing you to do this type of test.

By mapping a voice frequency, you can use the color scheme to see at a glance if the signalis too weak in any area. If there is a gap in the data on the map, this could be an indicationthat the area is receiving no signal at all. It is possible that you have reserved a frequencyfor use with a technology that you will deploy at some time in the future; however, if thatarea is not covered now, you could lose rights to it. One common practice is to broadcastthat frequency in the area to keep the frequency active.

Note: Keep in mind that both OPAS32 and SAFCO's WIZARD products also providevaluable ways to verify your own own calculations.

The two conversion formulas shown in the following table will help you to determine thefrequency for any channel for AMPS and NAMPS data only:



Converting from Channel Number to FrequencyTo convert for channel numbers 1 through 716:

Formula ExampleFrequency= 870.03Mhz

- ((1 – ChannelNumber)

* (.03 Mhz))

To determine the Frequency of Channel 215:

870.03Mhz- ((1 – 215) = -214* (.03 Mhz)) = -6.42= 876.45

To convert for channel numbers 991 through 1023:

Formula ExampleFrequency= 869.04Mhz

- ((Channel # - 991)* (.04 Mhz))

To determine the Frequency of Channel 995:

869.04Mhz- ((995 – 991) = 4* (.04 Mhz)) = .16= 868.88

Converting from Frequency to Channel NumberTo convert for frequencies greater than 870.03 Mhz:

Formula ExampleChannel # = ((Freq. – 870.03 Mhz)

/ ,03 Mhz)+ ((1 – Channel

Number)

To determine the Channel for Frequency 876.45

((876.45Mhz- 870.03) = 6.42/ (.03 Mhz)) = 214+ 1 = 215

To convert for frequencies less than 870.03 Mhz:

Formula ExampleFrequency= ((Freq - 869.04Mhz)

* -25)+ 991 Mhz)

To determine the Channel for Frequency 995:

((868.88- 869.04Mhz) = -.16* -25) = 4+ 991 Mhz = 995



Analyzing CDMA DataThis section provides a case study of CDMA data analysis. It shows you how to useOPAS32 to quickly identify questionable areas in the test data and help determine causes.The drive test was performed in the Chicago area.

Important: Only those users who are licensed for OPAS32 CDMA support will be able torun the analysis on their computers using the supplied files. However, this analysis canprovide information and identify techniques that might be suitable for any technology. Forinstance, the description of the CDMA Analysis Wizard may even be of interest to a GSMuser.

For those users who are not licensed for OPAS32 CDMA support, we suggest that you readthe text to learn about analysis techniques. You can practice many of the examples usingyour own data files, if desired.


● Train CDMAAnalysis.oif

● Train CDMA1.mdb






4. Click the CDMA Analysis button from the Lesson 5 Setup dialog box.

These steps will load the correct files into your Training folder and temporarily createthe special symbol schemes needed for the CDMA analysis. When you exit OPAS32after going through the analysis, the original symbol and color schemes willautomatically be restored.




Why Use the CDMA Analysis Wizard?CDMA phones capture an extensive amount of data for every call—more than an RFengineer would need for an initial analysis. After the initial analysis, where you may haveidentified areas of concern, you may want to see more data to help determine the cause ofthose areas of concern. With the CDMA Analysis Wizard you can build layers that containjust the data you need for the current analysis. If necessary, you can build new layers toperform a more detailed or different type of analysis at a later time. You can also useexisting layer definitions as templates for new ones by editing them and saving under newfilenames.

As you perform additional analyses, you will find that you repeatedly use layers you havepreviously created (either as-is, or with slight modifications) to make analyses increasinglyefficient over time.

Creating a New CDMA LayerThe CDMA Analysis Wizard allows you to create new layers from scratch, modify anexisting layer, or use an existing layer as a template for creating a new one, as you will seein this analysis. In this part of the analysis, you will see an overview of how we created ahandoff layer for use in this analysis.

Note: The Teach Yourself OPAS32 training program automatically creates this new CDMAlayer so it will be available to you as you proceed through this analysis. We recommend youread this section to see how the layer was created. If you want to follow along with theseinstructions on your computer, you can look at the TrainCDMA Handoff Layer, which canbe selected from the Wizard as described below.

� To start the CDMA Analysis Wizard:1. If any .oif files are currently open, you must close them before running the

CDMA Analysis Wizard. If necessary, from the Windows menu, select CloseAll Views.

2. From the File Menu, place the mouse arrow over Analysis Wizards to display alist of Analysis Wizard Choices.



3. From this list, select CDMA Analysis Wizard to display the Create or ModifyAnalysis dialog box.

Figure 5-15. The first step of the CDMA Analysis Wizard lets you create or modify an analysis.Notice that the on-screen instructions remind you that you can also modify an existing analysis asa starting point for creating a new analysis simply by saving it under a new file name.

Note: As mentioned earlier, to follow along with a completed example, we recommend thatyou select the TrainCDMA Handoff Layer from the list in this dialog box, and then click theNext> button to continue. Then, follow along by clicking the Next> button from one step tothe next. You will not have to change any information.



� To create a new analysis:Click the Next> button since the Create New Analysis option is the default selection.This displays the Select Time or Event Based Analysis dialog box.

Figure 5-16. The data selected for your analysis can be based on time, in which case, a row ofdata displays for every time interval (in this case, every 1000 milliseconds, or one second), or itcan be based on events, in which case a row of data displays each time an event (handoff,dropped call, or whatever you identify as an event trigger) occurs. If it is event-based, the Wizardautomatically provides the opportunity for you to define the event trigger later in the Wizard.



� To define a time-based analysis:Click the Next> button since a time-based analysis of 1000 milliseconds is the defaultoption. This displays the Select Source of Mobile Data dialog box.

Figure 5-17. Once again, the dialog box displays a reminder of important information. In this case,it explains that selecting the Yes option will make additional data available as you build youranalysis.

When you use SD5 data, OPAS32 can generate several other columns from the informationin the given columns. The following extra columns become available for your analysis:

● Handset FER

● Rx Vocoder Rate

● Tx Vocoder Rate

● Fwd MOS

● Rev MOS

● Avg Fwd MOS Over Call

● Avg Rev MOS Over Call

● Combined Avg MOS Over Call



The Select Source of Mobile Data dialog box provides the opportunity to use one or more ofthese additional data columns in your analysis. You are not required to use these extracolumns, but it generally makes sense to make them available in the event that you decide touse them. For the purposes of this analysis, however, we will not need the extra columns, sowe will bypass this option.

� To indicate that you do not want SAFCO Type5 data to be available foryour analysis:

Click the Next> button since the No option is the default. This displays the SelectBase Station Format dialog box.

� To indicate that you do not want to include columns from Base Stationdata in the layer:

Click the Next> button since the No option is the default. This displays the SelectColumns dialog box.



Figure 5-18. The Select Columns dialog box is where you identify the columns that you want toappear in your layer. You can select individual columns from the Available Columns box on theleft, and use the Add -> button to move them to the Selected Columns box on the right. Onceselected, you can use the Move up and Move Down buttons to customize the order that you wantcolumns to initially appear in when a table is displayed.

Keep the following objectives in mind when selecting columns for your new layer:

● Select all columns that you might want to see when performing a particular type ofanalysis (for example, a handoff analysis or a dropped call analysis) or combination ofcommonly-performed analyses.

● Set the column order so that columns that you would typically view together are neareach other. This avoids excessive scrolling of table data or moving columns when youperform an analysis. You can select columns in the order you want them to appear, oryou can use the Move up and Move Down buttons to change the location of a selectedcolumn.

● Columns can be chosen more than once. This can be very useful when combined withthe selective filtering options available on some column properties (for example, FERand Messaging). You can select different filtering options for each repetition of acolumn, and rename it to make it easily identifiable during the analysis.

We selected columns that could be needed when analyzing handoffs in a test run.

? For more detailed information about all of the options available in this dialog box, click theHelp button from this dialog box. From the Help window, click the CDMA button to seeinformation that is specific to CDMA data.



� To modify properties for any of the selected columns:1. Click the Next> button to display the Modify Column Properties dialog box.

Figure 5-19. Use this dialog box to display the current properties for any column in your analysis.If you want to change the properties for a column, simply select it from the Column Title box, andclick the Properties… button. As usual, the explanatory text in the dialog box reminds you of youroptions.

2. You can select any column from the Column Title drop-down box to see thecurrent properties, and you can change those properties by clicking theProperties… button.

Recommendation: One change that can help to pinpoint data more accurately is to changethe Time column to h:mm:ss.ssss.



3. Click the Finish> Button to display the Layer Definition Name dialog box.

Figure 5-20. Since you have only been reviewing an existing layerdefinition, you can click the Cancel button.

� To save the analysis:1. If you had been creating this layer definition for the first time, you would enter a

unique analysis name in the box in this dialog box.

2. Click the OK button to end the Wizard.

Expanding the New Layer

Note: Again, this work has been done for you. We recommend that you review this sectionto see the options that are available for displaying a layer definition created by the CDMAAnalysis Wizard. Remember: this layer definition already exists in yourTrainCDMAAnalysis.oif file.

Once you have created a layer definition, you can apply it to an existing .OIF file, or you canset up OPAS32 so that it will automatically be applied whenever you convert a .SD5 file to.OIF.

� To set up for automatic file conversion:1. From the Tools menu, select File Converter Options.

2. Click on the CDMA Layer Definition tab to display the Options dialog box.



Figure 5-21. The CDMA Layer Definition tab lets you add one or more custom layers at the same time asyou convert the .SD5 file to .OIF format. You can also specify certain preferences, as well as access theCDMA Analysis Wizard in the event that you want to change or create a layer on the fly.

3. To activate one or more layers, click on them in the CDMA Layer Definitionbox, and then click the Add button to move them to the box on the right. (Notethat the order in which layers appear in this list represent the order in which theywill appear in the drop-down selection list.)

4. New CDMA phones, like the ones used in SAFCO's equipment, do not requireCalibration (.CAL) files; the data is stored in the .SD5 file in a manner that doesnot require a .CAL file. Therefore, uncheck the Prompt for Calibation File checkbox.

5. Click OK to close the dialog box.

6. From the Tools menu, select Save Options if you want to save the settings so thelayer will automatically be created whenever you open CDMA SD5 files in thefuture. Note that the same File Converter settings are automatically saved in theFile Converter utility, as well. If we were converting multiple files, it would bemore efficient to use File Converter to perform this task.

Note: The number of CDMA Layer Definitions that you select for expansion affects thelength of time it takes to convert from .SD5 to .OIF format.

You are now ready to convert the TrainCDMAAnalysis.SD5 file to .OIF format. Since weare only converting one file for this analysis, we will use File | Open to do an automaticconversion.



� To convert the CDMA .SD5 file:

Reminder: Do not attempt to perform the following steps. They are provided forillustration purposes only.

1. From the File menu, select Open to display the Open dialog box.

2. If you were actually performing this process, you would double-click on theTrainCDMAAnalysis.SD5 file (not provided), to open it. There will be a delayas the conversion takes place. During this time, various messages report theprogress of the conversion in the lower left corner of the OPAS32 window.When conversion is complete, tables representing data from the two devices inthis test run appear on the screen.

Note that intermediary files are created during file conversion. If the definedlayer definition has mobile columns but no base station columns, you will get*.DM files. Layer definitions with both mobileand base station columns, get*.DM files for mobiles and *.BDM files for base station. These files can then beused for subsequent conversion to .OIF format for for expansion. In the eventthat you are re-opening a raw data file, you can elect to overwrite these fileswhen prompted.

Note: Before we begin the actual analysis, we will ask you to open theTrainCDMAAnalysis.oif file in order to follow along with the text from that point forward.

3. Click on the title bar for Tracker #2 to bring it to the front of the display.

Figure 5-22. Since 1000 ms Summary was the first layer we selected in Tools | File Converter options, itappears in the table by default. You can switch to the TrainCDMA Handoff Layer[Exp] by selecting it fromthe Layer drop-down box.



� To expand a layer so it appears in an existing .OIF file:

Reminder: Do not attempt to perform the following steps. They are provided forillustration purposes only.

1. From the table that you want to expand, use the drop-down box on the right toselect the new layer you want to create.

��

�

Figure 5-23. The three circled numbers show the steps for expanding an existing layer.

2. Click the button in the upper left corner of the table to select the entire table.Although it is not shown in this analysis, you can also expand a layer from asubset of the table data by selecting contiguous rows that you would like tofurther explore.

3. Click the Expand button. When processing is complete, the new layer will beavailable for selection in the Layer drop-down box. It will show the notation,[Exp] to indicate that it is an expanded layer.



Saving the New SettingsWhen you add expanded layers to an existing OIF file, you must save the .OIF file in orderto make the new layer a permanent part of the file. If you do not want to permanently retainthis new layer, you can eliminate this step.

� To save the changes:1. From the File Menu, select Save (to save the file under the original .OIF

filename) or Save As (to save the file under a new filename).

2. When the next dialog box asks you to select devices and layers to save, you canclick the OK button to save all devices and layers.

3. In the Save As dialog box (if you selected the Save As menu option), you canspecify the path and filename for the saved file.

Opening the FileNow that you have seen how new layers can be created using the CDMA Analysis Wizard, itis time to open the file and begin the analysis.

� To open the file:1. From the File menu, select the Open option to display the Open dialog box.

2. From the Open dialog box, switch, if necessary, to your training folder. Thenselect TrainCDMAAnalysis.oif to display this file in the Table View.

3. We will begin the analysis using the Tracker #2 table, so click on the title bar forthat table to activate it.

Creating the First Map ViewOne way to identify areas of concern is to use symbol schemes in a map. In this part of theanalysis, we will map the Handoff State column, format it to see if any interesting areas arerevealed, and determine the percentage of 2- and 3-way handoffs to identify areas of concernin the network.

New Map Button� To draw a map of the Handoff State column:

1. Click on the title bar for Tracker #2 to display the table.

2. Click the down arrow in the Layer field, and select the TrainCDMA Handofflayer[Exp].

3. Click on the title for the Handoff State column to select the entire column, andthen click the New Map button to create the map.



Figure 5-24. The first time you display a map, a default symbol scheme is automatically applied. Thisscheme uses the letter A to represent all data. As you can see, this symbol scheme does not provide anyclues about the handoff conditions of this test run.

4. To apply a symbol scheme, double-click on the Handoff State row in the OverlayManager to display the Data Layer Properties dialog box.



Figure 5-25. This tab of the Data Layer Properties dialog box lets you selectthe data to be displayed and the symbol scheme to be applied to it. You willuse some of the features of the Data Track Display tab later in this analysis.

5. Click on the down-arrow in the Symbol Scheme field, and select the CDMAAnalysis Handoff State scheme from the drop-down list.

6. Click the OK button to return to the map, which will re-draw with a symbolscheme.



Figure 5-26. We clicked on the Legends & Colors tab to view the symbol legend. If you are following along atyour computer, you will see that a green triangle represents no data, which indicates no handoffs in those areas.A yellow smiling face represents a 2-way handoff, and a red frowning face represents a 3-way handoff. Coloredicons were used for this scheme because, since we are mapping text values rather than measurable data, colorschemes cannot be applied to this column. As you can see, there are a substantial number of handoffs that willrequire further analysis.

Using Boolean Selection to Identify the Number of HandoffsFor this analysis, we have defined a goal of no more than 30 percent of calls should be in ahandoff state. Of that 30 percent, our goal is to virtually eliminate 3-way handoffs.Achieving these goals would create an optimized network.

Step 1 in achieving our goals is to determine the current handoff percentages, and this caneasily be done with the Boolean Selection tool.

� To analyze the percentage of 2-way handoffs:1. From the Operations menu, select the Select option to display the Boolean

Selection tool, and click the More>>> button to display all options.

2. In the Query: box, enter the expression, “Handoff State”=’2-way’.



3. We saved this query for future use by entering CDMA Analysis HandoffState in the Name box and clicking the Save button. Then we clicked theApply button to run the query.

Figure 5-27. After clicking the Apply button, we can seethat 2-way handoffs comprise 48.01 percent of the testrun. This is significantly above the 30 percent totalhandoff ceiling that we have set.

4. Next, we did the same thing for 3-way handoffs.

Figure 5-28. After clicking the Apply button, we can seethat 3-way handoffs comprise 15.11 percent of the testrun. Although there are less 3-way handoffs than 2-wayhandoffs, we want to get the network down to almost no 3-way handoffs.

With a total handoff rate of over 63 percent, it is clear that we need to do some work tooptimize the network.



Using a Cellsite Database to Analyze HandoffsAn excellent way to get a good visual overview of the network and see which cellsites arehanding off calls is to use a cellsite database and then use the Info tool to watch the handoffsas they occur in the test run.

We will be using a fictitious cellsite database for this part of the analysis so you can see howthis works.

� To set up for handoff viewing:1. Select Options from the Tools menu, and then click the Map2 tab so we can set

colors to represent different handoff sources. You will see how to play a routeand display the source of handoffs in “To play the route” on page 241.

Figure 5-29. As you will see, it is important to select a variety of colors to representeach type of handoff. Colors that are too similar may be difficult to distinguish when weplay the route for this analysis.

2. In the Colors of Lines to Cells box, assign five distinct colors. We assigned redto the Serving line, dark brown to the Neighbor line, purple to the Finger line,bright green to the Ec/Io line, and royal blue to the Other line. To assign colors,simply click the color button, and then select a color from the displayed pallette.



Note: The Colors of Lines to Cells buttons are designed to provide appropriate informationthat can be used with multiple technologies. For CDMA, the Serving button refers to theSrch Pilot PN column. The Ec/Io button actually refers to the Strongest PN column, whichmost closely reflects the reference PN.

3. Click the OK button. If you want to save the color changes for future OPAS32sessions, select Save Options from the Tools menu.

Now that the line colors have been assigned, it would also be helpful to use a differentsymbol scheme in order to minimize the appearance of the data track. This will make thehandoff lines more noticeable.

� To prepare the map for optimal handoff viewing:1. Double-click on the map sheet in the Overlay Manager to display the Data Layer


2. In the Symbol Scheme box, select CDMA Analysis Dots. This symbol scheme issimilar to the one we have been using; however, it is a character-based symbolscheme, with all values set to a period (.). As you will see, this will create a verysimple outline of the route, allowing us to see other things more clearly.

3. Click the OK button to return to the map.

Figure 5-30. With the new symbol scheme of just dots for all values, we get a simple outline of the testrun.

Now we have to load and display our cell site database.



Cell Site Name and Cell Site Symbol Buttons� To load and display the cell site database:

1. From the File menu, select Load Cell Site Database to display a submenu withtwo options.

2. Select the OPAS Format (cd2, mdb) option. This displays the Select CellsiteDatabase dialog box.

3. When prompted, select CDMACellExample.mdb, and then click the Openbutton.

4. Click the Cell Site Name and Cell Site Symbol Buttons to display the cell siteinformation on the map. Notice that a Cellsite layer appears in the OverlayManager.

Figure 5-31. Now that we can see all cell sites in the area, we are ready to see how they handle the calls inthe test run.

Info Tool button, Play Button, and Stop Button� To play the route:

1. Click the Info Tool button, and then click anywhere on the top line of the datatrack.



2. Click the title bar of the Info Tool, and hold the left mouse button down as youdrag the Info tool to the lower right corner of the map.

3. Click the Play button in the Info Tool, and watch as different colored lines extendfrom the data track to the various cell sites.

Figure 5-32. We captured one of many three-way handoffs in this picture. Using this tool, it is easy to seeat a glance which cells are involved in the handoffs so you can identify which antennas may needadjustment.

4. When you are done viewing the data track, click the Stop button to stop playingthe map, and then close the Info Tool by clicking the X button in the upper rightcorner.

Remember: This cell site database is fictitious. While this exercise lets you see how thisprocess would work in a real analysis situation, the results of this particular test do notreflect the actual data in the test run.

Identifying the Strongest and Handoff Pilots (PNs) in TableData

Another way to identify those PNs involved in a handoff is to view the handoffs in a table.We will use our 3-Way Handoff Boolean Selection query to make this a quick task.

You can run the query from a map and then use the View Relative Table option from theright-click popup menu you learned about in Lesson 4; however, for this part of the analysis,we will work directly from the table.



Setting up the TableSince we will not need to see all the columns in the layer for this an analysis, we will beginby hiding the unnecessary columns. To speed up this process, a script has been providedthat will automate this task.

� To load and run the script:1. From the Windows menu, select the Tracker #2 table.

2. From the Tools menu, select Set Script to display the Select Executable Scriptdialog box.

3. Use standard Windows techniques to locate and select the HIDECOLS.EXEscript, which is located in your training folder. Then click the Open button toreturn to the table display.

4. From the Tools menu, select Run Script to display the Hide CDMA Columnsdialog box.

Figure 5-33. This very simple VisualBasic Script lets you click onebutton to hide 13 columns more quickly than if you were to do thejob manually. You will learn how to write scripts in Lesson 6.

5. Click the Hide Columns button. The unneeded columns are hidden, and the tableis displayed in full-screen view.

Selecting 3-way HandoffsNext, we will use Boolean Selection to quickly locate all 3-way handoff records. We canuse the same query that was used earlier in the Map View.



� To run the 3-way handoff query:1. From the Operations menu, select the Select option to display the Boolean

Selection Tool dialog box..

2. Click the More>>> button to expand the dialog box.

Figure 5-34. You can use pre-defined queries in the Map and TableViews.

3. Select 3-way Handoffs in the Queries drop-down box.

4. Click the Apply button to execute the query.

5. The table does not appear to have changed in any way, but if you click the downscroll button (to the right of the <<<Less button), the display will scroll to thefirst set of selected records.



Figure 5-35. For the first set of records, we can see that the handoffs were between PNs 84, 224, and 456.

Once you have determined which PN should be handling the call, you can take steps toensure that the desired PN is strong enough relative to its neighbors to retain the call withouthandoffs.

You can repeat this process for each of the 3-way handoffs, and then do the same to reducethe number of 2-way handoffs.

Optimizing the NetworkOf course, once you have completed this initial analysis, you must make the adjustments tothe network based on what you learned. After completing network adjustments, re-run thedata collection process, and repeat the analysis on the new test run data to determine if youhave achieved the desired results.



Analyzing GSM DataThis section provides a case study of GSM data analysis. It shows you how to use OPAS32to quickly identify questionable areas in the test data and help determine causes. The demofiles were obtained from a drive test performed in the United Kingdom.

Important: Only those users who are licensed for OPAS32 GSM support will be able torun the analysis on their computers using the supplied files. However, this analysis canprovide information and identify techniques that might be suitable for any technology. Forinstance, the description of the GSM Analysis Wizard may even be of interest to a CDMAuser.

For those users who are not licensed for OPAS32 GSM support, we suggest that you readthe text to learn about analysis techniques. You can practice many of the examples usingyour own data files, if desired.


● TrainGSMAnalysis.sd5 (you will convert this file to create the TrainGSMAnalysis.oifand TrainGSM Analysis.sum files listed below).

● TrainGSMAnalysis.oif

● TrainGSMAnalysis.sum

● TrainGSMAnalysis.cd2






4. Click the GSM Analysis button from the Lesson 5 Setup dialog box.

These steps will load the correct files into your Training folder and temporarily createthe special symbol schemes needed for the GSM analysis and start OPAS32 for you.When you exit OPAS32 after going through the analysis, the original symbol andcolor schemes will automatically be restored.




Why Use the GSM Analysis Wizard?GSM phones capture an extensive amount of data for every call—more than an RF engineerwould need for an initial analysis. After the initial analysis, where you may have identifiedareas of concern, you may want to see more data to help determine the cause of those areasof concern. With the GSM Analysis Wizard you can build layers that contain just the datayou need for the current analysis. If necessary, you can build new layers to perform a moredetailed or different type of analysis at a later time. You can also use existing layerdefinitions as templates for new ones by editing them and saving under new filenames.

As you perform additional analyses, you will find that you repeatedly use layers you havepreviously created (either as-is, or with slight modifications) to make analyses increasinglyefficient over time.

Creating a New GSM LayerThe GSM Analysis Wizard allows you to create new layers from scratch, modify an existinglayer, or use an existing layer as a template for creating a new one, as you will see in thisanalysis. In this part of the analysis, you will see an overview of how we created a SignalQuality layer for use in this analysis.

Note: The Teach Yourself OPAS32 training program automatically creates this new GSMlayer so it will be available to you as you proceed through this analysis. We recommend youread this section to see how the layer was created. If you want to follow along with theseinstructions on your computer, you can look at the GSM Analysis Signal Quality Layer,which can be selected from the Wizard as described below.

� To start the GSM Analysis Wizard:1. If any .oif files are currently open, you should close them before running the

GSM Analysis Wizard. While this step is not strictly necessary, following alongwith this analysis will be easier if you start with a clean OPAS32 environment. Ifnecessary, from the Windows menu, select Close All Views.

2. From the File Menu, place the mouse arrow over Analysis Wizards to display alist of Analysis Wizard Choices.

3. From this list, select GSM Analysis Wizard to display the Create or ModifyAnalysis dialog box.



Figure 5-36. The first step of the GSM Analysis Wizard lets you create or modify an analysis.Notice that the on-screen instructions remind you that you can also modify an existing analysis asa starting point for creating a new analysis simply by saving it under a new file name.

Note: As mentioned earlier, to follow along with this completed example, we recommendthat you select the GSM Analysis Signal Quality Layer from the list in this dialog box, andthen click the Next> button to continue. Then, follow along by clicking the Next> buttonfrom one step to the next. You will not have to change any information.



� To create a new analysis:Click the Next> button since the Create New Analysis option is the default selection.This displays the Select Time or Event Based Analysis dialog box.

Figure 5-37. The data selected for your analysis can be based on time, in which case, a row ofdata displays for every time interval (in this case, every 1000 milliseconds, or one second), or itcan be based on events, in which case a row of data displays each time an event (handoff,dropped call, or whatever you identify as an event trigger) occurs. If it is event-based, the Wizardautomatically provides the opportunity for you to define the event trigger later in the Wizard.



� To define an event-based analysis:Click the Event radio button and then click the Next> button. This displays the SelectSource of Mobile Data dialog box.

Figure 5-38. You can select from a number of different data sources.



The Select Source of Mobile Data dialog box provides the opportunity to use a varietyof data sources. For the purposes of this analysis, however, we will be using SAFCO32-bit data, which is the default value, so you can click the Next button to move to theSelect Columns Dialog box.

Figure 5-39. The Select Columns dialog box is where you identify the columns that you want toappear in your layer. You can select individual columns from the Available Columns box on theleft, and use the Add -> button to move them to the Selected Columns box on the right. Onceselected, you can use the Move up and Move Down buttons to customize the order that you wantcolumns to initially appear in when a table is displayed.

Keep the following objectives in mind when selecting columns for your new layer:

● Select all columns that you might want to see when performing a particular type ofanalysis (for example, a handoff analysis or a dropped call analysis) or combination ofcommonly-performed analyses.

● Set the column order so that columns that you would typically view together are neareach other. This avoids excessive scrolling of table data or moving columns when youperform an analysis. You can select columns in the order you want them to appear, oryou can use the Move up and Move Down buttons to change the location of a selectedcolumn.

● Columns can be chosen more than once. This can be very useful when combined withthe selective filtering options available on some column properties (for example, FERand Messaging). You can select different filtering options for each repetition of acolumn, and rename it to make it easily identifiable during the analysis.



We selected columns that could be needed when analyzing signal quality in a test run. Sincethe analysis you are viewing was a modification of the existing Layer 1 layer, we decided toremove the following columns from that layer because they were unnecessary for ouranalysis.

● All Neighbour columns (beginning with "nx")

● Channel Style Message

● MCC, MNC, and LAC

● Both DSF columns

● Both RLT columns

? For more detailed information about all of the options available in this dialog box, click theHelp button from this dialog box. From the Help window, click the GSM button to seeinformation that is specific to GSM data.

� To modify properties for any of the selected columns:1. Click the Next> button to display the Modify Column Properties dialog box.

Figure 5-40. Use this dialog box to display the current properties for any column in your analysis.If you want to change the properties for a column, simply select it from the Column Title box, andclick the Properties… button. As usual, the explanatory text in the dialog box reminds you of youroptions.



2. You can select any column from the Column Title drop-down box to see thecurrent properties, and you can change those properties by clicking theProperties… button.

3. We did not change any column properties, so we can click the Next button todisplay the Select Event Trigger Columns dialog box, which is displayed becausewe defined this layer as an event-based layer rather than a time-based layer. Weneed to identify the column(s) that would identify an event; each event causes arecord to be written to the layer.

� To identify Event Trigger columns:

Figure 5-41. Use this dialog box to determine which events would create data in the layer. Asusual, the explanatory text in the dialog box reminds you of your options.

1. The Layer 1 layer had more columns defined as event triggers than we wantedfor this analysis. We removed all columns except RxQual(Full) andRxQual(Sub) from the list of event trigger columns, which will create a muchsmaller layer than the original Layer 1 definition would have done.



2. Click the Finish> Button to display the Layer Definition Name dialog box.

Figure 5-42. Since you have only been reviewing an existing layerdefinition, you can click the Cancel button.

� To save the analysis:1. If you had been creating this layer definition for the first time, you would enter a

unique analysis name in the box in this dialog box.

2. Since you have not made any changes, click the Cancel button to end the Wizard.

Expanding the New Layer

Note: This work has not been done for you. Be sure to perform these steps in order tocontinue with the analysis.

Once you have created a layer definition, you can apply it to an existing .OIF file, or you canset up OPAS32 so that it will automatically be applied whenever you convert a .SD5 file to.OIF.

In this section, we will perform some setup steps, convert the TrainGSMAnalysis.sd5 file inyour training directory to an .oif file, and expand the Layer1 layer to the GSM Analysis -Signal Quality layer created in the previous section of this analysis.



� To set up for automatic file conversion:1. From the Tools menu, select File Converter Options.

2. Click on the GSM Layer Definition tab to display the Options dialog box.

Figure 5-43. The GSM Layer Definition tab lets you add one or more custom layers at the same time as youconvert the .SD5 file to .OIF format. You can also specify certain preferences, as well as access the GSMAnalysis Wizard in the event that you want to change or create a layer on the fly.

3. To activate one or more layers, click on them in the GSM Layer Definition box,and then click the Add button to move them to the box on the right. (Note thatthe order in which layers appear in this list represent the order in which they willappear in the drop-down selection list.)

4. Click OK to close the dialog box.

5. From the Tools menu, select Save Options if you want to save the settings so thelayer will automatically be created whenever you open GSM SD5 files in thefuture. Note that the same File Converter settings are automatically saved in theFile Converter utility, as well. If we were converting multiple files, it would bemore efficient to use File Converter to perform this task.

Note: The number of GSM Layer Definitions that you select for expansion affects thelength of time it takes to convert from .SD5 to .OIF format.



� To set the .OIF directory:When performing data expansions, OPAS needs to know the location of certain files.If you plan to expand layers you have defined (which we will be doing several timesin this analysis), we recommend that you first specify the directory where your datafiles are located. To do this:

1. From the Tools menu, select File Converter Options, and, if necessary, click onthe Output Directories tab.

Figure 5-44. The location for converted files is entered on the Output Directories tab.

2. Click on the second radio button, and then use the Browse button to locate yourtraining directory.

3. When done, click the OK button.

You are now ready to convert the TrainGSMAnalysis.SD5 file to .OIF format. Since we areonly converting one file for this analysis, we will use File | Open to do an automaticconversion.



� To convert the GSM .SD5 file:1. From the File menu, select Open to display the Open dialog box.

2. Double-click on the TrainGSMAnalysis.SD5 file to open it. There will be adelay as the conversion takes place. During this time, various messages reportthe progress of the conversion in the lower left corner of the OPAS32 window.When conversion is complete, tables representing data from the four devices inthis test run appear on the screen.

Note that an index file (TrainGSMAnalysis.sum) is created during fileconversion. This file can be used for subsequent expansions. In the event thatyou are re-opening a raw data file, you can elect to overwrite this file whenprompted.

3. Click on the title bar for Tracker #3 to bring it to the front of the display.

4. Use the Layer drop-down box to change the displayed layer to Layer 1.

Figure 5-45. The Layer 1 layer will be the source for the expansion to the GSM Signal Quality layer wedefined using the GSM Analysis Wizard.



� To expand a layer so it appears in an existing .OIF file:1. From the table that you want to expand, use the drop-down box on the right to

select the new layer you want to create.

Figure 5-46. The three circled numbers show the steps for expanding an existing layer.

2. Click the button in the upper left corner of the table to select the entire table.Although it is not shown in this analysis, you can also expand a layer from asubset of the table data by selecting contiguous rows that you would like tofurther explore.

3. Click the Expand button. If an Open dialog box displays, it is looking for theindex file that accompanies your .oif file. In this case, navigate to your trainingdirectory, and double-click on the TrainGSMAnalysis.sum file. Whenprocessing is complete, the new layer will be available for selection in the Layerdrop-down box. It will show the notation, [Exp] to indicate that it is an expandedlayer.

Saving the New SettingsWhen you add expanded layers to an existing OIF file, you must save the .OIF file in orderto make the new layer a permanent part of the file. If you do not want to permanently retainthis new layer, you can eliminate this step.

� To save the changes:1. From the File Menu, select Save (to save the file under the original .OIF

filename).

2. When the next dialog box asks you to select devices and layers to save, you canclick the OK button to save all devices and layers.

3. In the Save As dialog box (if you selected the Save As menu option), you canspecify the path and filename for the saved file.



Testing for Poor Signal QualityNow that you have seen how new layers can be created using the GSM Analysis Wizard, itis time to begin the analysis.

One way to identify areas of concern is to use the Boolean Selection tool to identify allrecords in the file that meet certain selection criteria. For this data, any record with anRxQual(Full) or RxQual(Sub) value greater than three (3) indicates a potential problem withsignal quality.

� To perform a Boolean Selection query:1. From the Operations menu, select the Select option to display the Boolean

Selection Tool, and click the More>>> button to display the expanded tool.

Figure 5-47. You can enter queries on the fly, or save them for future use.

2. You can type the query directly in the Query box, or use the Operator keys andColumns box to select the items needed to build the query. The query we enteredfor poor signal quality is shown in the illustration.

3. After entering the query, type the name, Poor Signal Quality in theName field, and click the Save button to save the query so it can be used at a latertime. As you will see later in this analysis, we will be using this query to create anew layer.

4. Once the query has been entered, click the Apply button to perform the selectionon the active table. Any table records that meet the selection criteria arehighlighted in the table behind the Boolean Selection Tool.



Figure 5-48. After applying the query, you can use the scroll buttons in the upper right side of the BooleanSelection Tool to scroll through selected records. Unlike the table's scroll bar, which scrolls through allrecords, the Boolean Selection Tool's scroll buttons jump from one selected record to the next.

Notice that, in addition to showing the selected records, the Boolean SelectionTool reports the result of the query. In this case, 9.31 percent of all records in thetest run indicated poor signal quality.

5. When done viewing the query results, check the X box in the upper right cornerof the Boolean Selection Tool to close it

Creating a New Layer from the QuerySince the data indicates that we had poor signal quality of almost 10 percent of the test run,we decided to convert the Boolean Selection query to an Exception layer. In this way, wewould have a layer containing nothing but the selected records from the Boolean query.This lets us focus exclusively on the signal quality problem.



� To convert a Boolean query to an Exception layer:1. From the Operations menu, select the Exception Reporting option to display the

Exception Reporting dialog box.

Figure 5-49. You can use any listed Exception Report to create a new layer,or you can create a new Exception Report.



2. Click the Create New button to begin a new Exception Report. This displays theSelect Layer dialog box.

Figure 5-50. The first step in creating an exception layer is to select the layer containingthe columns that you want to include in your exception layer. As you will see, you do nothave to select only those columns that are used in the query. Your goal is to select anycolumns that will help you in your analysis once the layer has been created.

3. Select the appropriate layer. In our example, we selected the layer that wecreated with the GSM Analysis Wizard--GSM Analysis Signal Quality. Then,click the Next> button to display the Select Columns dialog box.

Figure 5-51. These are the columns we selected. These will all be displayed in the new layer.



4. Once all columns are selected, click the Next> button to display the Build Querydialog box.

Figure 5-52. There are several ways to build a query from this dialog box. In this case, we will be importing thequery we created in Boolean Selection. Notice that the Column cell defaults to "CellID." This default will need tobe removed in order to build the correct query, as you will see.

5. Before importing the query, we want to change the New Expression string(highlighted toward the top of the dialog box) to say something meaningful.Click on the New Expression string, and enter Poor Sig Qual. This willappear in the layer's table in the Description column.

6. To import a query from Boolean Selection, we begin by clicking the ImportQuery button to display the Select dialog box.

Figure 5-53. The Select dialog box shows all queries thathave been saved in Boolean Selection.



7. Select Poor Signal Quality from the list, and click the OK button to return to theBuild Query dialog box, which now shows the Boolean Selection Query.

Figure 5-54. The query is inserted into the Exception box at the bottom of the dialog box. If you are runningOPAS32 release 2.21 or earlier, however, that it begins with (("CellID" =)), the default query. This has to bedeleted in order to form a valid query.

8. If you are running OPAS32 release 2.21 or earlier, you must delete the(("CellID" = )) string from the beginning of the query. You can nowclick the Finish button to display the Save Exception dialog box.

Figure 5-55. Saving under a unique name is the last step in creating anException Report.

9. Enter the name, Poor Sig Qual Exception, and click OK to return to theException Reporting dialog box.



� To generate and display the new layer:1. Simply select the Poor Signal Qual Exception from the Exception Reports box,

and then select the Tracker #3 device from the Testrun / Device box, click theAutomatically Create Layer at OIF load (so the exception layer will be generatedeach time you open this .OIF file), and then click the Evaluate button to generatethe layer.

Figure 5-56. We now have a layer that contains nothing but poor signal quality records.

2. Click the Close button to close the Exception Reporting Window.

3. To display the new layer, select the Poor Sig Qual Exception [GSM] from theLayer pull-down box.

Finding the Cause of Poor Signal Quality AreasPoor signal quality can be caused by a variety of conditions. We will look at variouspossibilities in this part of the analysis.

Analyzing Signal StrengthWe decided to begin the analysis by examining the signal strength in the Poor Sig Qualareas. For quick analysis, it is helpful to apply a color scheme. The GSM Analysis Sig Strcolor scheme should be automatically applied to your data.

To see what this color scheme looks like, scroll to the right in your data until the RxLevFullcolumn is displayed. You should see red values (indicating poor signal strength), bluevalues (indicating fair signal strength), and occasional green values (indicating good signalstrength).

Note: If you do not see these colors, click on the RxLev(Full) column heading. Then, useEdit | Color schemes to locate the GSM Analysis Sig Str color scheme. Click on the colorscheme to select it, and then click the Apply button. You can then click the Close button toremove the dialog box from the display.



Scrolling vertically through the data, you can easily see that some signal strength values(red) indicate that this could be the cause for the poor quality. However, other areas indicatea fair to good (blue or green) signal strength, while at least one of the Full or Sub RxQualcolumns (and sometimes both) are showing poor quality.

We have determined that signal strength is not the only cause of the problem. To continuethe analysis, we will see if there are any out-of-coverage situations and, if so, try todetermine the cause of them.

Identifying Out-of-Coverage SituationsOnce again, it will be helpful to create a layer. This time, the layer will identify Out-of-Coverage areas, and it will be based on the Poor Sig Qual Exception Layer to ensure that thenew layer’s data will specifically cover the areas we are concerned with. Instead ofimporting a query like we did the last time, we will enter our query directly into exceptionreporting.

� To create an exception layer:1. From the Operations Menu, select Exception Reporting, and click the Create

New button from the Exception Reporting dialog box to display the Select Layerdialog box.

2. From the Select Layer dialog box, select the Poor Sig Qual Exception [GSMAnalysis-Signal Quality] from the Sagem DCS 1800 Tracker #3 device, and clickthe Next> button to display the Select Columns dialog box.

Figure 5-57. Once again, you can display any columns that are available from the selected layer in your newException layer.



3. Select the columns shown in the above illustration, and click the Next> button todisplay the Build Query dialog box.

Figure 5-58. To build a query, you can type the information in the cells, or click on a cell to display a selection list.The Value column works a little differently, offering a button (…) to display all values that are in the layer for theselected Column.

4. This time, you will use the top of the dialog box to select the criteria. Completethe definition as shown in the above illustration, making sure to change the newdefinition description to Out of Cov, as shown.

Note: If you are unsure about how to use this dialog box, use the online help fordetailed instructions, as described below:

a. Click the Help button.

b. From the displayed topic, click the Help Topics button.

c. Click the Index tab.

d. Type Exception Reporting Command.

e. Select the Exception Reporting Build Query topic, and click the Display key.

f. From the resulting help topic, click View the Dialog Box. You can nowclick on various places in the picture to view information about how thedialog box works.



5. Click the Finish button to display the Save Exception dialog box.

6. Enter Out of Cov in the box, and click the OK button to finish defining thenew exception layer. The Exception Reporting dialog box is re-displayed, andthe new Out of Cov definition appears in the Exception Reports list.

� To create the layer:1. Click on the Out of Cov definition to select it.

2. Click the Evaluate button to create the new layer.

3. Click the Close button to return to the Table View.

4. Use the Layer field at the top left portion of the Table View window to select thenew Out of Cov [Layer 1] layer for display.

Figure 5-59. If you scroll to the right to see the RxLev(Full) and RxLev(Sub) columns, you can see that most of thevalues are in the red zone.

At this point, it will be helpful to look at this information as it relates to the cell sites in thearea in order to begin determining causes for these values.

Analyzing the Data with Cell Site InformationThe first step is to load a cell site database of the area. The database,TrainGSMAnalysis.cd2 has been loaded to your training directory for this purpose.

� To load the cell site database:1. From the File Menu, select the Select CellSite Database option to display a

submenu with two options.

2. Select the OPAS Format (cd2, mdb) option to display the Select CellsiteDatabase dialog box.



3. From this dialog box, navigate to your training directory, and select the file,TrainGSMAnalysis.cd2.

4. Click the Open button. The currently displayed table does not change in anyway, but the cell site database is now available for viewing in a map.

Now you can plot a map of the RxLev(Full) column, and see how the data compares withthe existing cell sites.

New Map Button Cell Site Symbol Button

� To map the column and cell sites:1. Click the RxLev(Full) column heading to select this column, and then click the

New Map button to display the Map View of this data.

2. Once the map is displayed, click the Cell Site Symbols button to display the cellsites. Notice that a Cell Sites layer is now displayed in the Overlay Manager.

3. Double-click on the Cell Sites layer to display the Cellsite Layer Propertiesdialog box. Then click on the Cell Site Layer Display tab. This tab will allowyou to make the cell site symbols larger and to display the channel numbers onthe map.

4. Click in the Display Channels check box to place a check mark in it. Then,change the Icon Size to 50. When done, click the OK button to re-display themap, which should now look like the one shown in the following illustration.



Figure 5-60. We clicked the Legends tab in the Overlay Manager to display the color scheme used inthis map. This is the red – blue – green color scheme that we have been using.

To analyze one area at a time, we zoomed in on the data that has been circled in the aboveillustration.



Figure 5-61. Clearly, all but the bottom-most value in the map is in the red zone.



Add Data Track ButtonNext, we decided to compare these values with RxQual(full) values. We used the Add DataTrack button to map this new column, and, for the symbol scheme, we chose PNA Symbol,which is a fixed symbol scheme of dots. This helps us distinguish between the two datatracks.

Figure 5-62. Using different symbol schemes for different data tracks makes it easy to identify them.

We can now easily see that both the RxQual(Full) and the RxLev(Full) values are both in thered zone, which indicates that the reason for the poor quality is poor signal strength.Looking at the serving cell (723), we can also see the reason for this problem. The azimuthof the serving cell (the direction it is pointing) does not cover the test area. Potentialsolutions might be to change the antenna’s azimuth, and/or widen the sector width (theantenna beam width) to cover the test area.

After adjusting the antenna, you should re-test the area to ensure that the problem has beenresolved and also to make sure that other problems did not occur as a result of the change.



Performing a Handover AnalysisAnother important analysis involves ensuring that unnecessary handovers are not occurringin a test area and determining how to correct any frequent handover situations. Effectivewith OPAS32 release 2.21, you can do a call-by-call analysis using the test run’s CallSummary layer to obtain detailed handover information.

We will begin this analysis from the Map View by deleting the data displayed from the lastanalysis.

� To delete the previous map data:1. Click on any of the data tracks in the Overlay Manager to highlight it.

2. Right-click on the same data track to display a popup menu.

3. From this menu, select the Delete option.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the remaining data tracks.

Next, we will map the Call Summary layer for this test run.

Add Call Summary Layer Button� To display the Call Summary layer on the map:

1. Hold down the CTRL key, and click the Add Call Summary Layer button todisplay the CallSummary Properties dialog box.

Figure 5-63. Just like any data track, the CallSummary Propertiesdialog box lets you select various display properties about the layerbeing mapped.



2. Notice that this dialog box lets you select two symbol schemes: one for the startof each call, and one for the end. The default symbol schemes are good choices,so click the OK button to display the map.

Figure 5-64. We displayed the Table View of the Call Summary layer behind the map to confirm that there wasonly one call in this Test Run.

Although there was only one call in this particular test run, you will see that a number ofinteresting things happened during the call. Even if there were multiple calls, we could stillanalyze them individually using the techniques shown in the next part of this analysis.

The first thing we want to do is look at handovers to determine if they were properlyexecuted.

Call-by-Call Handover AnalysisWe are going to use the new Call-by-Call Analysis feature to look at the handovers. To dothis, we will select the call and then expand the Layer 3 layer for that call.

Select Rectangle Button� To expand a call:

1. Click the Select Rectangle button, and then drag over either the Start or Endsymbol in the map. When you release the mouse button, both the Start and Endsymbols will be selected.

2. In the field next to the Expand button, use the Down arrow to display a list oflayers, and select the Layer 3 layer.

3. Click the Expand button. After a short delay, the Layer 3 layer is added to themap, and two diamond shapes, which denote handovers, are displayed on themap.



Figure 5-65. From this view, it looks like the second handover is close enough to the end of the call toindicate a dropped call. Further investigation is needed.

Note: In the event that a message asks you to supply the index file, simply navigate to yourtraining directory, and double-click on the TrainGSMAnalysis.sum file. If a messageindicates that the file is invalid, then the file may have become corrupted. To fix theproblem, close all views (Windows | Close all Views), and then use File | Open to open theTrainGSMAnalysis.SD5 file in the \demodata\training directory. This will reconvert thedata and correct the problem.

4. To get a clearer picture, zoom in on the area by the end of the call. In amagnified view, the handover symbol is not as close to the end of the call as itoriginally appeared. To get a better idea of what occurred, it will be helpful tosee the channel numbers (ARFCN) used for this segment of the call.



5. Click the Add Data Track button, and, from the Data Layer Properties dialogbox, select the Layer 3-1 layer, ARFCN column, and the ARFCN Values symbolscheme. When done, click the OK button to return to the map.

Figure 5-66. From this map, we can see a channel number overlap at the handover point.

6. Zoom in on the diamond by the Start symbol until your map looks like the oneabove.

In addition to the channel number overlap, we can see that channel 762 takes over the callonly briefly and then returns to channel 836, which originally had the call. Either thehandover was not necessary, or there is a coverage problem in the handover area. We needto look at the area cell sites to get our final answer.

Displaying the Cell Site DatabaseThe Cell Site database is already loaded, so we just need to re-display it and adjust itsappearance as we did before.

Cell Site Symbol Button� To map the column and cell sites:

1. Click the Cell Site Symbols button to display the cell sites. Notice that the CellSites layer is again displayed in the Overlay Manager.

2. Double-click on the Cell Sites layer to display the Cellsite Layer Propertiesdialog box. Then click on the Cell Site Layer Display tab.



3. Once again, place an X in the Display Channels check box, and change the IconSize to 50. When done, click the OK button to re-display the map.

4. Finally, zoom in on the area to get a closer look at the data. Your map shouldnow look similar to the one shown in the following illustration.

Figure 5-67. Clearly, channel 836 should not be carrying this call at this point. Several channels appear to bebetter candidates.

From this analysis, we can identify a number of potential areas needing adjustment:

● Channel 836 is probably too far from the test area, and it should not be carrying the call.You may need to adjust its power to reduce its congestion and the number of handovers.

● Channel 762 might be in a similar situation, since the area should most logically becovered by 723 at the handover area, with 762 taking over closer to the end of the call.

● If the power level of channel 762 is acceptable, then you should also look at 723 todetermine if the signal is weak or if blockage (perhaps a tall building) is preventing itfrom taking the call within its logical coverage area. If this is the case, then channel 762would be the most logical choice.



Default Notes SymbolNote: Route testers may have placed notes in the data to identify such items as tall buildingsor other items that may block a call. By mapping the Note column in the Notes layer, youwill see a Notes symbol in each location where the drive tester entered a comment. Bymoving the mouse arrow over each Notes symbol, a Tool Tip displays showing the note thathas been entered. The default Notes symbol is shown above; however, you can change thissymbol. This same technique can be used for the Markers layer; however, this layer onlyshows numbers that represent meanings defined by the drive tester.

Looking at TQNM VoicePrint DataFor this table, we are going to look at table data to pinpoint problem areas in the test run. Asyou will see, you can display several tables on the screen at once to obtain valuableinformation.

We started by displaying the TQNM VoicePrint layer of the Sagem Dual-Band #1 in theTable View.

Figure 5-68. The Class column in the TQNM VoicePrint layer instantly identifies basic call events.

Notice that there were examples of both Dropped and No Service calls. For this analysis, wewill examine the Dropped call to find out what happened.



New Table ButtonWe used the New Table button to create two more Table Views for this device.

Figure 5-69. By sizing and positioning each Table View, you can see a lot of related data simultaneously.

In the lower left window, we displayed the Layer 3 layer, making sure the Layer 3 Parametercolumn was in view.

Note: If your Layer 3 Parameter column displays only numbers, it means your release ofOPAS32 has not yet been configured to decode the Layer 3 parameters. To make sure Layer3 parameters are always automatically decoded:

1. From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. From the Options dialog box, select the GSM tab.

3. Click in the Decode GSM Layer 3 Parameters check box.

4. Click the OK button to save this setting and return to the Table View.

A similar option is available on the GSM tab for Layer 2 parameters.

If you want to decode Layer 3 parameters for this session only, you can right-click on anycell to display a popup menu, and then select the Decode Layer 3 Parameters option. Again,Layer 2 offers a similar option.



On the lower right side is a Layer 1 table showing the RxQual(Full) column.

Notice that all three tables show the time stamp. For each table, we highlighted the recordthat was nearest to the time stamp for the Dropped call (18:42:42). We can see from theLayer 3 Parameter column in the Layer3 table that no proper release sequence was issued,confirming that the call was, in fact, dropped. The RxQuality(Full) column in the Layer 1layer shows a value of 7, which is the worst call quality rating.

We could now use many of the analyses already shown to pinpoint the cause of the problemand suggest potential corrective action.

SummaryEven though there was only one call in the test run used for this analysis, OPAS32uncovered a significant number of call anomalies and was able to point out causes, making iteasy to identify possible solutions. As suggested earlier, full network optimization couldrequire several iterations of adjusting, re-testing, and re-analyzing.


Lesson 6 ▪ Automating CommonTasks with Scripts


Setting Up for This LessonBefore you begin reading this lesson, you should set up so you can performthe Quick Quiz at the end of the lesson. This section tells you how to set upfor this lesson.

The Advantages of Writing ScriptsYou have already used some scripts as you worked through the lessons inthis book. This section outlines some reasons why it can be worthwhile tolearn how to write your own scripts.

What You Need to Know for VisualBasic (VB) ProgrammingYou do not have to be a master programmer to create basic, useful scriptsusing OPAS32 Advanced Programming Interface (API) commands; however,you do need to understand certain basic programming concepts. As youprogress with the language, you may find that you want to perform morecomplex tasks that require a greater degree of programming proficiency.This section identifies the programming concepts you need to understand inorder to achieve both basic and advanced levels of competence in writing VBscripts using the OPAS32 API commands.

Using VBA to Write ScriptsIf you do not have the stand-alone VB product, you can still produce scripts ifyou have Microsoft® Office 97™. Some of the component products, likeWord™, PowerPoint™, and Excel™ have VBA environments that run VB aswell. This section explains the differences in creating and running OPAS32scripts using VBA.

About VisualBasicThis section provides a brief overview of the VisualBasic programminglanguage.When you right-click on an object (such as an icon) in Windows, and thenselect from a menu of activities to perform on that object, you are performingan object-oriented function. In essence, object-oriented programming isidentifying an object, and then identifying its own specific qualities andbehaviors.

Seven Steps to Creating and Using ScriptsCreating scripts is an easier process if you follow some logical steps thattake your script from an idea to an executable file that can be run inOPAS32. While the occasional error always seems to creep into anyprogramming project, you can reduce the errors and guarantee solid logic byapproaching the project using seven specific steps:

Lesson 6 ▪ Automating Common Tasks with Scripts


Using the Online Help System to Streamline ProgrammingThis section explains how to access the OPAS32 API Command Scripts Helpto learn about the command syntax and how to use the examples to quicklycreate your own custom scripts.

Setting Up for This LessonBefore you begin reading this lesson, you should set up so you can perform the Quick Quizat the end of the lesson. This section tells you how to set up for this lesson.


1. If you have not already registered a new training ID, you should do so now.Double-click on the Teach Yourself OPAS32 icon, and refer to the Setting up forTraining section in the "Before You Begin" lesson for detailed instructions onhow to register a new training ID.

2. Once the Lesson Setup dialog box is displayed, click the Lesson 6 button. Thiscopies all files you will need for this lesson to your training directory. Unlikesetup for other lessons, it does not start OPAS32. Instead, it displays a messageinforming you that you will need to run a Microsoft® VisualBasic® orMicrosoft® Office 97/Visual Basic® (commonly referred to as VisualBasic forApplications) editor outside of your OPAS32 software to complete the lesson.

3. Click the OK button to exit from the Training program.

4. When you get to the Quick Quiz, follow the instructions to proceed.

Remember: Detailed information about how lesson setup works, including illustrations ofall the dialog boxes you see during lesson setup, are provided in the Setting Up for Trainingsection of the "Before You Begin" lesson.



The Advantages of Writing ScriptsYou have already used some scripts as you worked through the lessons in this book. Thissection outlines some reasons why it can be worthwhile to learn how to write your ownscripts.

An OPAS32 API script allows you to automate repetitive tasks. Each time you run thescript, it runs exactly the same. Scripts offer the following advantages:

● They speed up repetitive processing. For example, if you want to hide certaincolumns every time you open a table, a script will cut this task down from minutes toseconds.

● They provide consistent data analyses More often than not, a cellular engineer doesthe same set of operations to all the collected data and is interested in seeing a specificresult from those operations (for example, a map of some kind). OPAS32 provides away for an engineer to automate the several steps that lead to the final result so thatanalysis can be run in batch mode. To ensure that several engineers all run identicalanalyses on their data files, provide them all with the same script.

● They perform functions that are not available from the OPAS32 menus. Forexample, the CreateColumnByFieldType command creates a new column for a specifiedfield type, a feature that is only available from within OPAS32 API command scripts.

What You Need to Know for VisualBasic (VB)Programming

You do not have to be a master programmer to create basic, useful scripts using OPAS32Advanced Programming Interface (API) commands; however, you do need to understandcertain basic programming concepts. As you progress with the language, you may find thatyou want to perform more complex tasks that require a greater degree of programmingproficiency. This section identifies the programming concepts you need to understand inorder to achieve both basic and advanced levels of competence in writing VB scripts usingthe OPAS32 API commands.

Requirements for Writing Basic ScriptsTo write a basic OPAS32 script, you need a Microsoft® VisualBasic™ editor. You can buystand-alone Microsoft ®VisualBasic™, or you can use the Microsoft® Office 97/VisualBasic® (commonly referred to as VisualBasic for Applications or VBA) editor that issupplied with Microsoft® Office 97™ programs such as Word™, Excel™, andPowerPoint™. There are some minor differences between using VB and VBA, which willbe discussed in the “Using VBA to Write Scripts” section, beginning on page 285 of thislesson.



You also need to understand the following concepts:

● The OPAS32 functions you want to automate: A clear understanding of how thefunctions that you want to automate work when run manually in OPAS32. ReadingTeach Yourself OPAS32 is a good way to start gaining this knowledge.

● Object-oriented programming: The concept behind object-oriented programming andhow to identify objects and their hierarchy within OPAS32. You will gain an overviewof the main concepts of object-oriented programming in this lesson.

● Using the API Scripts Help system to build scripts: How to find the API commandsthat you want to use, how to read the provided information, and how to use the Helpexamples to help build the functions you need. You will learn how to use the APIScripts Help system in this lesson, and you can get some practice with Scripts Help bydoing the Quick Quiz at the end of the lesson.

In addition to these requirements, you must have a good understanding of how the VBenvironment works. Although you do not need to understand every function of thispowerful programming environment, the more you know, the more it will help you to createerror-free scripts.

This lesson teaches you the concepts you need to create a basic script that performs OPAS32functions. It does not teach you how to use the VisualBasic editor; however, goodinstructions are provided in the Online Help system for VisualBasic.

Requirements for Writing Advanced ScriptsThe more scripts you write, the more you may want to program functions that are outside thescope of this lesson, such as interacting with other software programs. Common examplesinclude Microsoft® Office 97™ products such as Excel™, PowerPoint™ or Word™. Asmentioned before, these programs not only interact with VisualBasic, but they also use aversion of VisualBasic called VisualBasic for Applications (VBA). VBA is used within thesoftware in a similar way to how OPAS32 provides API commands to perform functions.Although VBA is compatible with VB (release 5.0), a major difference between the twolanguages is that VBA scripts must be run from within a VBA-compatible application, suchas Excel. So, although you can create an OPAS32 script from within one of theseapplications, you will have to run it from within the application, as well.

Interaction is not limited to Microsoft programs—virtually any Windows-based program canbe accessed from VB. As a matter of fact, some software companies other than Microsoftare also providing access to VBA with commands that are specific to their functions.

To work with the more advanced VB functions, you will need an understanding of VB thatis beyond the scope of this chapter. The VB environment does provide good online helpreference information on all VB topics. You can also purchase a wide variety of books onboth VB and VBA. Some books are designed for use as reference sources; others are writtenin tutorial format to walk you through the programming process. There are also a number ofonline tutorials available on CD-ROM, and don't forget the Internet for tips and tricks, aswell as for information on magazines pertaining to VB and VBA. Check out the MicrosoftWeb site (www.microsoft.com) for a wealth of information on these topics, and descriptionsof Microsoft Press books available. You can also investigate any of the Web-based bookcompanies, or your local book store to review Microsoft Press and other available titles.



Using VBA to Write ScriptsIf you do not have the stand-alone VB product, you can still produce scripts if you haveMicrosoft® Office 97™. Some of the component products, like Word™, PowerPoint™,and Excel™ have VBA environments that run VB as well. This section explains thedifferences in creating and running OPAS32 scripts using VBA.

Creating VBA Scripts for OPAS32 ApplicationsDepending on the Microsoft® Office™ applications that you use to create a VBA script (ormacro), you can save your work in different ways. Two typical options are to store macrosin a template or in a file. The discussion of the potential advantages or disadvantages ofthese choices is beyond the scope of this manual. To simplify this decision, we will assumethat you are using Microsoft® Word™ to create your macros. Within Word™, storing yourmacros in the NORMAL.DOT template file will ensure that they are available to you nomatter which document you have displayed on your screen.

One difference between creating a script in VB and creating one in VBA is that VB requiresyou to create a dialog box, even if you only want to write a single script. In VBA, you cancreate a dialog box, which is certainly a good idea if you want one script to perform any oneof of several functions. VBA does not, however, require you to create a dialog box. If youwant to run a single function, you can simply run it from the Tool menu’s Macro command,as described in “Running VBA Scripts for OPAS32 Applications” in the next section.

� To create an OPAS32 script from within the Microsoft® Office™application:

1. From the Tools menu, select Macro, and then select Macros from the sub-menu.This displays a list of all macros you have created.

2. In the Macro Name box, type a unique name for the macro that you want tocreate.

3. Click the Create button to display the macro editor.

4. At this point, you can type in the code for your script, use OPAS32 API ScriptsHelp to copy example code into the script, and use any of the features andfunctions of the editor to help create and debug the script.

5. (Optional) You can test your script before saving it by selecting the RunSub/User Form option from the editor’s Run menu.

6. To save the script, from the File menu, select Save xxxxx (where xxxxx is thename of the template, for example, the option would read Save Normal if youcreated your macro in the NORMAL.DOT file).

7. To exit the editor, from the File menu, select Close and Return to MicrosoftWord.



Running VBA Scripts for OPAS32 ApplicationsWhen using the stand-alone VB editor to create a script, you can use the MakeEXE Fileoption from the File Menu to create an executable file. Once this file is created, you can usethe Tools menu’s Set Script option to load the executable file into OPAS32, and then use theTools menu’s Run Script option to run it. Or, you can assign frequently-used scripts (or anyexecutable (.EXE) file, such as another application that you want to be able to run fromOPAS32) to a Script Toolbar button so they will always be available to run. You can evenassign non-executable files for which applications are registered in Microsoft® Windows™.For example, if Microsoft® Notepad™ is registered as the application that runs .TXT files,you can assign a .TXT file to a button so that Microsoft® Notepad™ runs with the specifiedfile opened. Or, assign a button to an .OIF file to open a second copy of OPAS32 with thespecified .OIF file opened.

� To use the Set Script and Run Script Options:1. From the Tools menu, select Set Script to display the Select Executable Script

dialog box..

2. Navigate to the script that you will want to run.

3. Click on the script you want to run, and then click the Open button to close thedialog box.

4. From the Tools menu, select the Run Script option. The script runs immediately.

� To display the Scripts Toolbar:

Show or Hide Scripts Toolbar ButtonFrom the View menu, select Script Toolbar. Or, click the Show or Hide ScriptsToolbar button. If the Script Toolbar is not displayed, either method displays it. If itis displayed, either option turns it off.

� To set up the Script Toolbar buttons display:

An Unassigned Script Toolbar Button1. From the Tools menu, select Options, and Click on the Script Toolbar tab to

display the Script Toolbar Options dialog box. (You can also right-click on anassigned or unassigned Script Toolbar button and select Options from the popupmenu.)



Figure 6-1. You can customize up to 32 Script Toolbar buttons. Simply select a button,and identify the executable (.EXE) or other file that you want to run from that button.You can, optionally, change the icon displayed on the selected button, and even type inyour own tool tip so that hovering the mouse arrow over the button identifies what itdoes.

2. Click on one of the listed script buttons (including the No script set button, whichonly appears until you have defined at least one button) to select it.

3. Use the Browse button to display the Select Executable Script dialog box, whereyou can navigate to the script, executable file, or other file that you want to runfrom the selected button.



4. Select the file that you want to run, and click the Open button to return to theScript Toolbar Options dialog box. The selected script, program, or file namenow appears in the File field. If an icon is already associated with this file, itappears next to the Change Icon button. Notice that the Tool Tip alsoautomatically changes so that the filename of the executable file you selected willappear if you hover the mouse arrow over the new button.

Figure 6-2. For this example, we selected the Ctoi script that is included within yourOPAS32 installation directory in \sample scripts\CtoI.



5. Optional: To change the icon that is displayed on this button, click the ChangeIcon button to display the Change Icon dialog box.

Figure 6-3. You can use the Browse button to display any iconfile (.ICO) on your computer. In this illustration, we used theTYO.ICO file that is included in your training directory.

Use the Browse button to locate an .ICO file to display on this button. Once youhave selected it, the Current Icon box shows the icon you selected. Click OK toreturn to the Script Toolbar Options dialog box.

6. Optional: You can also change the Tool Tip text by typing any text you want todisplay in the Tool Tip field.

7. Optional: You can reset the button by selecting it, and then clicking the DeleteButton button. This removes any settings you have made, but leaves the buttonavailable to be assigned to another executable file.

Note: Although the button has been defined, it does not appear in the Script Toolbar untilyou have identified where the button should be located. This is done through the Customizeoption, described in the next task.

� To set up the Script Toolbar buttons display:1. With the Script Toolbar displayed, right-click on a Script Toolbar button to

display a popup menu.



2. From the popup menu, select the Customize option to display the CustomizeToolbar dialog box, which lists all available buttons based on their Tool Tipsettings. (You can also click the Customize button in the Script Toolbar Optionsdialog box to display the Customize Toolbar dialog box.)

Figure 6-4. Here is an example of several buttons that have been set up. The left side of this dialog boxshows all available buttons, plus a separator that allows you to group buttons when they display within theOPAS32 toolbar. The right side of the dialog box shows the buttons that have currently been set fordisplay. Notice that three buttons are running OPAS32 scripts, and another button, which has not beenadded to the toolbar yet, runs Microsoft® Excel™.. One default separator always appears at the end ofthe list; however, you can add separators, as well.You can customize up to 32 Script Toolbar buttons.

3. To add a button to the current toolbar, click on it in the Available toolbar buttonsbox, and then click the Add -> button to move it to the Current toolbar buttonsbox immediately before whatever current toolbar button is selected (the default isthe Separator button at the bottom of the list).

4. To add a separator between buttons, click the button in the Current toolbarbuttons box above which you want the separator to appear. Then, click Separatoroption in the Available toolbar buttons box, and then click the Add -> button tomove it to the Current toolbar buttons box immediately above.the selectedcurrent toolbar button.

5. To remove a button or separator from the Current toolbar buttons list, click on it,and then click the <- Remove button to move it back to the Available toolbarbuttons box.

6. To change the order of the current toolbar buttons, click the button you want tomove, and then click the Move Up or Move Down button to move it one positionupward or downward.



7. When you have finished customizing the Script Toolbar, click the Close button.The Script Toolbar has been changed.

Figure 6-5. Here you can see how the finished toolbar (right) looks basedon the current settings (left).

The VBA editor does not provide a way to create an executable file, so there is no way touse the OPAS32 Set Script and Run Script commands or to assign Script Toolbar buttons forVBA scripts. You can, however, run a script directly from within the Microsoft® Office™application.

� To run an OPAS32 script from within the Microsoft® Office™ application:1. From the Tools menu, select Macro, and then select Macros from the sub-menu.

This displays a list of all macros you have created.

2. Highlight the macro that you want to run.

3. Click the Run button to begin execution of the macro.

About VisualBasicThis section provides a brief overview of the VisualBasic programming language.

VB is a modern-day version of the BASIC programming language, which was firstdeveloped in the early 1960s for the DOS operating system. You would barely recognizethe similarities between the two versions, partly because VB is closely integrated with theWindows environment, and also because VB is an object-oriented language, which will beexplained in the next section of this lesson.

In addition to providing the commands that create and control Windows program elementssuch as dialog boxes, drop-down lists, buttons, and so forth, VB uses Object Linking andEmbedding (OLE) to interact with other Windows applications.

The underlying technology behind scripting is OLE Automation. OLE Automation is aMicrosoft proprietary standard for interprocess communication. It is a substantialdevelopment of and a complete replacement for DDE. The VB script and OPAS32 use OLEAutomation as a mechanism to communicate with each other.



Figure 6-6. OLE Automation makes it possible for your VB script to talk to OPAS32.

When you right-click on an object (such as an icon) in Windows, and then select from amenu of activities to perform on that object, you are performing an object-oriented function.In essence, object-oriented programming is identifying an object, and then identifying itsown specific qualities and behaviors.

Consider a simple script that you might use to hide certain columns while performing aGSM analysis. A dialog box for this application is shown in Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7. Even a simple dialog box like this hasnumerous objects. Some objects, like the threebuttons in the upper-right corner of the box, areautomatically displayed and require noprogramming.

The GSM Hide Columns dialog box consists of five separate objects. The three buttonsused to minimize the window, size the dialog box, and close the application appear on alldialog boxes in Windows. The dialog box itself is a fourth object, and the Hide GSM1Columns button is the fifth object.

As you explore the VB editor, you will see that you program each object separately. In theGSM example, you would first “paint” the dialog box, specifying various properties for it,such as the title that should be displayed in the title bar. Then, you would paint the HideGSM1 Columns button, specify any properties that you want to set for it, and then double-click on the button to display the editor, where you would write the script that the button willexecute.

Keep in mind that virtually everything is an object to VB—not just the items that make upyour application (like the dialog box and the button). The OPAS32 application is an object,as is a test run (the file you open within OPAS32), a table, a graph, and a map.

To work with an object in VB, you must identify its class (the hierarchical family of objectsthat it belongs to), its properties (inherent qualities, such as the title of the dialog boxabove), and its methods (the behavior or action that the object can perform).



Object ClassesThe following illustration shows OPAS32's internal structure.

OPAS32

MergeGraphObject AFRS TestRun

GraphView

GraphViewPageSetup GraphViewSetup

MapViewTableView

TableViewPageSetupTableViewSetupColumn

MapViewPageSetup StreetMapViewSet MapToolContr

Figure 6-8. The object hierarchy governs how an object is identified within a VB program. You must identify allthe higher classes before identifying the sub-class being manipulated by the program.

The OPAS32 object is the highest class, representing the OPAS32 program itself. The nextlevel is the GraphObject, Merge, AFRS, and TestRun, and so forth. When you identify anobject in a VB program, you identify all its higher classes, with each class separated by aperiod (.).

You will notice that the Script API Online Help segments the API commands by type. Forexample, within the test run class, are TableView, MapView, and GraphView object types.You can view a list of API commands that can be used with any object type within theOnline Help system.



Object PropertiesOnce you have identified the object through its class structure, you can change certain objectproperties, based on the object class. For example, lines 21 through 23 in the followingsample code set the bottom margin for a map.

Note: In this code sample (and in the ones that follow), line numbers have been added tohelp identify key lines of code in the descriptive text following or preceding the code. Linenumbers do not normally appear in VB code.

01 Dim OPAS As Object02 Dim TR As Object03 Dim TableVW As Object04 Dim MapVW As Object05 06 Set OPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")07 OPAS.FileOpen ("g:\opas32\demodata\Test2.oif")08 Set TR = OPAS.GetTestRun("test2.oif")09 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(1)10 TableVW.NewMap11 Dim BottomMargin As Double12 BottomMargin = TableVW.PageSetup.BottomMargin13 Debug.Print "Table View bottom Margin", BottomMargin14 15 If BottomMargin <> 0.5 Then16 TableVW.PageSetup.BottomMargin = 0.517 End If18 19 Set MapVW = TR.GetMapView(1)20 21 MapVW.PageSetup.BottomMargin = 0.522 BottomMargin = MapVW.PageSetup.BottomMargin23 MapVW.PageSetup.Setup24 ' Sets the map’s bottom margin, gets the bottom margin

value,25 ' and saves it.

For now, do not concern yourself with the rest of the code. This will be covered as youprogress through this lesson.



Object MethodsAn object's method identifies its inherent behavior or actions that it can perform. Somemethods change an object's properties; others manipulate an object's data.

For example, line 13 in the following code would be used on CDMA data to select "1000 msSummary" as the current layer definition to be used in expansion. Then line 14 performs theexpansion on the rows 10-20 of the first layer in the table view.

01 Set OPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")02 OPAS.FileOpen ("G:\opas32\demodata\M0819542.dm")03 Set TR = OPAS.GetTestRun("M0819542.oif")04 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(1)05 Dim NumColumns As Integer06 Dim ColumnName As String07 Dim Column As Object08 Dim NewColumn As Object09 Dim ExpandLayerDefName As String10 11 nExpandLayer = TableVW.GetNumExpandLayerDefs12 nCurrentLayer = TableVW.GetCurrentLayer13 TableVW.SelectRows 10, 2014 TableVW.SelectExpandLayerDefByName "1000 ms Summary"15 16 ResultOfOperation = TableVW.Expand17 Debug.Print ResultOfOperation

In essence, line 13 selects rows 10 through 20 in the table. Then line 14 selects the layerdefinition, “1000 ms Summary” from the Expand Combo-Box.



Note that methods that are available to a certain class are also available to the sub-classes.

View

GraphViewTableView MapView

CDMATableView ScanTableView GSMMapView TrackMapView

PageSetup

MapViewPageSetupTableViewPageSetup GraphViewPageSetup

Figure 6-9. This diagram shows the inheritance relationship between OPAS32 API objects. A method that isavailable to one class is also available to any of the classes beneath it in the hierarchy.

In this illustration, the View object is the super-class for the TableView, MapView, andGraphView objects. If you look in the Scripts Online Help, you will notice that the Viewobject can use the CloseView method. Since the TableView, GraphView, and MapView(and the sub-classes beneath them) inherit the View object’s methods, they can use theCloseView method, as well.

Similarly, all methods used by the PageSetup object are available to theTableViewPageSetup, MapViewPageSetup, and GraphViewPageSetup objects, as well.



Seven Steps to Creating and Using ScriptsCreating scripts is an easier process if you follow some logical steps that take your scriptfrom an idea to an executable file that can be run in OPAS32. While the occasional erroralways seems to creep into any programming project, you can reduce the errors andguarantee solid logic by approaching the project using seven specific steps:

1. Logic: Perform and document the steps manually. Perform each step that you wantyour script to perform, and write down each step you do. If you want your script to startafter OPAS32 is started but at an .OIF file is loaded, then start writing at the time youload the file.

2. Documentation Reference: Research the APIs you will need for each step. Once yoursteps are listed, you can use the OPAS32 Scripts Help system to locate the commandsthat will perform the listed steps. Write down the names of these commands in your list.Detailed information on using the Scripts Help system is in “Using the Online HelpSystem to Streamline Programming” beginning on page 298.

3. Implementation: Implement the steps using the correct APIs. Start writing your code,again using the Scripts Help system for assistance.

4. Testing: Test your script, and document the results. Try running the script usingsample data. If you see errors, either in the form of error messages or unexpectedresults, write a detailed description of what is happening so you can analyze your codeand correct any problems. Keep correcting and testing your script until you are satisfiedwith the results.

5. Build: Compile and make an executable file. This step can only be done if you areusing a stand-alone VB compiler. Skip this step if you are using VBA from within oneof the Microsoft Office 97 products.

6. Setup: Load the script in OPAS32. If you created an executable file from a stand-aloneVB editor, from the OPAS32 Tools menu, select Set Script. If you used VBA, you canskip this step.

7. Execution: Run the script in OPAS32. If you created an executable file from a stand-alone VB editor, from the OPAS32 Tools menu, select Run Script. If you used VBA,you must run the script from within the Microsoft Office 97 application.



Using the Online Help System to StreamlineProgramming

This section explains how to access the OPAS32 API Command Scripts Help to learn aboutthe command syntax and how to use the examples to quickly create your own customscripts.

Accessing API Command Scripts HelpAlthough you can access Online Help from within OPAS32, you can also access it outsideof your OPAS32 software.

� To access the Help System:1. Double-click on the OPAS32 Help icon in your OPAS32 program folder to

display the Contents Tab for the help system.

2. Next, click on the API Command Scripts book to view a list of topics.

3. Click on the topic you want to view.

In most cases, you will want to view the commands in order to learn their syntax oruse the examples as program shells. If you know which command you need to view,use the Script Commands in Alphabetical Order option to drill down to the commandyou need. If you are not sure of a command name, use the Script Commands by Typeoption. From here, you can view a list of commands available for each object type todetermine which command you need.

For example, assume you want to insert a column into a table. First, select TableViewObject. Then, scroll through the available commands. You will soon find anInsertColumn command.



Using the Command Help TopicAll topics in the API Scripts Help are organized in the same way.

Figure 6-10. The Help System provides the same information for eachcommand to facilitate coding activities.

● Introduction: The text immediately below the command name explains the use of thecommand.

● Object: This section identifies the object type(s) that the command can operate on.Notice that a command may be valid for multiple object types.

● Syntax: This section shows how the code should appear within a script. When acommand begins with void, you do not type the word, "void" within your code. Whena command ends with empty open and close parentheses (), you do not type them.When a value is enclosed within the parentheses, you would enter the value described inthe Parameters section of the topic. Note that parentheses are necessary only if afunction returns a value.

● Return Value: In some cases, a command returns a value. For example, theGetTopRow() command returns the index (number) of the first row that is visible in atable at the time the command is run.



● Parameters: Parameters, also called arguments, identify the specific object being actedupon by the command. For example, refer to the OPAS.FileOpen("Test2.oif") line inFigure 6-10. The parameter for the FileOpen command is the name of the file to beopened (Test2.oif).

● Example: This section shows one or more working examples of how the command isused within a script. Each example will run independently if you cut it and paste it intothe VB editor, provided you change the fictitious names with real ones from yourOPAS32 data.

● Related Commands: In some cases, this section identifies commands related to the onebeing described in this topic. You can click on any listed related command to jump toits help topic within the API Script Help.

Using Help Examples Within your ScriptEach code sample provided within the online help system will run in OPAS32 as written,once you have changed the fictitious information, like file names, to existing ones. The codeexamples were written as fully-functioning units to help users with limited programmingskills to create basic scripts easily and to let users see how the command functions within thecontext of a real-life situation.

Note that most of the code examples use more than just the command they are illustrating.They also illustrate various techniques you can use to perform the functions that set up forthe illustrated command. As you will see in the instructions that follow, there is more thanone way to select rows for use by the DeleteSelectRows command.

Copying and Pasting the Example Script CodeTo use the code from the Help system, just copy it from Help, and then paste it into the VBeditor.

� To use example scripts within your VB script:1. In the Help system, display the command that you need for your script.

2. Click on the first character of the code sample you want to copy, and dragthrough the remaining lines of code that you want to copy to highlight them. (Asyou will see, you often will not want to copy the entire example script—just thepart(s) that pertain to the function you are coding.)

3. From the Edit menu, select the Copy option to copy the selected code to theWindows Clipboard. (Alternatively, you can press Ctrl+C to copy the code.)

4. In the VB Editor, place the cursor on the line where you want the code to begin.

5. From the Edit menu, select the Paste option to paste the selected code into theEditor. (Alternatively, you can press Ctrl+V to paste the code.)



Modifying the Code for Your ScriptOnce the code has been pasted into the VB editor, you will need to modify the code youpasted so that it applies specifically to your application. Generally, you will need to replaceany fictitious names in the example code with real ones from your application. If you havepasted more than one example from Help into the Editor, you will also need to remove somerepeated code, as shown in the following illustration.

Figure 6-11. Each example in the Help system is designed to stand alone. As a result, copying more than oneexample in its entirety usually places redundant code in your script.



In this example, the user wants to write a script that selects certain rows in a table, and thendeletes the selected rows. When copied, the code will look like this:

01 Set OPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")02 OPAS.FileOpen("Test2.oif")03 Set TR = OPAS.GetTestRun("Test2.oif")04 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(1)05 06 TableVW.SelectRows 10, 2007 TableVW.DeleteSelectRows08 Dim OPAS As Object09 Dim TR As Object10 Dim TableVW As Object11 Set OPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")12 OPAS.FileOpen ("G:\opas32\demodata\Test2.oif")13 Set TR = OPAS.GetTestRun("Test2.oif")14 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(1)15 TableVW.Select (Chr$(34) + "Seq No" + Chr$(34) + "<100")16 TableVW.DeleteSelectRows

In this example, the redundancies are underscored, and the fictitious items are presented inboldface type. To avoid replacing fictitious items in code that will eventually be deleted, werecommend removing the redundancies first.

This example has a number of obvious redundancies, and there is one redundancy that is notso obvious. The obvious redundancies are also shown in the earlier figure. Lines 11 through14 are exact repetitions of lines 01 through 04. These lines declare the objects (arequirement of VB), and are generally (but not always) listed as early in the script aspossible, so we would delete lines 11 through 14.

Less obvious is that the SelectRows example (line 06 of the code) selects rows based ontheir row numbers (10, 20), and line 07 deletes those rows, whereas line 15 selects rows usesBoolean Selection to select rows, with line 16 performing the deletion. Either of theseoptions is valid, so you need to decide which line to delete based on how you want yourscript to operate.

● If you know that you always want to select certain rows based on their number, youwould retain lines 06 and 07, and delete lines 15 and 16.

● If you know that you want to select certain rows based on their values, you would retainline 32, deleting line 06. In this case, however, you would also want to move line 32 tothe position of line 06 because you need to do the selection of rows before you can usethe DeleteSelectRows command to delete them.

At this point, the code still requires a little reorganization.. As you will learn in the nextsection, any lines that declare or set objects need to be placed prior to lines that use theobjects. Usually, you place them at the beginning of the script so you can find them easily;however, this is a convention rather than a rule. To follow the convention, you need tomove lines 08 through 10 before line 01. Finally, you want to move line 02, which performsan OPAS32 command, out of the declarations section. Since it still needs to come beforereferences to the test run since it opens the test run file, we moved it immediately before theSet TR statement.



Your code should now look like this:

01 Dim OPAS As Object02 Dim TR As Object03 Dim TableVW As Object04 Set OPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")05 OPAS.FileOpen("Test2.oif")06 Set TR = OPAS.GetTestRun("Test2.oif")07 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(1)08 TableVW.SelectRows 10, 2009 TableVW.DeleteSelectRows

Once you have deleted redundant code and re-ordered the lines of code as necessary, youcan locate the fictitious information and replace it with information from your application.For example:

● In lines 05 and 06, you would replace Test2.oif with the filename of the OIF file thatyou are using.

● In line 07, you would change the GetTableView(1) command to reflect the Device ID ofthe device whose table view is required.

● In line 08, you would either identify the rows you want to select in the SelectRowscommand (as shown above), or enter the Boolean command as described in the Help forthe Select command.

Once you have made these changes, the script will run correctly.

Important Note About Copying Help Example Text: So far, the examples you have seenare relatively short, performing only a few steps. As you will see in the Quick Quiz at theend of this chapter, however, redundant code can build up very quickly when your script isperforming a multi-step process.

While you are still new to script writing, we recommend that you edit out the redundant codeas you go by copying one example, performing edits, and then copying the next. As youbecome more familiar with the requirements of each command, however, you should onlycopy the lines that you need for the script you are writing to reduce coding time.

About the Set and Dim StatementsOne of the advantages of using the complete example code is that the code includeseverything you need to run a command; you only need to replace fictitious names with realones, and those names are obvious within the context of the example code. Nonetheless, it ishelpful to understand what those lines of code are doing, particularly if you want to move onto more advanced scripting functions.



Take another look at the final code from the previous example.

01 Dim OPAS As Object02 Dim TR As Object03 Dim TableVW As Object04 Set OPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")05 OPAS.FileOpen("Test2.oif")06 Set TR = OPAS.GetTestRun("Test2.oif")07 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(1)08 TableVW.SelectRows 10, 2009 TableVW.DeleteSelectRows

Note that lines 01 through 03 use Dim statements, and 04, 06 and 07 use Set statements.These statements are not entirely from the OPAS32 command scripts—they are, in whole orin part, from VB. These statements are critical to proper processing; if you attempt toprocess an object without declaring and initializing it at the beginning of your script, thescript will not run; however, VB will flag the error for you.

● Dim is the command used to explicitly declare a variable. While explicitly declaringvariables is not required within VB, there are numerous advantages to doing so, andthere are numerous disadvantages to not doing so (called implicit variable declaration).For an OPAS32 script, you should declare each object that you will be referring to in thescript as an object. In Lines 01 through 03, the OPAS32 application, the test run, andthe table view are declared as objects.

● Set is a VB command that initializes the value of a variable.♦ Line 04 initializes the OPAS object with the VB CreateObject function. This

function creates an OLE Automation object by assigning the OPAS object to anobject variable. In other words, it sets up communication between your script and theOPAS32 application. If OPAS32 is not running when you run your script, this lineopens it. If it is running, this line activates it.

♦ Line 06 sets the test run variable using the OPAS32 API Command, GetTestRun. Ifyou check the online help for this command, you will see that it “Returns the dispatchinterface for a named test run(s).” OPAS32 returns the dispatch interface associatedwith the test run.

♦ Finally, line 07 sets the TableView variable using the OPAS32 API Command,GetTableView. The online help for this command explains that it “gets the dispatchinterface associated with a table view for a specific device.” The device is identifiedby its ID number.

As you learned in the previous section, the example scripts in the Online Help systemprovide the correct Dim and Set statements for each command. Since some API Scriptcommands reference the same objects, the Dim and Set statements tend to be duplicated ifyou string several example scripts together. This is why it is important to remove duplicates,and re-order the lines of code so that the Dim statements are first, the Set statements arenext, and the processing statements follow.



The Object Class Hierarchy and the Set CommandIf you recall the discussion of the Object Class hierarchy on page 293, we cited a theoreticalreference to an object, stating that you must reference the complete hierarchy whenreferencing the object in code. If you review the code in the earlier example, you can seethat the entire hierarchy does not appear to be referenced. For example,TableVW.DeleteSelectRows (line 11) seems to reference only the Device withLayers level—it does not refer to the higher Test Run or OPAS classes.

This is because the Set command has already taken care of identifying the hierarchy to theprogram. Referring to lines 05 and 6, you can see that first, TR was set to refer to the OPAStest run object, identifying the Test2.oif file. In other words, when the program sees “TR” inthe code, it knows you are referring to the complete OPAS.TestRun hierarchy. Next,TableVW was set to TR.GetTableView(1). In other words, when the program sees“TableVW” in the code, it knows you are referring to the OPAS.TestRun.TableView(1)hierarchy.

05 Set TR = OPAS.GetTestRun("Test2.oif")06 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(1)

Having identified those hierarchical classes, you can now work with the TableVW objectwithout citing the object classes above it.

Commenting Your CodeMost example scripts in the Help system contain lines of text that are preceded by anapostrophe (΄). In the VB editor, these lines generally display in a different color, unless youchange these settings.

These lines are comment lines. They do not execute when you run the script; rather, theyjust provide documentation that can be very helpful if you decide to modify a script sometime in the future.

We strongly recommend that you get into the habit of commenting your code. You canplace the comments immediately before or immediately after blocks of code that requireexplanation, but make sure you are consistent in your placement to ensure that anyonereading your code will know which code block is being referenced by the comment. Thefollowing table shows some typical situations where a comment would be helpful.



Situation Sample CommentTo indicate the most recent revisiondate for the script.

' Script revised 2/19/98 by CJS.

To indicate the overall function of ablock of code.

' This code selects unneeded columns in a table' and hides them.

To indicate specific functionality of ablock of code.

' This code performs a Boolean selection, looking for' RxPower levels of –96 or lower.

To indicate a problem with a block orline of code.

' Right now, the next line of code is selecting the wrong' data. I need to determine the problem.

To comment out code for testing ordebugging purposes. This option bearsfurther explanation. If you are not sureif a line of code is operating properly,you can temporarily delete it bycommenting it out. In this way, thecode does not execute; however, if youneed to add it back to the script, you donot have to retype it.

Dim OPAS As ObjectDim TR As ObjectDim TableVW As ObjectSet OPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")' OPAS.FileOpen("Test2.oif")' Set TR = OPAS.GetTestRun("Test2.oif")Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(1)

TableVW.SelectRows 10, 20TableVW.DeleteSelectRows

Instructions: In this Quick Quiz, you will be writing a script that performs a set ofprocedures on the file TrainAmps1.OIF. To make your job a little easier, we will providethe steps that must be performed by the script and the names of the commands that willperform each step.

You can copy the examples in API Script Help, type the code from scratch into the VBeditor, or combine both methods to create the script.

If you are using a Microsoft® Office 97™ application as your editor, be sure to review theinstructions in "Using VBA to Write Scripts” on page 285.

To check your answers, refer to Appendix A, “Answers to Quick Quizzes.”

Note: If you do not currently have access to the VB or VBA editor, you can simulate theprocess using any text processing software, and compare it with the answer inAppendix A.

What Your Script Will Do:

After it starts OPAS32 and opens TrainAmps1.OIF, your script will perform a SSC analysison scanner phone #8 and create a SSC map for scanner phone #8. Then it will create amap for portable #1 with Events and Handoffs turned on.



How the User Interface Should Work:

The user interface is how a user will start the script to run it. Provided you are using theVB editor and can create executable files, you can use the Set Script option from theTools Menu to load the script into OPAS32, and then run it by selecting Run Script fromthe Tools Menu. At this point, however, you need to display a dialog box (known in VB asa form), which provides the means for actually running the script code that you are aboutto write.

For this Quick Quiz, you will create a dialog box with a single button. This button willcontain the code that runs the steps performed by the script.

Note: Again, this dialog box is not necessary if you are using VBA. Refer to "Using VBAto Write Scripts” on page 285 for information on VBA user interface options.

Optional Enhancements to the Dialog Box:

If you want to get more familiar with how to define the properties of objects within yourdialog box, try making the following changes to the dialog box and button:● Change the title bar of the dialog box to read, “Lesson 6 Exercise”.● In front of the new title, insert an icon. You can specify any .ICO file on your

computer, or use TYO.ICO, which is in your training directory.● Add a caption to the button: “Do Quick Quiz Steps.” Change the font for this caption to

MS Sans Serif bold, 8 point.

The solutions for creating and enhancing the user interface are not in Appendix A; refer toVB online help for information on how to create the form and change object properties.

The Steps and Commands Needed for This Script:There are 10 basic steps that will need to be performed in this script: The commands arenoted in parentheses.

1. Start OPAS32 (CreateObject).

2. Open the file, TrainAmps1.OIF (FileOpen).

3. Select the table for Scanner phone #8 (GetActiveTR and GetTableView).

4. Perform the SSC analysis for scanning phone #8 (SSC).

5. Draw the map for scanning phone #8 (NewMap).

6. Select the table for portable #1 (GetTableView).

7. Draw the map for portable #1 (NewMap).

8. Select the map for portable #1 (GetMapView).

9. Overlay the events for portable #1 (ShowEvents).

10. Overlay the handoff layer for portable #1 (ShowHandOffs).



Running the Script:You can run the script directly from the VB Run menu by selecting Start. If OPAS32 is notopen when you run the script, the script will open it and open TrainAmps1.oif. If OPAS32is already open when you run the script, your script will ignore this step.

If you prefer, you can compile the script (from the VB File menu, select Make EXE File),and load and run it from OPAS32. In this case, since OPAS32 will already be started,your script will ignore this step.

Remember: If you are copying examples from API Script Help, try to copy only the codeyou need to avoid spending a lot of time editing the script.


Appendix A ▪ Quick Quiz Answers

Where to Find Answers for Each LessonLesson 1 ▪ A Quick Tour of OPAS32...................................................................309

Lesson 2 ▪ Using the Table View.........................................................................310

Lesson 3 ▪ Using the Graph View........................................................................315

Lesson 4 ▪ Using the Map View...........................................................................319

Lesson 5 ▪ Analyzing Data from Different Technologies .....................................322

Lesson 6 ▪ Automating Common Tasks with Scripts...........................................322

Lesson 1 ▪ A Quick Tour of OPAS321. False. Although OPAS32 only processes .OIF files, you can open many different file

types. OPAS32 automatically converts a wide range of file types to the .OIF file format.

2. All of the above. The Table View provides all the listed benefits, plus much more.

3. False. Although stacked graphs are certainly appropriate for comparison purposes, eachgraph is displayed individually, one above the other. Stacked graphs are particularlyhelpful when the plotted values are so similar that they might be confusing when viewedon a single graph.

4. They offer many processing options. Then, based on the options that you select, theyoffer only the options that are valid for your selection. This is the great advantage ofusing Wizards. They guide you down the correct path based on what you want to do.

5. False. A script is a powerful OPAS32 tool that lets you automate commonly-performedrepetitive tasks. You use Visual Basic to write a script that identifies the tasks you wantto perform (such as formatting a table in a certain way or manipulating data). Once thescript is complete, you can run it as often as required to get exactly the same resultsevery time with just a few clicks of the mouse.

6. False. You can display ETAK, MapInfo, and Spot Image maps, as well.



Lesson 2 ▪ Using the Table View1. Normally, you would start OPAS32 as instructed earlier in the lesson. For the purposes

of your training, however, you should start it as instructed in the Quick Quiz.

2. From the File menu, select Open. Then double-click on TrainAmps1.oif, which islocated in the training folder that was set up in question 1 of this exercise. This file waspreviously converted from .SD4 format to .OIF format.

3. The illustration shows a row, a column, and several cells highlighted simultaneously.To accomplish this, hold down the Ctrl key as you click on the SAT for 334 ColumnHeading button, then any Row Heading button (it does not matter if you select the sameone as in the illustration), and then the individual cells (again, it is not important if youselect different cells than the one illustrated). Note that, the selected item does notalways appear highlighted immediately; you will often see the highlight appear whenyou select the next item. This is because any item that has the focus does not showhighlights. Keep in mind that, even if the highlight does not appear, the item is stillselected.

4. To hide the SAT columns:

a. Hold down the Ctrl key as you click on the Column Label Buttons for the indicatedcolumns.

b. Right-click on any of the selected Column Label Buttons to display a popup menu.

c. Click on the Hide popup menu option. Your table should look like the one in thefollowing illustration. Note that the table in this example was re-sized to help showthe results of the Hide operation.



5. To switch to the Standard Deviation layer, click on the down arrow (�) on the LayerSelection Drop Down Box, and select Standard Deviation from the list. Notice thechanges to the data displayed in the table.

6. To return to the Signal Strength layer, click on the down arrow (�) on the LayerSelection Drop Down Box, and select Signal Strength from the list. Notice that the datareturned to its original state, and the SAT columns you hid in the last Quick Quiz arestill hidden.

7. Select a data column by clicking on its Column Heading button. Then, from the Editmenu, select Color Schemes to display the Select Color Scheme dialog box. Finally,click on the SigStr color scheme, and click the Apply button. Behind the dialog box,you can see the table value colors change. Note that if you selected any column beforeCh 334, the message, “Unsupported Data Type in Color Scheme” displayed. Thishappens when you select a column that does not contain measurable data (Seq No, PosNo, Latitude, Longitude, Time).

8. While the Select Color Scheme dialog box is still displayed, click the Simple Edit buttonto display the Edit Color Scheme: SigStr dialog box. The SigStr color definition isautomatically supplied with your OPAS32 software. Notice how weak signal strengthvalues (-105) have been assigned to the color blue, strong signal strength values (-75)are assigned orange, and strengths in between the low and high values are colors thatrange from blue to orange. Be aware that the colors you see may vary from the onesdescribed here, depending on the colors your computer is capable of displaying.

9. From the Options menu, select Reduce to display the Reduce dialog box.

Enter 10 in the Bin Size field. (There is no need to change the Method, since you planto show an average value, which is the default.) Finally, click the OK button to performthe reduction. As you scroll through the table, you will see that the colors change morequickly now that there is less data. The Layer field now reads Signal Strength:AVE::10,which indicates that you used the Signal Strength layer as the base, and then performed areduction using the Ave calculation method on every 10 records.



10. From the Options menu, select Reduce to display the Reduce dialog box again.

Notice that the Layer in the dialog box reflects the first reduction you performed. Thistime, change the Method to Min, and the Bin Size to 5. Then click the OK button toperform the reduction. As you scroll through the table, you will see that the colorchange is even more pronounced, and the Layer field now reads SignalStrength:AVE::10:MIN::5, which indicates that you used the Signal Strength:AVE::10layer as the base, and then performed an additional reduction using the Min calculationmethod on every 5 records. Note that in the next Quick Quiz exercise, you will besaving these new layers so you can use them again.

11. To save the file, from the File menu, select Save. This displays the SelectDevices/Layers dialog box. Since the Quick Quiz question does not ask you to removeany devices or layers from the file, click the OK button to save the file.



12. Use Operations | Exception Reporting to select the Exception Report, as shown below:

Click the Evaluate button to generate the new layer.



13. Click the Symbol Wizard button to display the Edit Symbol Mapping dialog box. Clickthe Icon radio button, and assign your choice of icon in the Sym column.

Click the Finish button to display the Save Scheme dialog box, which has a symbolscheme name already supplied, and click the OK button to save the symbol scheme.

14. Click the Close button to return to the table. Then, Click on the Title bar for Portable #1to activate it, and then select the AMPS Interference (RSS) layer to display it.

15. Use File | Save As to save all devices of the TrainAmps1.OIF file (just click the OKbutton when you see the Select in TrainAmps1.OIF dialog box), making sure you save itin your Training Folder.



16. To select several rows of data, hold down the Shift key, and click the Row Headingbutton for the first and last row you want to select. Then, from the Edit menu, selectCopy to copy the data in those rows to the Clipboard. Finally, start up your spreadsheetsoftware, open a new spreadsheet, and from the Edit menu, select Paste. Notice that thedata remains in the same tabular format that it was in when displayed in OPAS32. Theoperations for pasting the data into a word processing document are the same; however,the data is most likely displayed separated by Tab characters, rather than in a table.Note that, if your word processing software offers the option of converting text to tables,the data is formatted to make the conversion very simple to do.

Lesson 3 ▪ Using the Graph View1. In the Table View, click on the Column Heading button for the Ch334 column. Then,

click the New Graph button to display the Graph Wizard, step 1 of 2.

2. Complete the Graph Wizard as shown in the illustration above. Then, click the Next>button to display the Graph Wizard, step 2 of 2.



3. The above illustration shows how you should open the tree structure to select therequired columns. First, click on Scanner #8. Then, click Signal Strength to display thecolumns. Ch334 should already be selected because you selected it from the tablebefore starting the Wizard.Finally, click Ch335 and Ch336 to remove the Xs.

Note that the above illustration shows the graph window maximized so that the legenddisplays. You can also adjust the width of the Graph Legend window by dragging ithorizontally to achieve the display you want.

4. Click Finish to display the graph.

5. Click the Stack tool to display a stacked view of the three graphs.

6. Click the Add/Delete columns tool to display the Select/Deselect Y Columns dialog box.



7. Complete the dialog box as shown by clicking Ch 334 to place an X through it, and clickOK to re-display the graph. Note that OPAS has reassigned the colors to the tworemaining lines. This is because the graph color scheme always assigns the same colorto the first graph, the second graph, and so forth. When you removed the first graphfrom the display, the second one is now the first, and the third one is now the second.

8. Click on the Information tool. Since 18 is the first position (the starting point of the testrun), the Information box automatically displays data for this position. Notice that itdisplays all columns, not just the ones shown on the graph. The signal strength value forCh335 is –96, and the value for Ch336 is –98.

9. Slide the right elevator button to the left until position 2045 displays above the scaler.The graph should look like the one shown in the following illustration.



10. Click and hold the left mouse button with the arrow between the two elevator buttons.Then, slide the scaler to the right until you reach the point between positions 2534 and4561. The graph should look like the one shown in the following illustration.

11. From the Edit menu, select Graph Properties to display the Graph Properties Dialog box.Click on the Graph Tab to display the following dialog box.



12. Click the Draw Threshold Line button, and enter the value –90.0000 in the ThresholdValue field, as shown in the illustration. Then click OK to display the threshold line, asshown in the following illustration.

13. From the File menu, select Page Setup to display the Page Setup dialog box. Then, clickthe Header/Footer tab. The current header setting is $FN[$DV], which you can look upin the box at the bottom of the dialog box. These codes indicate that the file name anddevice name in the current graph will print. Thus, the header will contain the string:

TrainAmps1.oif[Scanner #8].

14. To add the requested information to the header, place the cursor after the current code,and type:

- $CL

Lesson 4 ▪ Using the Map View1. From the OPAS32 File menu, select Select Cellsite Database. Display your training

folder, and select TrainAmps1.mdb.

2. If necessary, activate Scanner #8, and click the New Map button to draw a map.

3. In the Map view, click the Cellsite Name and Cellsite Symbol buttons to the left of themap.

4. Click the Linear Distance tool. Then, place the arrow over the first point, and click andhold the left mouse button. Drag to the end of the horizontal segment, and release theleft mouse button. A line displays where you dragged on the map. The measurement,which is displayed in the information bar beneath the map, should read approximately10909 feet.

5. Click on the Linear Distance line on the map to remove it.



6. If necessary, reduce the size of the map to less than full-screen size. Activate theScanner #8 table by either clicking on its title bar, or selecting it from the Windowmenu. Position and scroll the two windows so that the three columns are visible in thetable and at least part of the map in the Map View window is visible. Then hold downthe CTRL key and click the titles of the three columns. With the mouse arrow on any ofthe three headings, hold down the left mouse button, and drag to the map. Release themouse button. A message box appears telling you that the Time column could not bedragged. This is because it does not contain measurable data.

7. After maximizing the window, double-click the Ch335 row in the Overlay Manager toopen the Data Layer Properties dialog box. Click the Data Track Display tab, and enter25 in both the X and Y offset boxes. Click the OK button. Do the same procedure withthe Ch336 row, but enter 50 in both the X and Y Offset boxes. Notice how the threemap sheets are now evenly spaced in the map for easier viewing.

8. Click the open eye icon on the Ch334 row in the Overlay Manager. The eye closes, andthe corresponding map sheet no longer appears in the Map View. Repeat this processfor the Ch335 row in the Overlay Manager.

9. From the Tools menu, select Options, and click the Street Map Index tab. Click the Addbutton, and switch to your training folder if necessary. Select Chi_il.map. If youalready have maps listed, this map will appear at the bottom of the list. In this case,highlight the Chi_il.map file, and click the Move Up button until the file is at the top ofthe list. Click the OK button to return to the map. Notice that the street map is not yetdisplayed on the screen.

10. From the Tools menu, select Options, and click the Street Maps tab. Make the changesnecessary so that the dialog box settings match those in the referenced figure. Thenclick the OK button to return to the map. Notice that the street map is still not displayedon the screen.

11. In the Map view, click the Street Map button. The map is drawn on the display. Noticethe level of detail in the map, which shows minor streets, bodies of waters, and more.This is because of the Street Map options you selected in the last exercise.

12. Using the Symbol Wizard, edit the dBm-Icon symbol scheme. When the Edit SymbolMap dialog box is displayed, click on the Character radio button to switch to a charactersymbol scheme. The default values are the ones we want to use, so click the Finishbutton.

13. You are prompted to save the symbol scheme once you have clicked the Finish button.Enter dBm-Char in the box provided.

14. Create a new map by displaying the Tracker #1 table, selecting the dBm column, andclicking the New Map button. If necessary, display the resulting map window so youcan see the Overlay Manager. Then, click on the line for the data track to display theLayer Properties dialog box, and select the dBm-Char symbol scheme from the drop-down list. When you click the OK button, the map will re-draw itself using this symbolscheme.



15. Click the Exception Layer button to display the Layer Properties dialog box. In theSymbol Scheme drop-down box, select the AMPS Interference Symbol Scheme. Then,click on the Data Track Display tab in the dialog box, and select 0 (zero) from the TrackOffset drop-down box. Click the OK button to display the map with the new layer.Notice that the three icons display beneath the dBm map sheet.

16. In the Overlay Manager, click and hold the left mouse button on the Result Map Sheet,and drag upward to the dBm Map Sheet. Then, release the button. The Result MapSheet should now be in the first position, and the three icons now display on top of thedBm map sheet in the Map Pane.

17. Click the Info Tool, and then click a point in the data track to open the Info box.

18. Move the cursor arrow (not the yellow Info Tool arrow) to the bottom edge of the Infobox until the arrow changes to an up and down arrow (⋅). Then click and hold the leftmouse button, drag downward to lengthen the box, and release the button.

19. Click and hold the left mouse button on the title bar of the Info box. Then drag the boxto a new location within the map.

20. Click the Beginning button to move the yellow Info Tool arrow to the first point on theroute map. Then Click the Play button to begin playback. When the yellow Info Toolarrow reaches the horizontal portion of the map, click the Stop button to stop playback.

21. Click the Fast Forward button to resume playback at a faster speed. At the end of thehorizontal portion of the map, click the Stop button to stop playback.

22. Click the End button to move the yellow Info Tool arrow to the last point in the routemap.

23. From the File menu, select Page Setup, and select the Font tab. Then click Footer in theObjects box. Now that you have identified that you want to change the font for thefooter, use the Font box to select a different font. Click the OK button to return to themap. Since the changes you made pertain only to footers in a map printout, there is nochange to the map.

24. From the File menu, select Page Setup, and select the Header/Footer tab. Delete anyexisting text in the Edit/Select Footer box, and then type the following: Print Date:$DL, File: $FN, Collection Date: $CL

25. From the File menu, select Print Preview.



Lesson 5 ▪ Analyzing DataThere are no Quick Quiz exercises in this lesson; however the appropriate files are stored inyour training folder so you can follow along with the analyses presented in the chapter.


Note: As you review these solutions, keep in mind that there might be slight variationsbetween your code and what you see in this section. The final determination is verysimple—if your code performs the required tasks, your solution is correct.

If you used the API Scripts help system as a source for code syntax but typed the scriptdirectly into the VB editor, your code for the button should look something like this:

01 Private Sub Command1_Click()02 03 'Step 1: Start OPAS3204 Dim OPAS As Object05 Set OPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")

06 'Step 2: Open the data file07 OPAS.FileOpen ("c:\opas32\demodata\training\cjs\trainamps1.oif")

08 'Step 3: Select the table for Scanner phone #809 Dim TR As Object10 Set TR = OPAS.GetActiveTR11 Dim TableView As Object12 Set TableView = TR.GetTableView(8)

13 'Step 4: Do the SSC analysis for scanning phone #814 TableView.SSC

15 'Step 5: Draw the map for scanning phone #816 TableView.NewMap

17 'Step 6: Select the table for portable #118 Set TableView = TR.GetTableView(1)

19 'Step 7: Draw the map for portable #120 TableView.NewMap

21 'Step 8: Select the map for portable #122 Dim MapView As Object23 Set MapView = TR.GetMapView(1)



24 'Step 9: Overlay the events for portable #125 MapView.ShowEvents

26 'Step 10: Overlay the handoff layer for portable #127 MapView.ShowHandOffs

28 End Sub

Note that lines 01 and 28 are from the VB editor.

• Line 01 is basically identifying the button (Command1) that the program runs from andindicates that the program should begin running when the button is clicked. If you use aMicrosoft® Office™ Visual Basic for Applications editor to create a macro without adialog box, this line would read Sub Lesn6Example(), where “Lesn6Example” is thename of the macro you created.

• Line 28 is the standard way to end a VB script. It identifies the end of the subroutine. Ifyou have been practicing with the VB editor, you may have noticed that this line is pre-supplied by VB as soon as you create a script.

If you copied all lines of each command’s example from API Script help, the redundant codewould make your script would be over 170 lines long, meaning you would have to do a lotof confusing deleting to get to the short script shown above.

For this solution, we're going to show you how to take just the code you need for eachcommand example, modify it, and then move on to the next command. This method makesit much easier to keep control over your script.

Start OPAS32 (CreateObject)

We'll start by copying the CreateObject command.01 Private Sub Command 1_Click()02 'Step 1: start OPAS32 (CreateObject)03 Dim MyOPAS As Object04 Set MyOPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")05 06 End Sub

You will recall that line 01 is provided by VB. Line 02 is a comment we entered to identifywhat the code does, and we inserted a blank line 05 for readability. Finally, line 06 is alsoprovided by VB to end the program. As we copy new lines into the script, this line will getpushed down so that it is always the last line of the script.



Open the File (FileOpen)01 Private Sub Command 1_Click()02 'Step 1: start OPAS32 (CreateObject)03 Dim MyOPAS As Object04 Set MyOPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")05 06 'Step 2: open TrainAmps1.oif (FileOpen)07 Dim OPAS As Object08 Dim ErrCode as Integer09 ErrCode = OPAS.FileOpen("TEST2.OIF")10 End Sub

Copying in the FileOpen command example brought in line 07, which is redundant, so itneeds to be deleted.

• Lines 08 and 09 do something a little different for the FileOpen command. The examplescript for the FileOpen command uses a different method for opening the file than youhave seen up to this point. Notice that line 08 declares a variable called Errcode as aninteger. Then, line 09 precedes the FileOpen command with Errcode =. These two linesof code cause an error message to be displayed in the event that the file cannot beopened (for example, it cannot be found in the default path, which would be used if afull path is not provided). This technique can be considered to be good defensiveprogramming. If an error occurs, the user will be able to identify the problem.

• Also, notice that in line 09, "OPAS" will need to be changed to "MyOPAS" because thatis how it's declared in line 03.

Select the Table for Scanner Phone #8 (GetActiveTR and GetTableView)01 Private Sub Command 1_Click()02 'Step 1: start OPAS32 (CreateObject)03 Dim MyOPAS As Object04 Set MyOPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")05 06 'Step 2: open TrainAmps1.oif (FileOpen)07 Dim ErrCode as Integer08 ErrCode = OPAS.FileOpen("TEST2.OIF")09 10 ' Select table for Scanner #8 (GetActiveTR and GetTableView11 Dim TR As Object12 Set TR = Opas.GetActiveTR()13 Dim TableVW As Object14 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(3)15 End Sub

We only took two lines from the GetActiveTR and the GetTableView command examples,as shown in lines 11 through 14.



• While line 11 required no changes, note that in line 12, we will need to change "Opas"to "MyOPAS" because that's how it's declared in line 03.

• Again, line 13 requires no changes, but the number in the GetTableView command inline 14 will need to be changed to 8 to reflect the portable #8 device.

Perform SSC Analysis for Scanning Phone #8 (SSC)01 Private Sub Command 1_Click()02 'Step 1: start OPAS32 (CreateObject)03 Dim MyOPAS As Object04 Set MyOPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")05 06 'Step 2: open TrainAmps1.oif (FileOpen)07 Dim ErrCode as Integer08 ErrCode = MyOPAS.FileOpen("TEST2.OIF")09 10 ' Select table for Scanner #8 (GetActiveTR and GetTableView11 Dim TR As Object12 Set TR = MyOpas.GetActiveTR()13 Dim TableVW As Object14 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(3)15 16 ' Perform SSC Analysis for Scanning Phone #8 (SSC)17 TableVW.SSC18 End Sub

We only took one line from the SSC command example, and it required no changes, asshown in line17.

Draw the Map for Scanning Phone #8 (NewMap)01 Private Sub Command 1_Click()02 'Step 1: start OPAS32 (CreateObject)03 Dim MyOPAS As Object04 Set MyOPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")05 06 'Step 2: open TrainAmps1.oif (FileOpen)07 Dim ErrCode as Integer08 ErrCode = MyOPAS.FileOpen("TEST2.OIF")09 10 ' Select table for Scanner #8 (GetActiveTR and GetTableView11 Dim TR As Object12 Set TR = MyOpas.GetActiveTR()13 Dim TableVW As Object14 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(3)15 16 'Perform SSC Analysis for Scanning Phone #8 (SSC)17 TableVW.SSC18 19 'Draw map for scanning phone #8 (NewMap)20 TableVW.NewMap21 End Sub

Again, adding the NewMap command was easy (line 20). Only one line was copied fromthe command example, and no changes were required.



Select the Table for Portable #1 (GetTableView)01 Private Sub Command 1_Click()02 'Step 1: start OPAS32 (CreateObject)03 Dim MyOPAS As Object04 Set MyOPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")05 06 'Step 2: open TrainAmps1.oif (FileOpen)07 Dim ErrCode as Integer08 ErrCode = MyOPAS.FileOpen("TEST2.OIF")09 10 ' Select table for Scanner #8 (GetActiveTR and GetTableView11 Dim TR As Object12 Set TR = MyOpas.GetActiveTR()13 Dim TableVW As Object14 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(3)15 16 'Perform SSC Analysis for Scanning Phone #8 (SSC)17 TableVW.SSC18 19 'Draw map for scanning phone #8 (NewMap)20 TableVW.NewMap21 22 'Select table for portable #1 (GetTableView)23 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(3)24 End Sub

Since we had already selected a table before on line 14, we just copied that line of codedown to line 23. Of course, we have to change the 3 to 1.

Draw the Map (NewMap)01 Private Sub Command 1_Click()02 'Step 1: start OPAS32 (CreateObject)03 Dim MyOPAS As Object04 Set MyOPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")05 06 'Step 2: open TrainAmps1.oif (FileOpen)07 Dim ErrCode as Integer08 ErrCode = MyOPAS.FileOpen("TEST2.OIF")09 10 ' Select table for Scanner #8 (GetActiveTR and GetTableView11 Dim TR As Object12 Set TR = MyOpas.GetActiveTR()13 Dim TableVW As Object14 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(3)15 16 'Perform SSC Analysis for Scanning Phone #8 (SSC)17 TableVW.SSC18 19 'Draw map for scanning phone #8 (NewMap)20 TableVW.NewMap21



22 'Select table for portable #1 (GetTableView)23 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(1)24 25 ' Draw the map for portable #1 (NewMap)26 TableVW.NewMap27 End Sub

Another easy one: we already drew a map in line 19, so we just copied that line to line 26.

Select the Map (GetMapView), Overlay Events (ShowEvents), andOverlay Handoff Layer (ShowHandOffs)01 Private Sub Command 1_Click()02 'Step 1: start OPAS32 (CreateObject)03 Dim MyOPAS As Object04 Set MyOPAS = CreateObject("OPAS")05 06 'Step 2: open TrainAmps1.oif (FileOpen)07 Dim ErrCode as Integer08 ErrCode = MyOPAS.FileOpen("TEST2.OIF")09 10 ' Select table for Scanner #8 (GetActiveTR and GetTableView11 Dim TR As Object12 Set TR = MyOpas.GetActiveTR()13 Dim TableVW As Object14 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(3)15 16 'Perform SSC Analysis for Scanning Phone #8 (SSC)17 TableVW.SSC18 19 'Draw map for scanning phone #8 (NewMap)20 TableVW.NewMap21 22 'Select table for portable #1 (GetTableView)23 Set TableVW = TR.GetTableView(1)24 25 'Draw the map for portable #1 (NewMap)26 TableVW.NewMap27 28 'Select map for portable #1 (GetMapView)29 Set MapVW = TR.GetMapView(1)30 31 'Overlay Events for Portable #1 (ShowEvents)32 MapVW.ShowEvents33 34 'Overlay Handoff Layer for portable #1 (ShowHandOffs)35 MapVW.ShowHandOffs36 End Sub

For lines 29, 32, and 35, we copied a single line from the command example into the text.Although line 29 could have required a change, it happened that the command examplealready showed device #1. Lines 32 and 35 required no changes at all.



Notes


Index

AAdd columns graph tool, 105Add Data Track tool button in maps, 138Advanced File Retrieval System (AFRS), 189, 190

retrieving data, 196Retrieving data, 192

Advanced Programming Interface. See "API Scripts"Analog analysis

case study, 204exception reporting, 209identifying areas of concern, 205propagation of cell site channel, 220reviewing SINAD measurements, 216using Info tool in maps, 218

Analog Datadisplaying different parameters in tables, 48

Analysis Wizardscreating new layers with, 85

Annotation button in maps, 139API Commands

graphs, 124maps, 202tables, 95

API scriptsadvanced programming requirements, 284advantages, 283commenting code, 305defining variables, 303object class hierarchy, 305object methods, 295object properties, 294object-oriented programming overview, 292overview, 32prerequisites for VisualBasic Programming, 283Seven steps to creating and using, 297using object classes, 293using online help for, 298using online help for, 300using VisualBasic for Applications, 285VisualBasic overview, 291VisualBasic tools, 283

Appearance of maps, changing, 155, 156Arithmetic operators

Boolean selection, 67ASCII Exchange Format (AXF) File, 95ASCII files

conversion to .OIF, 40AXF Format File, 95Axis ticks, changing in graphs, 112

BBitmap Layer button in maps, 139Bitmap tool button in maps, 186Bitmaps

2-point place bitmap, 196deleting, 197editing, 197flipping horizontally, 196flipping vertically, 196hiding, 196inserting in maps, 186rotating, 197showing, 196

Boolean selectionarithmetic operators, 67logical operators, 66overview, 29, 63tool, 64

Boolean Selectionusing queries in Exception Reporting, 84

ButtonsAdd Data Track tool, 138add or delete columns graph tool, 105Annotation, 139Bitmap layer, 139Bitmap tool, 186C to I in tables, 43, 58Cell Site Name, 132Cell Site Names layer, 138Cell Site Symbol, 132Cell Site Symbol layer, 138column heading in tables, 42Distance tool, 135Ellipse Drawing, 140Events layer, 139Exception layer, 138Freehand Tool, 139Grab tool, 135graph highlight tool, 108graph histogram, 119graph information tool, 109graph overlay tool, 104graph stack tool, 104graph zoom in tool, 107graph zoom out tool, 107Handoff layer, 139Handover layer, 139Info tool, 116, 137, 183Layer 2 layer, 139

Index


Buttons (cont'd.)Layer 3 layer, 139Line Drawing, 140Linear Distance tool, 135Marker layer, 138Message Layer, 139New Map, 127Notes layer, 139overview, 130Print, 202Rectangle Drawing, 140Retrieve (AFRS), 192Retrieve tool, 137row heading in tables, 42Select Circle tool, 137Select Rectangle tool, 136signal strength in tables, 43, 58strongest single channel in tables, 43, 58table select, in tables, 42TQNM VoicePrint layer, 139Zoom Out tool, 136Zoom tool, 136

CC to I button in tables, 43, 58CAL files, 18

for .SD4 conversion to .OIF, 40Case studies

Analog analysis, 204CDMA analysis, 222GSM analysis, 246

Case studies, 203CDMA analysis

case study, 222CDMA data, expanding, 87Cell in tables, 43Cell Site database

displaying, 131importing, 131

Cell Site Name button in maps, 132Cell Site Names Layer button in maps, 138Cell Site Symbol button in maps, 132Cell Site Symbol Layer button in maps, 138Clipboard, overview, 30Color schemes

defining, 50from maps, 195removing from map legend, 150selecting, 56

Column heading table button, 42Columns, adding or deleting in graphs, 105Commands in Scripts

using online help for syntax, 298Comments in scripts, 305Converting data for OPAS32, 18, 39Data sources, 18VisualBasic for Applications, 285Customizing OPAS32

Graph View display, 102Table View display, 45

Customizing the X Axis in Graphs, 111

DData tracks

adding and modifying, 140changing properties, 146stack order, 145turning display on or off, 147

Data, reduction in tables, 56Decode layer 3 parameters, 55Defaults, setting in maps, 154Delete columns graph tool, 105Deleting rows in tables, 48Dim statement in scripts, 303Displaying a graph, 98Displaying a map, 127Displaying different layers in tables, 47Distance tool button in maps, 135Distance, measuring in maps, 135Distribution charts, creating, 119Drawing quick stop, maps, 162

EEllipse drawing button in maps, 140ETAK maps, customizing display, 159Events Layer button in maps, 139Exception Layer button in maps, 138Exception Reporting, 68

and Boolean selection, differences, 69Build Query, 75changing exception reports with manual edit, 83Creating an exception layer, 69Creating an exception layer symbol scheme, 73creating or changing exception reports, 75, 80importing Boolean Selection Queries, 84mapping an exception layer, 181viewing an exception layer, 74viewing exception report details, 71

Exporting table data, 60to MapInfo, 62to Microsoft Excel, 62

FFile conversion to .OIF format, 39File types

.CAL, for .SD4 conversion to OIF, 40

.FQM, used in .SD4 conversion to OIF, 40

.SD5, conversion to OIF, 40ASCII, conversion to OIF, 40AXF, 95CAL, 18FQM, 18OIF, 38Qualcomm CDMA DM Data, conversion to OIF, 40Qualcomm CDMA Windows DM Data, conversion to OIF,

40SD4, 18SD4, conversion to OIF, 40SD5, 18SRS, conversion to OIF, 40

Index


FontsGraph View Axis and Legend, 103Map View Legend, 149

FQM files, 18used in conversion to .OIF, 40

Freehand drawing button in maps, 139

GGrab tool button in maps, 135Graph Data pane, defined, 102Graph highlight tool, 108Graph histogram button, 119Graph information tool, 109Graph Legend pane, defined, 102Graph overlay tool, 104Graph Stack tool, 104Graph tools, defined, 102Graph View

adding columns, 105API script commands, 124changing axis ticks, 112changing fonts, 103changing series properties, 116customizing the display, 102customizing the X Axis, 111displaying a graph, 98Graph Data Pane, defined, 102Graph Legend pane, defined, 102graph tools, defined, 102grid lines, drawing, 113highlighting, 108information about specific points, 109overview, 21parts of the Graph View window, 101print preview, 122printing graphs, 123scaler, defined, 102stacking or overlaying graphs, 104threshold lines, drawing, 114viewing data values, 116X axis line, defined, 102Y axis line, defined, 102Y axis range, changing, 110zoom, 107

Grid lines, drawing in graphs, 113GSM analysis

case study, 246GSM data, expanding, 87

HHandoff layer button in maps, 139Handover layer button in maps, 139Help system

scripts, overview, 32using for script command syntax, 298using script examples for programming, 300

Hiding columns in tables, 46, 56Highlighting in graphs, 108Histogram, overview, 31Histograms

creating, 119

IInfo tool button in graphs, 116Info tool button in maps, 137, 183Information, viewing in graphs, 109Inverting data

selected in maps, 196selected in tables, 56

KKeyboard techniques in tables, 45

LLayer 2 Layer button in maps, 139Layer 3 Layer button in maps, 139Layer 3 parameters, decoding, 55Layer export, 60

to MapInfo, 62to Microsoft Excel, 62

Layer Selection drop down box in tables, 42Layers

changing in tables, 47creating exception layers, 68, 69creating exception report symbol schemes, 73creating or changing exception reports, 75, 80creating or changing exception reports with Manual Edit, 83defining exception layers, 75exception reports, defined, 68viewing exception layers, 74viewing exception report details, 71

Line drawing button in maps, 140Linear Distance tool button in maps, 135Linear Distance, measuring in maps, 135Logical operators

Boolean selection, 66

MMap layer tools

described, 130Map Legend

modifying, 149Map options, 196Map Overview pane, described, 130Map pane, described, 130Map routes, playing, 183Map sheets

deleting, 147Map tools, described, 130Map view

adding data tracks, 141Advanced File Retrieval System (AFRS), 189Advanced File Retrieval System (AFRS) setup, 190Advanced File Retrieval System (AFRS), typical uses, 189AFRS retrieve, 196API Script commands, 202appearance of map, changing, 155, 156Bitmap, 2-point place, 196Bitmap, delete, 197

Index


Map view (cont'd.)Bitmap, edit info, 197Bitmap, flip horizontally, 196Bitmap, flip vertically, 196Bitmap, hide, 196bitmap, inserting, 186Bitmap, rotate, 197Bitmap, show, 196Boolean selection, overview, 63color scheme, 195data track stack order, 145deleting map sheet(s), 147displaying a map, 127distance, measuring, 135drawing quick stop, 162ETAK maps, customizing display, 159inverting selection of data, 196linear distance, measuring, 135map options, 196modifying data track properties, 146modifying data tracks, 140opening a map, 127overview of, 20parts of map window, 129playing a map route, 183popup menus, 195print preview, 200printing maps, 198relative graph, go to, 195relative table, go to, 195selecting data, 136, 137setting defaults, 154signal strength display, specifying, 161SINAD measurements in Analog analysis, 216street maps, displaying, 161street maps, displaying, 161street maps, identifying for display, 157symbol scheme, 196symbol schemes, creating or changing, 163types of maps supported, 161units of measure, specifying, 161using Info tool for analysis, 218

Map2 tab, 156Map3 tab, 156MapInfo, exporting layers to, 62Marker Layer button in maps, 138Message Layer button in maps, 139Microsoft Excel, exporting layers to, 62Microsoft® Office™

running scripts from, 291Moving columns in tables, 47

NNew Map button in maps, 127Notes Layer button in maps, 139

OObject

class hierarchy in scripts, 305classes, as used in scripts, 293methods, as used in scripts, 295properties, as used in scripts, 294

Object-oriented programming, overview, 292OIF files

converting to, 39opening, 38

Online helpAPI scripts, 298

Online HelpASCII Exchange Format, 96AXF, 96Boolean selection syntax, 65using for color scheme definition, 40, 50, 83, 169, 170using for entering queries, 83using for Layer Export options, 62

OPAS32quick tour, 15starting, 17

Overlaying graphs, 104Data reduction, 31

PParameter Selection drop down box in tables, 43Parameters, displaying different (Analog), 48Parts of Map Window, 129Popup menus

maps, 195tables, 55

Print button in maps, 202Print Preview

graphs, 122maps, 200tables, 93

Printinggraphs, 123maps, 198overview, 30tables, 94

QQualcomm CDMA DM Data files

conversion to .OIF, 40Qualcomm CDMA Windows DM Data files

conversion to .OIF, 40Queries

for creating exception layers, 75Queries with Boolean selection, overview

overview, 29

Index


RRectangle drawing button in maps, 140Reducing data, overview, 31Relative graph, go to from maps, 195Relative map, go to, 55Relative table, go to from maps, 195Resizing rows and columns in tables, 45Retrieve tool button (AFRS) in maps, 137, 192Row heading table button, 42Rows, deleting in tables, 48Run Script, 286Running OPAS32, 17Running Scripts

Using Scripts Toolbar, 286Using Set and Run Script, 286

VisualBasic for Applications, 286

SSaving table data, 59Scaler, defined, 102Script Toolbar, 286

assigning scripts to buttons, 286setup of button display, 289

Scriptsadvanced programming requirements, 284advantages, 283commenting code, 305defining variables, 303Graph View commands, 124Map View commands, 202object class hierarchy, 305object classes, 293object methods, 295object properties, 294object-oriented programming overview, 292overview, 32prerequisites for VisualBasic programming, 283running VBA scripts from Microsoft® Office™ applications,

291seven steps to creating and using, 297Table View commands, 95using online help for, 300using OPAS32 online help for, 298Using Script Toolbar, 286using VisualBasic for Applications, 285using VisualBasic overview, 291VisualBasic tools, 283

SD4 files, 18conversion to .OIF, 40

SD5 files, 18conversion to .OIF, 40

Select Circle tool button in maps, 137Select Rectangle tool button in maps, 136Selecting data in maps, 136, 137Series properties, drawing in graphs, 116Set Script, 286Set statement in scripts, 303

Setting up for trainingAnalog Analysis in Lesson 5, 204CDMA Analysis in Lesson 5, 222GSM Analysis in Lesson 5, 246Lesson 1, 16Lesson 2, 37Lesson 3, 98Lesson 4, 127Lesson 6, 282

Setup for CDMA analysis, 222Setup for GSM analysis, 246Signal Strength button in tables, 43, 58Signal strength display, specifying for maps, 161SINAD, reviewing map data, 216Splitter bars, use of in tables, 43Splitter bars, use of in tables, 49SRS files

conversion to .OIF, 40Stacking graphs, 104Starting OPAS32, 17Street Map button in maps, 161Street maps

displaying, 161identifying for display, 157

Strongest Single Channeltables, 43

Strongest Single Channel button in tables, 58, 59Symbol schemes

from maps, 196removing from map legend, 150

Symbolsapplying symbol schemes to a data track, 175character symbol schemes, defined, 163creating an exception report symbol scheme, 73creating or changing symbol schemes, 163icon symbol schemes, defined, 163newsymbol schemes, creating, 165symbol wizard, 164

TTable data, saving, 59Table Select button, 42Table view

API Script commands, 95Boolean selection tool, 64Boolean selection, arithmetic operators, 67Boolean selection, logical operators, 66Boolean selection, overview, 63C to I button, 43, 58CDMA data, expanding, 87cell, 43change of physical display, 51color schemes defining, 50color schemes, selecting, 56customizing the display, 45deleting rows, 48displaying different layers, 47Displaying different parameters (Analog), 48GSM data, expanding, 87

Index


Table view (cont'd.)hiding and unhiding columns, 46, 56inverting selection of data, 56layer selection drop down box, 42moving columns, 47opening, 37output, 88overview of, 19parameter selection drop down box, 43parts of the Table Window, 42popup menus, 55print preview, 93printing tables, 94reducing data, 56resizing rows and columns, 45saving table data, 59signal strength button, 43, 58splitter bar, 43splitter bars, use of, 49strongest single channel, 43, 58title bar, 43window order, changing, 52

TechnologiesAnalog analysis, case study, 204Analog analysis, setting up for, 204CDMA analysis, case study, 222CDMA analysis, setting up for, 222GSM analysis, case study, 246GSM analysis, setting up for, 246

Test run filessetting up for AFRS, 190viewing data from multiple, 189

Threshold lines, drawing in graphs, 114Title Bar in tables, 43Tool, Boolean selection, 64Tools

Map, described, 130TQNM VoicePrint layer button in maps, 139Training setup

Lesson 2, 37Lesson 3, 98Lesson 4, 127Lesson 5, 204Lesson 6, 282

UUnhiding columns in tables, 46, 56Units of measure, specifying for maps, 161

VViews

graph, overview of, 21map, overview of, 20Table overview, 19

VisualBasicOverview, 291prerequisites, 283tools, 283

VisualBasic for Applications, 285

WWindow

changing display order in tables, 52Graph View, 101Map View, 129Table View, 42

Wireless Explorer, 22displaying or hiding, 23docking, 27Dragging and Dropping Data to Maps or Graphs, 24Opening Files, 23

Wizardscreating new layers with, 85overview, 27

XX axis line, defined, 102

YY axis line, defined, 102Y Axis, changing range in graphs, 110

ZZoom

graphs, 107Zoom Out tool button in maps, 136Zoom tool button in maps, 136

What Did You Think of This Manual?Title Teach Yourself OPAS32 Self-Training Guide Part No. 2083-202, Revision E

Instructions: After using this manual, please complete the short survey below, or e-mail your comments [email protected], specifying the manual title and part number, to quickly submit your comments online.Your comments will be used to enhance future revisions of Teach Yourself OPAS32. Thank you for takingthe time to complete this form!

How do you rate the information in this manual?

Excellent Good AdequateNeeds

ImprovementNo

CommentAccurate? � � � � �

Complete? � � � � �

Easy to understand? � � � � �

Easy to Use? � � � � �

Well organized? � � � � �

Applicable to your tasks? � � � � �

How do you rate the design of this manual?


ImprovementNo

CommentEasy-to-read pages? � � � � �

Helpful illustrations? � � � � �

Visual cues identified tasks andinformation?

� � � � �

Overall, was this manual effective in helping you learn how to use OPAS32?


ImprovementNo

CommentOverall effectiveness? � � � � �

What did you like most about this manual?

Do you have suggestions that would improve this manual?

Return this form by:FAX: 773-594-5931

MAIL: SAFCO Technologies, Inc.OPAS32 Documentation6060 Northwest HighwayChicago, IL 60631

Name (Optional) Address (Optional)

Company (Optional)

Telephone Number (Optional)

teach yourself opas32 - keysightsafco technologies, inc. 1 before you begin welcome to teach...

Documents